Rational PCDMIS V5.5

RationalDMIS User Manual
-1-
Contents
WELCOME TO USE RATIONALDMIS ............................................................................................ 1
SOFTWARE AUTHORIZATION DESCRIPTION ............................................................................ 2
RATIONALDMIS HELP INFORMATION......................................................................................... 4
HELP-KEYBOARD OPERATION ......................................................... 4

HELP-MOUSE OPERATION ............................................................ 6
HELP-SOFTWARE INTERFACE ......................................................... 7
INSTALL RATIONALDMIS ................................................................................................................ 9
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ............................................................. 9

RATIONALDMIS INSTALLATION ...................................................... 10
INSTALL SOFTWARE LOCK .......................................................... 11
QUICK USE GUIDE TO SOFTWARE .............................................................................................. 12
QUICK USE OF RATIONALDMIS ...................................................... 13

RationalDMIS Interface Preview ................................................................................................... 13
Run RationalDMIS ......................................................................................................................... 14
Add New User ................................................................................................................................ 15
QUICKLY MASTER CONSTRUCT OF MACHINE MODEL .......................................... 16
Create Machine Model ................................................................................................................... 16
Load Machine Model ..................................................................................................................... 19
QUICKLY LEARN OPERATION AND USE OF SENSOR .......................................... 20
Create Sensor Calibration Gage .................................................................................................... 20
Create New Sensor ......................................................................................................................... 22
Custom Stylus, etc. ......................................................................................................................... 26
Create New Sensor Angle ............................................................................................................... 29
Calibrate Sensor ............................................................................................................................ 32
QUICKLY LEARN OPERATION AND USER OF COORDINATE SYSTEM ................................ 34
Set up Quick 3-2-1 Coordinate System ........................................................................................... 34
Use Create Coordinate System ....................................................................................................... 36
Use Moving Coordinate System ..................................................................................................... 39
Use Rotating Coordinate System .................................................................................................... 41
QUICKLY LEARN OPERATION AND USER OF MEASUREMENT ..................................... 43
Intelligent Measurement ................................................................................................................. 43
Measure Point Feature ................................................................................................................... 45
Measure 2D Feature ...................................................................................................................... 47
Measure 3D Feature ...................................................................................................................... 49
QUICKLY LEARN FEATURE CONSTRUCT OPERATION .......................................... 51
Use Construct-Best-fit Function..................................................................................................... 51
Use Construct-Intersection Function ............................................................................................. 54
QUICKLY LEARN TOLERANCE OPERATION ................................................ 57
Use Distance Tolerance.................................................................................................................. 57
-2-
Use Diameter Tolerance ................................................................................................................. 61
QUICKLY LEARN PRODUCTION OF OUTPUT REPORT .......................................... 64
QUICKLY LEARN DMIS PROGRAM PRODUCTION............................................. 68
Create A Simple DMIS Program .................................................................................................... 68
Open DMIS Program ..................................................................................................................... 74
Run DMIS Program ....................................................................................................................... 75
Stop Running DMIS Program ........................................................................................................ 76
INTRODUCTION TO MAIN MENU AREA .................................................................................... 77
MAIN MENU-NEW ................................................................ 78

MAIN MENU-OPEN SOLUTION ........................................................ 79
MAIN MENU-SAVE SOLUTION ........................................................ 80
MAIN MENU-SAVE SOLUTION AS…… .................................................. 81
MAIN MENU-IMPORT DATA FROM SOLUTION............................................... 82
MAIN MENU-IMPORT CAD .......................................................... 83
MAIN MENU-EXPORT CAD .......................................................... 85
MAIN MENU-IMPORT SENSOR DATA .................................................... 87
MAIN MENU-EXPORT DATA .......................................................... 88
MAIN MENU-OPTIONS ............................................................. 89
Options-Load Machine Model ....................................................................................................... 90
Options-Create Machine Model ..................................................................................................... 91
Options-Application Setup ............................................................................................................. 92
MAIN MENU-WINDOW ............................................................. 146
Main Menu-Window-Switch Viewer and Data Window ................................................................ 147
Main Menu-Window-Restore Default Window Position ............................................................... 148
Main Menu-Window-Data Window .............................................................................................. 149
Main Menu-Window-Operation Window...................................................................................... 150
Main Menu-Window-Status Bar ................................................................................................... 151
Main Menu-Window-Shortcut Window ........................................................................................ 152
Main Menu-Window-Data Window Shortcut................................................................................ 154
MAIN MENU-HELP .............................................................. 155
Main Menu-Help-Show Help ....................................................................................................... 156
Main Menu-Help-Show Assistant ................................................................................................. 157
Main Menu-Help-Show License Agreement ................................................................................. 159
Main Menu-Help-Show Machine Checking Gage Viewer ............................................................ 160
Main Menu-Help-Show DMIS Execution Summary Viewer ......................................................... 161
Main Menu-Help-Show Sensor Calib History Viewer .................................................................. 162
Main Menu-Help-Show App Log Viewer ...................................................................................... 163
Main Menu-Help-Support Tools ................................................................................................... 164
Main Menu-Help-Check for Update............................................................................................. 165
Main Menu-Help-About RationalDMIS ....................................................................................... 166
GRAPHIC AREA ............................................................................................................................... 168
GRAPH VIEWER F3.............................................................. 169

Graph Viewer-Window Selection Icon and Drop-down Toolbar .................................................. 172
-3-
Graph Viewer-Window Selection Icon and Drop-down Toolbar .................................................. 175
Graph Viewer-View Mode ............................................................................................................ 177
Graph Viewer-Zoom in Graphic Area .......................................................................................... 178
Graph Viewer-View All ................................................................................................................. 179
Graph Viewer-View Rotation Mode .............................................................................................. 180
Graph Viewer-Display Settings .................................................................................................... 182
Graph Viewer-Color Settings ....................................................................................................... 184
Graph Viewer-Auto Function Settings.......................................................................................... 185
Graph Viewer-Remove ................................................................................................................. 187
Graph Viewer-Measure Point Pick Settings ................................................................................. 188
DMIS EDITOR F4 .............................................................. 206
DMIS Editor-File Options ............................................................................................................ 207
DMIS Editor-Edit Options ........................................................................................................... 209
DMIS Editor-Search and Replace ................................................................................................ 210
DMIS Editor-Bookmark ............................................................................................................... 211
DMIS Editor-Format Options ...................................................................................................... 213
DMIS Editor-To Program ............................................................................................................. 215
GRAPHIC AREA-OUTPUT F5 ........................................................ 216
Output-Set Saving Path for Output File ....................................................................................... 217
Output-Output Toolbar ................................................................................................................. 219
Output –Screen Output Window ................................................................................................... 221
Output-Excel Output Window ....................................................................................................... 224
Output-Output Setup Window ....................................................................................................... 225
Output-Various Output Forms Samples ....................................................................................... 250
GRAPHIC AREA-GRAPHICAL REPORTS F6 ............................................... 256
Graphical Report-Toolbar............................................................................................................ 257
Graphical Report-Main Window .................................................................................................. 262
Graphical Report-Set Graphical Report ...................................................................................... 266
GRAPHIC AREA-FORM ERROR REPORT F7 .............................................. 272
FORM Error Report-Toolbar ....................................................................................................... 273
FORM Error Report-Main Window ............................................................................................. 281
DOUBLE DATABASE ....................................................................................................................... 283
FEATURE DATABASE ............................................................. 285

Feature Database-Drag and Drop of Nominal Feature and Actual Feature ............................... 286
Feature Database-Point Cloud .................................................................................................... 287
Feature Database - Feature Selection.......................................................................................... 290
Feature Database -Rename Feature Label .................................................................................. 291
Feature Database –Feature Property........................................................................................... 292
Feature Database-Father Node Right Click Menu ...................................................................... 295
Feature Database-Right Click Menu of Child Node .................................................................... 297
Feature Database-Plane Generation Measurement Point ........................................................... 300
Feature Database-Circle Generation Measurement Point ........................................................... 302
Feature Database-Sphere Generation Measurement Point.......................................................... 305
Feature Database-Cylinder Generation Measurement Point....................................................... 307
-4-
Feature Database-Cone Generation Measurement Point ............................................................ 310
Feature Database-Curve Generation Measurement Point ........................................................... 311
Feature Database-CAD Model Right Click Menu ....................................................................... 312
Feature Database-Feature Drag and Drop Application .............................................................. 316
COORDINATE DATABASE ........................................................... 318
Coordinate System Database-Coordinate System Node ............................................................... 319
Coordinate System Database-Outer Coordinate System .............................................................. 322
Coordinate System Database-DAT Node ..................................................................................... 324
Coordinate System Database-Iteration Node ............................................................................... 325
Coordinate System Database-CRD Frame Node ......................................................................... 326
Coordinate System Database-Drag and Drop Operation of Coordinate System ......................... 327
SENSOR DATABASE .............................................................. 329
Sensor Database-Sensor Node ..................................................................................................... 330
Sensor Database-Calibration Gage Node .................................................................................... 336
Sensor Database-Rotary Table Node ........................................................................................... 338
Sensor Database-Sensor Change Node ........................................................................................ 340
Sensor Database-Sensor Database Drag and Drop Application ................................................. 343
VARIABLE DATABASE ............................................................ 345
Variable Database-Create New Variable ..................................................................................... 346
Variable Database-Delete Variable .............................................................................................. 349
Variable Database-Edit Existing Variables .................................................................................. 350
Variable Database-Variable Drag and Drop Application ............................................................ 351
Variable Database-DMIS Macro .................................................................................................. 353
Variable Database-External Resources ........................................................................................ 369
PROGRAM DATABASE ............................................................. 370
Program Database-DMIS Execution Toolbar .............................................................................. 371
Program Database-DMIS Function Toolbar ................................................................................ 374
Program Database-DMIS Program Window ............................................................................... 384
Program Database-DMIS Program Window Drag and Drop Application .................................. 386
CUSTOM VIEW DATABASE .......................................................... 387
Custom View Database-Project Views .......................................................................................... 388
Custom View Database-Graphical Reports View ......................................................................... 390
Custom View Database-Form Error Report View ........................................................................ 393
Custom View Database-Dimension Label Report View ................................................................ 397
Custom View Database-Display Layers ....................................................................................... 398
FUNCTION OPERATION AREA .................................................................................................... 400
MEASUREMENT ................................................................. 401

Measurement-Intelligent Measurement ........................................................................................ 403
Measurement-Measurement of Two-dimensional Features .......................................................... 404
Measurement-Measurement of Three-dimensional Features ....................................................... 406
Measurement- Measurement Working Area.................................................................................. 408
CONSTRUCT ................................................................... 442
Construct-Construct Result Window ............................................................................................ 443
Construct-Middle Feature Construct ........................................................................................... 445
-5-
Construct-Parallel Feature Construct ......................................................................................... 448
Construct-Intersection Feature Construct ................................................................................... 450
Construct-Perpendicular Feature Construct................................................................................ 453
Construct-Tangent Feature Construct .......................................................................................... 455
Construct-Project Feature Construct ........................................................................................... 458
Construct-Moving Feature Construct .......................................................................................... 464
Construct-Best Fit Feature Construct .......................................................................................... 467
Construct-Mirror Feature Construct............................................................................................ 469
Construct-Bound Feature Construct ............................................................................................ 472
Construct-Cone Function Construct ............................................................................................ 474
Construct-Extreme Point Feature Construct ................................................................................ 475
Construct-Three Point Offset Plane Construct............................................................................. 477
Construct-Transfer Feature Construct ......................................................................................... 478
Construct-Multiple Points Offset Plane Construct ....................................................................... 480
Construct-Copy Create Feature Construct .................................................................................. 481
Construct-Sweep Construct .......................................................................................................... 483
SENSOR ..................................................................... 484
Sensor-Create New Probe ............................................................................................................ 486
Sensor-Create Calibration Gage of Probe ................................................................................... 489
Sensor-Sensor Calibration ........................................................................................................... 491
Sensor-Sensor Calibration Shortcut ............................................................................................. 495
Test Head-Probe Assembling........................................................................................................ 497
Test Head-Define Angle of New Probe ......................................................................................... 502
Test Head-Definition and Automatic Calibration of Probe .......................................................... 504
Other Operation Applications of Test Head-Probe ...................................................................... 506
Installation Verification of Test Head-Test Base........................................................................... 509
TOLERANCE ................................................................... 510
Tolerance-Distance Tolerance ...................................................................................................... 512
Tolerance-Angle Tolerance........................................................................................................... 514
Tolerance- Angularity Tolerance .................................................................................................. 515
Tolerance- Perpendicularity Tolerance ........................................................................................ 516
Tolerance-Parallelism tolerance .................................................................................................. 517
Tolerance-Position Tolerance....................................................................................................... 518
Tolerance-Cylindricity Tolerance ................................................................................................. 519
Tolerance-Coordinate Tolerance .................................................................................................. 520
Tolerance- Concentricity Tolerance ............................................................................................. 521
Tolerance-Circular Runout Tolerance .......................................................................................... 522
Tolerance-Total Runout Tolerance ............................................................................................... 523
Tolerance-Circularity Tolerance .................................................................................................. 524
Tolerance-Cone Tolerance ........................................................................................................... 525
Tolerance-Diameter Tolerance ..................................................................................................... 526
Tolerance-Radius Tolerance ......................................................................................................... 527
Tolerance-Flatness Tolerance ...................................................................................................... 528
Tolerance-Straightness Tolerance ................................................................................................ 529
-6-
Tolerance-Point Profile Tolerance ............................................................................................... 530
Tolerance- Curve Profile Tolerance ............................................................................................. 531
Tolerance- Surface Profile Tolerance ........................................................................................... 533
Tolerance-Symmetry Tolerance .................................................................................................... 535
Tolerance-Width Tolerance........................................................................................................... 536
COORDINATE SYSTEM ............................................................ 537
Coordinate system - Coordinate Translation................................................................................ 538
Coordinate System – Coordinate Rotation ................................................................................... 540
Coordinate System – Create Coordinate ...................................................................................... 542
Coordinate system – Offset Coordinate ........................................................................................ 546
Coordinate – Create Coordinate System by Three Points Bestfit ................................................. 549
Coordinate System – Two Points Offset Alignment Coordinate System ....................................... 551
Coordinate System – Six Points Bestfit Coordinate System.......................................................... 554
Coordinate System – Multi Points Bestfit Coordinate System ...................................................... 557
Coordinate System – Merge Coordinate System .......................................................................... 561
Coordinate System-3-2-1 Coordinate System Creation Method II ............................................... 563
Coordinate System-Quick 3-2-1 Coordinate System Creation ..................................................... 567
Coordinate System-CAD Aligned Coordinate System .................................................................. 571
Coordinate Syste-Iterative Alligned Fitting Coordinate System ....................... 错误!未定义书签。
Coordinate System- Coordinate System Mapping ........................................................................ 575
STATUS REGION .............................................................................................................................. 576
STATUS REGION-POSITION CONTROL .................................................. 579

Position Control-Absolute Position Move .................................................................................... 579
Position Control-Relative Position Movement ............................................................................. 581
Position Control-Move in the Designated Direction .................................................................... 582
Position Control-Dummy Joystick ................................................................................................ 584
Position Control-Dragger ............................................................................................................ 586
Position Control-Soft Reset .......................................................................................................... 588
STATUS REGION-DATA DISPLAY WINDOW ............................................... 589
STATUS REGION-MEASUREMENT SETUP ................................................. 590
STATUS REGION-FEATURE OBSERVATION ............................................... 592
STATUS REGION-ERROR MESSAGE .................................................... 594
STATUS REGION-MEASUREMENT ...................................................... 595
STATUS BAR...................................................................................................................................... 596
-7-
Welcome to Use RationalDMIS
EXTERNAL-ARRAY SOFTWARE .INC

DewensionZ（China）Co.,Ltd.
Address: Room 507, Site C, Focus Square, No. 6 Futong East Avenue,
Wangjing, Chaoyang District, Beijing
Post Code：100102
Tel：010-64787138
Technique service：010-64787138/64787139/84785189/84785190
Fax：010-64787743
E-mail：info@external-array.com.cn
Website：www.external-array.com.cn
-1-
Software Authorization Description
Software No.:
Number of software lock is marmed with laser words of four figures “AKE****” AKE on the
external packing of software lock.
Authorization:
RationalDMIS software sold by EXTERNAL-ARRAY SOFTWARE .INC is furnished with a
formal software authorization affied with official sesal of EXTERNAL-ARRAY
SOFTWARE .INC.
The authorization will be provided for cooperation manufacturer of EXTERNAL-ARRAY

SOFTWARE .INC and users are welcomed to contact cooperation manufacturer of
EXTERNAL-ARRAY SOFTWARE .INC and claim software authorization and apply for
authorization verification.
Call service hotline 010-64787138 ； 647887139 ； 84785189 ； 84785190 of
EXTERNAL-ARRAY SOFTWARE .INC for further information;
Authorization name:
-2-
As shown above, it is authorized to “ ”.
Note: the Company/DEMO still owns the copyright of the software lock. Namely, it indicates
that the software lock is only used as demonstration version of DEMO. Distributors are not
entitled to sell the software lock to terminal users.
Authorization of software lock sold formally should be shown below, as shown in the example:
It indicates that the software is authorized to “Delta Air lines, Inc.”

Version type: CNC machine
-3-
RationalDMIS Help Information
Help-keyboard Operation
RationalDMIS has the capacity to interact with keyboard of operating system. We may use the
keyboard when we use the software in some cases.
Name of key position:

Every key has its own name on the keyboard. It may be character A or Enter. Generally, it will be
printed on the surface of keyboard.
Enter: return key.

For example: if you press key Enter in DMIS editer, it will accept input of the line and move the
cursor to the next line;
For example: there is a popup window at present. When the focus is at key OK, pressing Enter is
equal to pressing OK.
Tab: tabulator key. You can move the cursor to the next place or use it for focus conversion of
form.
For example: there is a popup window at present on which there are “OK” and “cancel” options.
When current focus is at “OK”, pressing Tab means converting focus to “cancel”.
For example, an edit box has been filled at the time of defining feature. If you press Tab, the
cursor will automatically jump to the next edit box.
Delete：Delete delete key to delete selected selection options.

For example: if you write contents wrongly when you edit DMIS in DMIS editing panel, you can
select these wrong contents. When you press Delete, these contents will be deleted.
BackSpace: backspace delete key. Every time you press the key, the character in the front of
current cursor position will be deleted.
For example: you intend to write 0.015 when you edit data. However, you write 0.014 and current
cursor stops at the back of 0.014. At this time, you can press BackSpace to delete character 4
before the cursor.
[Home]: beginning-of-line key. If you press the key once, the cursor will move to the beginning of
previous line.
[End]: end-of-line key. If you press the key once, the cursor will move to the end of current line.
[PageUp] or [PgUp]: page up key to browse contents of last page shown in current screen.
[PageDown] or [PgDn]: page down key to browse contents of next page shown in current screen.
-4-
Number key: a line of number keys arranged on the keyboard according to provisions, which can
be used to input Arabic numerals.
Hotkey & shortcut key: replace mouse with shortcut key. Quickly open with shortcut key on the
keyboard.
For example: to quickly switch to output interface of software, you can directly press “F5”;
For example: to quickly switch to sensor construct panel, you can press “Ctrl+F2”.
-5-
Help-Mouse Operation
RationalDMIS has the capacity to interact with mouse of operating system, such as 2-button
mouse, 3-button mouse, wheeled mouse and spherical mouse.
Common mouse has left and right buttons;

Left button is called main button and most mouse operation is completed through click or double
click of main button. Right button is also called auxiliary button, which is mainly used for some
special shortcut operation.
Many operations in RationalDMIS can be completed through mouse operation.

Basic operations include indication, click, double click, drag, drag and drop and right click.
Indication: meaning moving mouse and move the mouse pointer to mobile operation object.
For example: to select certain feature, you need to move the mouse to label name of the
feature.
Click: meaning quickly pressing and releasing left mouse button. Single click is generally used to
select an objection object.
For example: to input information in an edit box, you need to firstly click in the edit box
with mouse.
Double click: meaning quickly pressing and releasing left mouse button for two consecutive times.
Double click is generally used to open window and other operations.
For example: to view PT1 property, you need to double click label name of PT1.
Drag: meaning pressing left mouse button and moving mouse to specified position.
For example: to output CIR1, you need to left click label name of CIR1 and select it, long
press left mouse button and drag it to output panel.
Drag and drop: meaning left click mouse button, moving mouse to specified position, releasing
button. It covers the dragging process.
For example: to output CIR1, you need to left click label name of CIR1 and select it, long
press left mouse button and drag it to output panel. Then you can release left mouse button.
Right click: meaning quickly pressing and releasing right mouse button. Right click is generally
used to open a shortcut menu related to operation.
For example: to use automatic measurement function of CIR1, you need to right click
CIR1 and release right mouse button. At this time, related menu will pop up and you can select
automatic measurement function in it.
-6-
Help-Software Interface
RationalDMIS has graphical user interface and the following conditions usually occur in software
user interface:
Textbox:
Manual input of user is acceptable. Under many cases, drag and drop of user can be accepted in
the textbook and users are allowed to drag and drop a label name to the textbook.
For example:
Drop-down menu:
Including many options available to users. You can left click small arrow popup menu on the right
of drop-down menu and left click to select these options.
List box:
Many items in it can be selected through left clicking mouse. Under some cases, you can long
press Ctrl and left click items in list box to achieve multiple choices of features or press Shift to
achieve multiple choices. You can drag and drop some features in some list boxes.
Sliding block:
You can move position proportion of sliding block in graphical interface to change value.
Button:
There is generally text on button to display its function and users can left click the button to accept
the function, such as “accept” button.
-7-
Check box:
Functional description of check box is generally written near it. It has two statuses, “select” or
“unselect”. You can left click the check box to change its selection status.
Tree node:
There are many data items under tree node and you can use “+” in the front of tree node to fold
and unfold it. Under some cases, you can drag and drop items under tree node.
Right click menu:

You can right click items and right click menu will pop up to display its function in the form of
text. Then, you can left click OK to select using the function.
As shown below:
-8-
Install RationalDMIS
System Requirements
Operating system:
Windows 7(recommended) and Windows XP operating system;
It is recommended that patches and the latest updating patch of the two operating systems
should be installed.
Mininum hardware requirement:

Processor: at least Core dual-core processor
RAM: at least 2GB DDR memory
Graphical card: at least independent and 1G video memory graphical acceleration card
CD: 20.4GB revolving speed 7200RPM
Displayer: at least support 1280X800 resolution ratio
CD-ROM: for installing software
Mouse: three-button mouse with pulley
Keyboard: 104-standard keyboard
PCI slot: vary with demand
USB port: an available USB port
COM port: vary with demand
Note: please use computer power supply with good effect of voltage stabilization to
prevent unstable current from striking software lock and causing failure of software lock.
-9-
RationalDMIS Installation
Please confirm system configuration has satisfied requirements before installing RationalDMIS.
Note: please do not install USB dongle before installing RationalDMIS software to prevent
error.
Installation procedure:
1. Close all other procedures
2. Insert RationalDMIS installation CD to CD ROM.
3. Click RationalDMIS-Setup file to begin installation.
4. Click “agree” to accept software license agreement
5. Input: user name, company name and serial number
6. Destination folder: if default path is not adopted, you can select or enter new path and
folder. If default path and folder are adopted, click “OK”.
7. Click “Install” to complete installation.
8. If the system prompts “restart computer”, please restart.
- 10 -
Install Software Lock
You must install dongle, which is also called coded lock to run RationalDMIS.
If you insert dongle to USB port of computer, the operating system will automatically identify
new hardware:
Prompt 1: found new hardware
Prompt 2: determine new hardware type
Prompt 3: your new hardware is installed and ready to use.
When the system prompts “new hardware is installed and ready to use,”, you can normally start
RationalDMIS software at this time.
Note: Please don’t close computer power supply during installation.
Note: If the software lock is inserted in another USB port and RationalDMIS software lock has
never been inserted in the USB port, installation guidance will rerun driver of installation software
lock. The process is normal.
Note: Please don’t pull out software lock at operation of RationalDMIS. Otherwise, the software
will encounter unforeseen error.
- 11 -
Quick Use Guide to Software
Quick use part can help users to quickly establish operation concept for software and understand
operation environment of software.
Quick use part is mainly to enable users to master basic operation part of software, excluding all
functions and all details of software. It can only make users use the software in the shortest time.
Subjects covered mainly include the following:

RationalDMIS interface preview
Run RationalDMIS
Add new user
Create machine model

Import machine model
Create sensor calibration gage

Create new sensor
Create new sensor angle
Calibrate sensor
Intelligent measurement
Measure point feature
Measure 2D feature
Measure 3D feature
Use construct-best-fit function

Use construct-intersection function
Use distance tolerance

Use diameter tolerance
Create simple output report
Create a simple DMIS program

Open DMIS program
Run DMIS program
Stop running DMIS program
- 12 -
Quick Use of RationalDMIS
RationalDMIS Interface Preview
RationalDMIS software has no complicated popup window and all windows can be directly
switched in the interface;
If you put the mouse on certain icon, text prompt of the function of software will pop up.
Graphical toolbar can be switched among graphical browsing window, DMIS editor, output report
panel, graphical report panel, etc; every time you switch to an interface, graphical/DMIS/output
window will be switched automatically correspondingly. At the same time, function toolbar of
corresponding interface will be updated automatically.
Double database is mainly used to store data results of measurement, construct and evaluation
tolerance.
Operation toolbar can be switched among all operation panels. For example, construct operation
panel is shown in the interface above. You can conduct operation related to feature construct in
construct operation panel.
Status window can display current status information of the machine.
- 13 -
Run RationalDMIS
To run RationalDMIS software, you can directly double click RationalDMIS icon in the desktop
of operating system.
If you run the software for the first time and haven’t configured software graphical area, what
appears before you when you run the software for the first time is the picture below.
You will see that what is shown in the graphical area above is a picture of coordinate system,
without CMM graphical machine. We will introduce how to construct machine model and add
stylus in the graph.
If you have CMM machine model, you can jump to the next section to continue reading.
If you are online, and the machine needs to return to zero, home icon will automatically
appaer on the top right corner of RationalDMIS software. You can click home icon to make
software coord consistent with machine coord.
- 14 -
Add New User
A login window will appear when the software is start. The window allows users to create a new
login user.
Output new user account name in new user, click “add new user” and the password setup window
of new user will pop up.
Input “software installation serial name” in management password and the software installation
serial name can be obtained in software installation CD. At the same time, you can select option of
“enable ‘always login using this user’” .
After selecting “enable ‘always login using this user’”, subsequent software starting will not show
the window.
If you need to re-add new user window, long press “Ctrl” to skip the selection and show window
of adding new user again when the software is starting.
User archives will save the following properties:

A complete separate registry;
A finished configuration directory;
A complete sensor directory.
- 15 -
Quickly Master Construct of Machine Model
Create Machine Model
If you want to comprehensively use graphical function provided by RationalDMIS software, we

need to construct machine model in the software;
If you are an offline user, you can move XYZ axle of graphical machine virtually to achieve true
offline study and offline programming under graphical environment.
If you are an online user, you can master measurement better through synchronous movement of
software graph and actual machine.
Left click Create Machine Model in Options:
At this time, you enter model creation interface
- 16 -
Input a name for the machine you create in the column of machine name:
Left click to select appropriate machine model:
Define home point (origin) of machine model through origin position of CMM. Move the mouse
to origin position to highlight and click to select origin:
- 17 -
Determine direction of coordinate axis of machine model through coordinate of CMM. You can
click any icon in four coordinate directions below and the system will automatically change icon
of machine coordinate axis in the black base window:
Define travel of machine model in X, Y and Z directions according to travel of CMM, with unit of
mm:
The system automatically selects “Set current machine model” in default:
Click “make model” to create new machine model:
If you can’t see the machine model, you can zoom in and zoom out in the graphical area. For
example, you can roll middle mouse button in the graphical area. If not, you can use
Ctrl+Shift+left mouse button to zoom in and zoom out.
- 18 -
Load Machine Model
You can use loading machine model after you create the machine model. Left click load machine
model in options:
The dialog box of machine model to be loaded will pop up and the directory has included
customized machine model in default. Folder directory in default is
\RationalDMIS\MachineModle. You can select name of machine model to be loaded and click
opening button to load machine model.
Prompt: after selecting preview check box and click model name, preview graph of the machine
model will appear in the right window.
- 19 -
Quickly Learn Operation and Use of Sensor
Create Sensor Calibration Gage
The sensor must be calibrated or verified before it is used for actual measurement. Main
purpose of calibration is to evaluate equivalent diameter of sensor which is used to compensate
senor radius at the time of feature evaluation. Therefore, you can correctly compensate sensor data
to measure more accurate measure data after sensor calibration.
Click sensor icon in operation toolbar
Prompt: You can use Ctrl+F2 to quickly open sensor operation toolbar
Select calibration sensor icon to enter sensor calibration panel
Click “calibration gage definition” Tab icon:
Fill in a name of calibration gage to be created in the drop-down menu
Input diameter of calibration gage (standard data are provided by standard sphere manufacturer)
Input coordinate position XYZ of spherical center of calibration sphere, which is calculated from
machine home position. If it is unclear, you can firstly freely input a coordinate parameter and
select updating calibration gage in calibration panel at the first manual
- 20 -
calibration to complete automatic updating of XYZ data.
Input parameters of installation direction I, J and K of calibration gage:
Input specified offset distance:
Offset distance is an offset distance from maximum diameter cross section of calibration gage in
the direction of calibration gage, which is used to calculate distribution of measure point by the
software at the time of CNC calibration and prevent sensor Moudle from colliding with calibration
gage when the stylus is short.
Input diameter size of lower end pole of standard sphere:
Click button “definition” to complete definition for standard sphere:
- 21 -
Create New Sensor
To measure with sensor, you should firstly set up a graphical parent sensor in the software and
select “sensor” in “operation selection toolbar”:
Select “construct sensor” to enter construct sensor interface:
Double click sensor to select in the sensor list. When certain part is selected, the part tree will be
unfolded automatically to show all substratum parts which are likely to connect with selected part.
- 22 -
Installed module will be shown above the sensor data column:
If the sensor has been selected, you can continue adding modul and stylus:
- 23 -
View all: sensor display in the middle
Reset: reset sensor data during assembly
Delete: delete current module
Add: add module selected by the mouse to current assembled sensor
Custom: custom sensor, extension, stylus, Hiscanner, CCD and stick stylus
When the sensor has been created, you can name the sensor constructed by lock in the sensor label
name or use label name of software in default.
If necessary, sensor direction can be updated (direction indicated by red light in the test base of the
graph) to make sensor direction conform to indication direction of sensor of actual machine.
Operation button “add sensor” and “add/active sensor” below the screen will be activated only
when stylus type is selected.
If you click “add sensor”, you can add sensor model constructed to sensor database. If you click
“add/active sensor”, you can add the sensor to sensor database of software and activate the sensor
as the sensor being in use.
- 24 -
New sensor added will be automatically added to window of sensor database. The small icon of
sensor in the front of sensor label name indicates that the sensor is the activated one at present.
- 25 -
Custom Stylus, etc.
When the client uses sensor and stylus which are unable to be found in the software, you can use
“custom” function in RationalDMIS.
You can click “custom” in the sensor construct interface to jump to custom interface:
- 26 -
Probe head: construct probe head
Extension: construct extension
Stylus: construct stylus
HiScanner: construct laser probe head
Video: construct CCD module
Stick stylus: construct hard probe head
Delete: delete constructed module
OK: quit custom interface
With custom stylus as an example, click “stylus” to see the following window:
Label: stylus name

Type: you can select disc styli or sphere styli.
Diameter: shank diameter of stylus
- 27 -
Length: stylus length
Spherical diameter: diameter parameter of sphere when sphere stylus is constructed.
After constructing, click “accept” to complete customing stylus.
Constructed stylus will be saved under corresponding directory:
Click “OK” to quit custom interface:
You can find custom sytlus during assembling sensor:
- 28 -
Create New Sensor Angle
After constructing sensor, you may use many different sensor angles to complete measurement of
certain work-piece.
There are many methods to define sensor angle in the software. We firstly introduce a common
method in this part.
Select “sensor” in “operation selection toolbar”:
Click icon “new sensor” to switch to the panel:
What is worth noticing that new angle sensor is identical to diameter of ruby according to test base,
module and stylus length of head because the sensor angle to be set up is an angle based on the
root sensor as per the sensor name. You need to confirm that you have selected correct root sensor.
If what is shown according to sensor name is not the root sensor we want, we can activate the root
sensor we want in the sensor database as the sensor being in use before switching to the panel for
constructing new sensor angle.
You can name your new sensor in the new sensor edit box or adopt default name.
- 29 -
Next, you can custom the angle you require. However, it is worth noticing that many sensors are
unable to rotate, such as MCP sensor in Renishaw. However, if the activated sensor at present is
unable to rotate, the panel of new sensor will not appear. The panel will appear only when the
current sensor we use is able to rotate.
Now, you can input the sensor angle you want in the edit box of “angle A&B”.
You can also use the sliding block corresponding to A&B in the panel to select appropriate A&B
angle. Values of A&B angle filled through sliding block and in the edit box directly can enter
preview status through angle change in the graphical area.
- 30 -
You can select to control angle increment through options in drop-down menu list of increment.
When the angle increment is controlled and “make A&B” angle option is used, sensors of A&B
angles satisfying increment control conditions will be added to sensor database.
After completing definition of new sensor angle, you can select “add sensor” to add new sensor to
sensor database;
If you select “add/active sensor” option, you can add sensor to sensor database. At the same time,
the sensor will be activated as the sensor being used by the software.
- 31 -
Calibrate Sensor
You must calibrate the sensor before measuring the work-piece with machine to ensure accuracy
of sensor compensating data.
There are many methods in the software to complete sensor calibration. Here we firstly set forth a
kind of calibration method preliminarily.
If sensor database is not shown in the double database at present, firstly, we switch double
database to sensor database.
Prompt: you can use “Alt+S” shortcut key to switch to sensor data window.
We can change calibration points and set up with point near the name of standard sphere. We can
left click to see the drop-down menu and select point.
A simple method to calibrate sensor is click label name of sensor. After selecting sensor label
name, you can drag and drop it to the name of standard sphere.
After drag and drop, the system will pop up to ask whether to continue or stop calibration. At this
time, you can move the sensor to a safe place and select continue. The machine will automatically
complete calibration.
- 32 -
At this time, the sensor will use the preset point to complete calibration.
If the sensor has been calibrated, it will turn green in sensor database.
You can also select multiple sensors and drag and drop them to label of standard sphere for
calibration of multiple sensors.
- 33 -
Quickly Learn Operation and User of Coordinate
System
Set up Quick 3-2-1 Coordinate System
Setup of quick 3-2-1 coordinate system in RationalDMIS is a kind of rapid and simple setup
method of coordinate system and a simple geometric method is used to quickly create an
coordinate system.
Method of setting up coordinate system with quick 3-2-1 requires using sensor to directly measure
on the work-piece.
The window is a direct measurement window. Unlike windows of other coordinate systems, you
only need to measure work-pieces as the sequence of measure point shown in the graph to create
coordinate system.
Click icon of coordinate system in operation toolbar.
Click configuration icon of quick 3-2-1 coordinate system to enter the panel.
The prompt graph of quick 3-2-1 will prompt you to measure these points as the sequence.
Red in the graphical area is to prompt you position of points to be measured;
Move machine to the position similar prompted on the graph and begin to prepare measurement.
After measurement of the point, it will turn to green in the graph and the next point to be measured
will be shown in the prompt graph with highlighted red. By parity of reasoning, until you measure
the 6 points.
- 34 -
After we measure the 6 points, preview, add crd and add/active crd will turn to optional status.
If you click “preview”, the coordinate system to be set up in the graphical area will be highlighted,
facilitating users previewing position of coordinate system to be built before creation;
If you click “add crd”, you can add the coordinate system to the coordinate system database in
double database instead of activating it as the coordinate system being in use;
If you click “add/active crd”, you can add the coordinate system to the coordinate system database
and activate it as the coordinate system being in use.
Other options:
The coordinate system includes rotation in three directions and you can left click coordinate origin
position as shown in the graph. Every time you click the coordinate system, change will occur and
new position will be prompted.
We can left click mouse button to create check box near the feature and decide whether to produce
measure point for creating coordinate to feature database.
If we fail to come across measure point which is not measured well during measurement and we
hope to delete the point and re-measure, we can left click button “delete”.
Or we can use “delete all” and click the mouse button to delete all measure points.
- 35 -
Use Create Coordinate System
In RationalDMIS, create coordinate system can allow users to apply the measured actual features
to create a coordinate system with ease. One typical example is to apply plane, line and point as
well as create coordinate system to create a coordinate system.
Click “Coordinate System” icon in operation toolbar
Click “Create crd” in icons:
Now enter into operation interface of “Create crd”:
By now, a current coordinate system can be observed, and the new coordinate system we are going
to create at present is to be created based on current coordinate system;
New coordinate system is the name of coordinate system that we are about to create, for which
default tag name is adoptable; certainly, you may also replace it with the tag name named by
yourself.
An edit box is situated right next to ; you can put the desirable features used to create
coordinate in this edit box. You may use features in feature-database and drag and drop its tag
name into the edit box, or otherwise key in tag name of this name by hand. Of course we
recommend the drag-method, which is comparatively simple.
If feature-database is not shown in double data window, you can select feature data icon in
double database manually to switch to window of feature database.
- 36 -
Prompt: you may use Alt+F shortcut key to quickly switch to window of feature database.
In feature-database, use left mouse button to click feature name, then hold down the mouse to drag
and drop this name to edit box of coordinate system; when the mouse has been moved to this edit
box and can be released, a small “+” will appear under the mouse, giving the tip that feature can
be added into this box; afterwards, you can release the mouse.
You can see that icon automatically turn to feature type icon after feature is put;
If feature type icon turns red, it indicates that you drag and drop an actual feature .
If feature type icon turns blue, it indicates that you drag and drop a nominal feature .
If actual feature is changed to nominal feature at this time or change nominal feature to actual
feature, you only need to click feature type icon to automatically swtich nominal and actual
features.
At this time, you can continue dragging and dropping minor feature and the third feature used to
set up coordinate to the edit box;
After dragging and dropping all features, the new coordiante system will be automatically
highlighed and flashed in the graphical area.
At this time, “preview”, “add crd” and “add/active crd” will automatically turn to activated status.
If you click “preview”, the coordinate system to be set up in the graphical area will be highlighted,
facilitating users previewing position of coordinate system from the graph;
If you click “add crd”, you can add the newly constructed coordinate system to the coordinate
system database in double database;
Other options:
You can select coordinate limitation direction of the feature in the drop-down menu near main
limitation feature to control coordinate reference direction.
- 37 -
If the reference feature used to set up coordinate has specified distance under new coordinate
system, we can input the coordinate system under new coordinate system in the edit box at the
back of feature or drag and drop the feature from database to assign distance of the reference
under new coordinate system.
As shown above in the input window: we have used three different methods for input. As for the
first feature, we have input a certain data, indicating the feature Z value of the feature under new
coordinate system. As for the second feature, we have put a feature label name, indicating the Y
coordinate value of the feature under new coordinate system. As for the third feature, we have
used a mathematical expression formula, indicating the feature X value of the feature under new
coordinate system.
If value has been input, we will see the icon turn from to .
- 38 -
Use Moving Coordinate System
Function of moving coordinate system can move the coordinate system towards certain axis or
move three axes. You can input specified moving value or drag and drop feature for use in the data
column.
Click icon of coordinate system in the operation toolbar.
Prompt: you can use Ctrl+F3 to quickly open sensor operation toolbar.
You can click icon of coordinate system to activate operation panel of moving coordinate system.
At this time, you enter operation interface of coordinate system.
You can see that there is a default name in “from crd”, which is initial coordinate system to be
moved and activated coordinate system in current coordinate database. If you want to change the
name of from crd, you should drag and drop the label name of coordinate system in coordinate
system database to edit box and achieve the purpose
New coordinate system adopts a default label name, which is coordinate system name after
moving. Of course, you can manually change the name.
Data to be moved can be filled in edit boxes corresponding to X axle, Y axle and Z axle or a
feature or variable can be put.
- 39 -
indicates there is no input or illegal input; indicates legal value input or actual variable
input; is feature input. Red indicates actual feature and blue indicates nominal feature.
After appropriate data are input in the edit box, preview, add crd and add/active crd will
automaticaly turn to optinable status.
If you click “preview”, the position of the coordinate system in the graphical area will be
highlighted, facilitating users previewing position of coordinate system from the graph;
- 40 -
Use Rotating Coordinate System
Function of rotating coordinate system can make the coordinate freely rotate along certain
coordinate axis and certain feature.
Click coordinate system icon in operation toolbar.
Prompt: you can use Ctrl+F3 to quickly open sensor operation toolbar.
Click icon of rotating coordinate system to activate operation panel of rotating coordinate system.
At this time, you enter the operation interface of rotating coordinate system as follows:
There is a default name in “from crd”. Our current operation is based on from crd. If we want to
change the name of from crd, we can drag and drop the label name of coordinate system in
coordinate system database to edit box to achieve the purpose.
New coordinate system adopts a default label name, which is coordinate system name after
rotating. Of course, you can manually change the name.
There is a drop-down menu on the right of rotating axis and you can left click to see default option.
You can rotate an option to make the selected axis rotate and input angle for rotation in rotation
angle.
If feature database is not shown in double data window, you can select feature data icon in
double database manually to switch to window of feature database.
- 41 -
Drag and drop features in the database to edit box of rotating axis and input rotation angle.
When conditions for rotating coordinate system has been achieved, “preview”, “add coordinate
system” and “add/active coordinate system” will automatically turn to activated status.
If you click “preview”, the position of the coordinate system in the graphical area will be
highlighted, facilitating users previewing position of coordinate system from the graph;
Other options:
There is a check box of “using feature” below new coordinate system, we can left click to select.
When using feature is selected, the interface will change. At this time, you can drag and drop a
linear feature from feature database and put it in the edit box below alignment direction to make
alignment direction set by coordinate system conform to direction of the line.
- 42 -
Quickly Learn Operation and User of Measurement
Intelligent Measurement
RationalDMIS intelligent measurement allows RationalDMIS to intelligently help you judge the
feature type measured when users are measuring. At the same time, users are allowed to freely
select feature type icon measured before measurement feature is accepted. Intelligent
measurement can only be used at the time of manual measurement or measuring with operation
box.
Click measurement icon in operation panel.
Prompt: you can use Ctrl+F1 to quickly open measurement panel.
Click icon “intelligent measurement” in measurement function bar. When the intelligent
measurement icon is highlighted, it indicates that intelligent measurement has been activated.
Click intelligent measurement icon again. It will be closed automatically. The intelligent
measurement icon will not be highlighted at the time of closing.
When the intelligent measurement is activated, we use operation box to measure the feature to be
measured and information and vector of measure point are provided for us. When intelligent
measurement can determine the feature type, it will automatically jump to the icon.
You can jump feature type judged by intelligent measurement and manually click the mouse
button to select feature icon in feature type.
If you want to delete single point, you can click “delete” icon
If you want to delete all points, you can click “delete all” icon
If point required by measurement feature has been measured and feature type has been determined,
measurement completion icon will be activated and turn green.
- 43 -
Click the mouse button to complete icon .
Measured features will be added to feature database.
- 44 -
Measure Point Feature
This section will introduce how to quickly measure point feature in RationalDMIS.
Determination of position of a point feature requires 6 parameters, X, Y, Z, I, J and K (under
rectangular coordinate system) or R, A, H, I, J, K (under polar coordinate system).
Activate measurement icon in measurement operation area
Prompt: you can also use Ctrl+F1 to quickly open measurement panel
Select “point” panel in measurement icon of measurement operation panel.
What is shown to you is measurement operation panel.
The simplest method to measure a point is to move the machine to positioning place and drive the
machine to touch object surface. Then a point will be included.
Counter of counting window of statistical graph window will be increased through measure point.
Prompt: left click to complete measurement icon which can accept a spatial point feature.
Position of current sensor will be accepted as a point feature.
- 45 -
If you want to delete a single point, you can click “delete” icon and the point will be deleted
If you want to delete all points, you can click “delete all” icon and all measure points will be
deleted.
When the feature is accepted, click “accept” icon to complete measurement.
- 46 -
Measure 2D Feature
This section will mainly introduce how to quickly measure 2D feature in RationalDMIS.
Measurement of 2D feature requires work plane which is taken as calculation plane. 2D features in
RationalDMIS Measurement System include:
 Line
 Circle
 Arc
 Oval
 Key slot
 Curve
Select “measurement” in “operation selection toolbar”:
Prompt: You can use Ctrl+F1 to quickly open measurement panel.
Click feature type icon to be measured in measurement operation panel.
What is shown to us is measurement operation panel of selected measurement feature type.
We can change to label name in edit box of feature name to what we want or adopt default
name . If we adopt “the nearest CRD plane” in work plane,

RationalDMIS will automatically judge which work plane is suitable for being taken as work
plane in current coordinate system.
- 47 -
Select a plane in drop-down menu of work plane manually to taken it as work plane for measuring
2D feature.
Move sensor of CMM to make it slightly contact part surface. Then the contact point is measured
and figures in software counter window will increase. You should firstly save the point you come
across.
deleted.

Measured feature will be added to feature database.
- 48 -
Measure 3D Feature
This section introduces how to quickly measure simple 3D feature.

3D features in RationalDMIS Measurement system include:
 Plane
 Sphere
 Cylinder
 Cone
 Circular ring
 Curved surface
Measurement of 3D feature does not require work plane. At this time, the option of work plane
will be hidden automatically.
Select “measurement” in “operation selection toolbar”:
Prompt: You can use Ctrl+F1 to quickly open measurement panel.
Click feature type icon to be measured in measurement operation panel.
What is shown to us is measurement operation panel of selected measurement feature type.
We can change to label name in edit box of feature name to what we want or adopt default
name .
Move sensor of CMM to make it slightly contact part surface. Then the contact point is measured
and figures in software counter window will increase. You should firstly save the point you come
across.
- 49 -
deleted.

Measured feature will be added to feature database.
- 50 -
Quickly Learn Feature Construct Operation
Use Construct-Best-fit Function
RationalDMIS has many construct functions and this section only introduces best-fit construct
function.
Please refer to comprehensive introduction part of feature construct for more detailed feature
construct part.
Select “construct” icon in “operation selection toolbar”.
Prompt: Use Ctrl+F4 to quickly open construct icon
Select “best-fit” icon in construct function tool icon:
What is shown to you is best-fit operation interface:
Construct best fit and drag and drop specified feature from data list of feature database to
construct edit window.
- 51 -
All possible construct results will be shown in construct result window automatically:
If feature database in double database is not shown, you can left click feature data icon in
double database to switch current icon to feature data window.
Prompt: You can use shortcut key “Alt+F” to activate feature database.
Red indicates actual measurement feature

If it is blue icon, it indicates that the feature is defined theoretically.
If switch is made between nominal feature and actual feature, you can directly click icon of
feature type to switch.
To delete a feature in feature input window, you should firstly select the window and click
“delete” button.
To delete all features, you can click “delete all”.
To rename result feature, you can double click left mouse mutton slowly to select label name of
result feature in result feature list and its name will turn to editable status.
After inputting new name, you can click any place out of the name edit window to accept the
name.
- 52 -
To add a new constructed feature, you can select the feature in result feature list and click “add
result” button. Then the feature will be added to list of feature database. If you want to preview the
graph in graphical window, you should click “preview” window.
- 53 -
Use Construct-Intersection Function
RationalDMIS has many construct functions and this section only introduces intersection
construct function.
Operation of many windows in other constructs is extremely similar to intersection. Please refer to
comprehensive introduction part of feature construct for other construct function.
Select “construct” icon in “operation selection toolbar”:
Prompt: Use Ctrl+F4 to quickly open construct icon.
Select “intersection” icon in construct function tool icon:
What is shown to you is intersected operation panel:
To conduct construct intersection operation, you can drag and drop 2 intersected features from
feature list of feature database and put them in the edit box corresponding to “feature 1” and
“feature 2”.
The result list will show result features.
- 54 -
Prompt: When the feature can be put in the edit box, a small symbol “+” will appear under the
mouse.
To rename result feature, you can double click left mouse mutton slowly to select label name of
result feature in result feature list and its name will turn to editable status.
After inputting new name, you can click any place out of the name edit window to accept the
name.
- 55 -
To add a new constructed feature, you can select the feature in result feature list and click “add
result” button. Then the feature will be added to list of feature database. If you want to preview the
graph in graphical window, you should click “preview” window.
- 56 -
Quickly Learn Tolerance Operation
Use Distance Tolerance
RationalDMIS can evaluate all tolerances specified by national standard. In this section, we only
introduce distance tolerance and hope that users can quickly master how to evaluate tolerance
operation in software through study of the section.
Please refer to comprehensive introduction part of tolerance operation for operation of other
tolerance parts.
Select “tolerance” icon in “operation selection toolbar”:
Prompt: you can use shortcut key “Ctrl+F5” to quickly open tolerance calculation toolbar.
Select “distance” tolerance icon in the icon of tolerance operation panel.
What is shown to you is calculation panel of distance tolerance:
To evaluate distance tolerance, a simple operation to respectively drag and drop two features from
feature database for distance evaluation to the edit box at the back of feature name of tolerance
operation panel.
- 57 -
You can see that icon will turn to feature type icon.
If the check box of “use evaluated nom dist” is selected, you can click to switch to not-selected
status
If the check box of “use evaluated nom dist” is not selected, you can input specified nominal
distance in the edit column of “nominal distance”.
Respectively input and lower tolerances in input upper tolerance and lower tolerance.
- 58 -
You can click arrow drop-down menu on the right of evaluation method to select evaluation
method.
Calculation method includes “none”, “average”, “minimum” and “maximum”.
Click arrow drop-down menu on the right of “distance type” to select evaluated “distance type”.
There are 4 distance types, including “X axle”, “Y axle”, “Z axle”, “point-to-point”.

Distance evaluation result will be shown in actual column. If evaluated distance is within
tolerance scope, deviation column will show “In Tol”.
If evaluated distance tolerance exceeds tolerance zone, deviation column will show specified
out-tolerance value.
- 59 -
To add the evaluated tolerance, you can click “accept” button in operation panel and evaluated
tolerance will be automatically saved in the tolerance list of tolerance database. If you want to
preview in the graphical area, you can click “preview” button.
- 60 -
Use Diameter Tolerance
RationalDMIS can evaluate all tolerances specified in national standard. In this section, we only
introduce diameter tolerance.
Please refer to comprehensive introduction part of tolerance operation for operation of other
tolerance parts.
Select “tolerance” icon in “operation selection toolbar”:
Prompt: You can use shortcut key “Ctrl+F5” to quickly open tolerance evaluation toolbar
Select “diameter” tolerance icon in tolerance operation panel icon.
What is shown to you is evaluation panel of diameter tolerance:
Diameter is a property of feature. Hence, its nominal diameter is non-editable in tolerance

operation panel.
To edit nominal diameter of feature, you should determine that feature database is shown at
present.
- 61 -
Property page of the feature will pop up when you double click specified feature label name.
When you double click corresponding nominal diameter column in feature property page, items
will turn to editable status;
After inputting specified nominal diameter data, you can click any place out of edit column to
finish editing;
Newly-edited data will be shown in blue font.
Updating icon will be highlighted and you can click updating icon to update nominal data.
Afterwards, you can click hidding icon to close feature property page.
Drag and drop feature label name to edit box of feature name for tolerance operation panel.
Nominal diameter of feature will be shown in the data column of “nominal diameter”;
Then, we can input “upper and lower tolerances” in the edit boxes of lower tolerance and upper
tolerance.
- 62 -
If upper and lower tolerances are not exceeded, “In Tol” will be shown in deviation column.
If tolerance scope is exceeded, value of specific out tolerance will be shown in deviation column.
To change tolerance label name, you can click edit box of tolerance name with mouse and modify
contents to specified tolerance name.
Add the tolerance to tolerance database and click “accept” button. Evaluated tolerance will be
automatically added to the list of tolerance database.
- 63 -
Quickly Learn Production of Output Report
RationalDMIS can create various output reports and this section will simply introduce how to
quickly create simple output report and others.
Please refer to comprehensive introduction part of output report for details of production of output
report.
Select “output” in graphical toolbar.
Prompt: you can use shortcut key F5 to quickly switch to output window.
Graphical display area will be changed to the interface of output report accordingly:
To add feature to output panel, a simple operation is to drag and drop feature from feature data list
to output panel;
- 64 -
You can control parameters of output feature, select output setup option and enter output setup
interface.
Left click to open tree node defined by feature in output setup panel;
Left click to open tree node of feature type to be set up;
Left click to select the check box near feature output parameters. If it is selected, it indicates that
the parameter is output. If not, it indicates that it is not output.
- 65 -
When you drag and drop feature to output window the next time, the feature will immediately use
configured output parameter;
If you have been satisfied with configuration, you can click configuration icon again to close
configuration window.
To output previously created tolerance, you can select icon of tolerance database in double
database and click tolerance icon to enter the window of tolerance database.
Prompt: You can use shortcut key “Alt+T” to quickly open tolerance database.
Click specified tolerance label in the list of tolerance database and left click it to drag and drop it
to output window.
To delete an output result, you can right click the output and select “delete” in popup menu;
To delete multiple outputs, you can press Ctil+left click of output items to be deleted for multiple
choices. Then you can right click to find popup menu “delete”;
Or you can press Shift+left click to achieve multiple choices and right click to find popup menu
“delete”.
Selected output items are complete with shaded area below.
- 66 -
If you want to preview print report, you can click “print preview” icon
If you want to directly print, you can click “print” icon.

If the report is desired to be saved in the form of webpage or Pdf, you can click save button, select
save type and specified save path as well as name the report.
- 67 -
Quickly Learn DMIS Program Production
Create A Simple DMIS Program
RationalDMIS takes DMIS5.0 as internal measurement programming language. DMIS language

created in RationalDMIS is not required to be converted in running.
In this section, we only introduce how to create a simple DMIS program. Please refer to DMIS
system introduction for detailed DMIS operation.
There are two methods to create DMIS program. One is create a Text edit environment and user
manually writes DMIS code; the other is apply software “self-learning” to create part program.
We haven’t introduced self-learning DMIS program in CAD. If you hope to use CAD, you can
refer to the part in which CAD is used to create a simple part program.
To begin creating self-learning program, we need to open self-learning switch and click
self-learning icon on the top right corner of software interface.
When the arrow is green, we can begin to create self-learning part

program.
Left click icon in program database in double database to open window of program database to
view part program or edit:
Before setting up program, let’s manually show DMIS function toolbar in DMIS program area,
You can see an arrow icon on the right of program panel. If you put mouse at the
small arrow, DMIS function toolbar will be indicated automatically.
The toolbar has a locking function. You can click to switch locking status at the
most upside of popup function toolbar. At this time, we click to lock the function
toolbar.
- 68 -
When the function toolbar is locked, click mode order icon
Click “MODE/MAN” in popup menu,
If you have selected manual mode, you can see that RationalDMIS will automatically generate
DMIS code. Generated code not only includes “MODE/MAN”, but also contains code of status
header. Generated code of status code can be configured. Please refer to program-DMIS status
header for configuration.
Now we are at manual mode. We will set up a simple 3-2-1 coordinate system.
Let’s us measure a plane on the top of work-piece. Please refer to feature measurement part for
help of measurement plane.
Next, we will measure another line for alignment in coordinate system. Please refer to feature
measurement part for measurement line.
Then, we can measure another line or a point. Please refer to feature measurement part for
measurement point.
- 69 -
You can see that your measurement operations
have been studied independently.
Now, we use “create crd” to create a

coordinate system. Please refer to coordinate
system-create coordinate system for help of
creating coordinate system.
Once we are satisfied with coordinate system
set up, we can use the plane on the top as a
safe plane, thus reducing our operation of
judging safe movement with manual method.
Let’s now switch command mode to

“MODE/PROG, MAN” mode. Please refer to
the chapter of program-mode command for
details of command mode.
Note: if you use hand machine, switch between

“MODE/MAN” and “MODE/PROG, MAN”
modes have no impact on your manual
measurement.
- 70 -
If you can continue measuring features, such
as another 2 circle features being measured
now.
Please refer to feature measurement part for

help of measuring circle.
Now, we can evaluate distance tolerance of the

two circles. Please refer to tolerance operation
part for tolerance operation.
Tolerance evaluation and output operation will

be recorded in the program simultaneously. We
click “Endfil” to add statement of file ending at
the end of the program. The statement will close
all output devices which have been opened.
You may wish the program to provide you some prompts at operation and these functions can be
quickly completed through manually compiling DMIS code.
To edit DMIS code, click “transfer to DMIS editor” icon.
- 71 -
DMIS editor will display these DMIS codes and the panel of program area will be blank.
Select cursor to position it to the

place where you want to insert
prompt text. Then you can click
Enter to create a blank.
Input “text/” with keyboard in blank line. You can

see that a prompt menu will pop up automatically
for your selection after you enter /. You can select
OPER and input “Enter”. Then the word OPER
will be automatically added to your DMIS code.
Add “,” (comma) at the back of “OPER” and DMIS editor will
automatically prompt you to input some texts. Then you can
input contents you want to prompt in the program.
If you want to edit text you input, please finally input “Enter”.
Or above function can be quickly achieved through “inserting comment line”:
After completing edit, send the program to DMIS program panel and click “send to program” icon
in the toolbar of program editor panel.
DMIS program will resend to program database.
- 72 -
Roll to the top of program database and click the first line.
Ensure that the machine can be moved safety and click button “run”.
The program will begin to execute.
- 73 -
Open DMIS Program
Program file of part to open in RationalDMIS system is as easy as opening file in Windows
operating system. DMIS program of parts is file bearing .dmi suffix name.
Confirm the window of program database has been opened in the double database.
Prompt: you can use “ALT+P” to quickly open
Click button “open” in “DMIS execution toolbar,

and dialog box “open DMIS file” in the system will pop up:
Select program file of parts required and click button “open”.
- 74 -
Run DMIS Program
DMIS program can be run only when there is part program in “DMIS program window”.
Confirm the window of program database has been opened in the double database.
Set initial position of program execution at the top end of part program, click button
“start” and begin to run the program:
- 75 -
Stop Running DMIS Program
Confirm the window of program database has been opened in the double database:
Double click red “STOP” suspension button appearing in the window to stop program.
Or click button “stop” to stop execution program.
If part program has called DMIS high-level language, you should “stop high-level language” after
stopping program.
Click button “stop high-level language” to stop high-level language.
- 76 -
Introduction to Main Menu Area
RationalDMIS main menu mainly includes the following functions: new, open solution, save
solution, save solution as, import data from solution, import CAD, export CAD, import, export,
options, window, help, recent solutions and exit.
- 77 -
Main Menu-New
Click “new” to create a new solution:
Prompt: you can use shortcut function key “Ctrl+N”
When a solution is created, RationalDMIS will clear all contents under current program status to
make the system return to initial status at the time of starting, namely:
Clear all features in feature database
Clear all tolerances in tolerance database
Clear all defined variables in variable database
Clear all custom views of custom view database
Clear DMIS program in DMIS program database
Clear all output contents in output window
Clear contents in DMIS edit window
Clear contents of Form error window
Clear value input, reset and other setup in all operation areas.
Clear all report windows in graphical report window.
- 78 -
Main Menu-Open Solution
Click “open solution” to open originally saved solution:
The menu item of “open solution” is used to open originally saved solution file and solution
opened includes the following contents of data file:
Nominal value and actual value of all features in original solution:
Imported CAD model in original solution
All tolerances in tolerance database
All coordinates in tolerance database
DMIS program of parts in DMIS program database
All output contents in output window
Contents in DMIS edit window
Contents in Form error window
All report windows in graphical report window
All custom views in custom view database
Prompt: opening solution will not update sensor data
- 79 -
Main Menu-Save Solution
Click “save solution” to save current solution:
Menu item of “save solution” is used to save current program status to solution file and save
contents including:
Nominal value and actual value of all features in the solution:
Imported CAD model in the solution
Prompt: saving solution will not save sensor data
The dialogue box of “save solution files will pop up automatically in the system after selecting the
menu:
After inputting appropriate solution file, click “save” to automatically complete saving under
solution.
- 80 -
Main Menu-Save Solution as……
Users can re-save the solution in operation with new name and new path through saving solution
as others;
Click “Save Solution As” to save the current solution:
Put the mouse to “save solution as” and function menu pops up: enabling solution saved to open in
low-version software.
Saving solution as will not cover data in original solution and these data include:
Nominal value and actual value of all features in the solution:
Imported CAD model in the solution
- 81 -
Main Menu-Import Data from Solution
When the mouse is put in “import data from solution”, the small arrow on the right of the menu
will automatically eject new menu for your selection:
Tolerance database: only import tolerance data in existing solution

Feature database: only import feature data in existing solution
Feature database: (load actual feature as nominal feature): import actual data in solution to
coordinate system database as nominal feature: only import coordinate system data in existing
solution.
DMIS program: only import DMIS program in existing solution.
- 82 -
Main Menu-Import CAD
Click “import CAD” in drop-down menu of “file”:
RationalDMIS supports 3 types of CAD mode files in

default, respectively IGES, STEP files and DXF file. In
addition, RationalDMIS has direct reading data interfaces
of ParaSolid XT, CATIA, UG, ProE, SolidWorks, JT3D,
Inventor3D and SolidEdge. If it is required to be activated,
please contact software distributor.
Select type of CAD mode file to be imported:
When you select IGES file format, the system will eject the dialogue box of “open IGES file”:
- 83 -
There are three check boxes below the dialog box:
Entity: including 3D information of CAD, which is 3D digifax in the software after importing;
Linearity: including linear data
Outline: it is 3D framework in importing software
Create DMIS DID: when you open the software to study by yourself, you can record self-learning
statement in the digifax imported.
Click button “open” and the system begins to load IGES model and loading process is shown in
the status column of RationalDMIS:
Loaded CAD mode is added to the window of feature database.
- 84 -
Main Menu-Export CAD
Click “output CAD” in drop-down menu of “file”:
RationalDMIS supports CAD file of IGES type. When the

mouse is put on the menu of CAD output, the small
corresponding arrow on the right will automatically eject
optional option. You can select “IGES” or select “solution”,
thus only exporting solution containing CAD data.
If you click IGES, the system will eject dialog box of “export CAD”:
- 85 -
If you click the button on the right of path edit box, dialog box of path selection will pop up and
you can select a save path and name for CAD to be saved:
All existing features are automatically arranged under all parent nodes of features and you can
select features to be output through clicking check box before all features. If CAD digifax of part
has been imported, you can select the CAD digifax to position output CAD mode.
There are three options in the check box:

Export nominal feature: output nominal feature existing in software database in the format of
IGES;
Export actual feature: output actual feature existing in software database in the format of IGES;
Include measurement point: output data information of “point cloud” used to measure actual
feature in the format of IGES;
Export measurement points only: export point cloud data as measurement point only;
Select all: select all features
Deselect all: deselect all features selected
After setting up all output options, click “OK” to complete CAD digifax file.
- 86 -
Main Menu-Import Sensor Data
RationalDMIS supports import/export of sensor data and store current sensor data as external file.
Click “import” to find the popup box of “import sensor data”:
Select existing sensor file in the ejected dialog box:
Click “open” to complete import of sensor data.
- 87 -
Main Menu-Export Data
‘Export’ includes data can be exported: sensor data, DML, Q-Das and BCS data.
Export sensor database: save sensor data in the software;

Export as DML: export as data file bearing suffix of xml;
Export as Q-Das: export as format which can be identified by Q-Das software;
Export as BCS format: export as text data in the format of .bcs, including x, y and z data of feature
measurement point;
- 88 -
Main Menu-Options
“Options” in the main menu include “load machine model”, “create machine model”, “application
setup” and “keyboard input mapping”.
Load machine model Load existing machine model to RationalDMIS

Create machine model Create new machine model for RationalDMIS
Application setup Control general behavior of RationalDMIS during operation
through setting application setup and configuration option.
Keyboard input mapping Connect external wireless digital keyboard and quickly switch
software interface through wireless digital keyboard
- 89 -
Options-Load Machine Model
Import existing machine model through “load machine model” in menu “options”.
After selecting “load machine model”, you will open the dialog box of machine model file.
Filename extension. GMM indicates Generic Machine Model. GMM file is created by creation
tool of machine model. The selection column of file selection has listed all previously created
machine model.
When the check box in the front of at the bottom of dialog box, you can browse
style of machine model through the previewing window at the side.
- 90 -
Options-Create Machine Model
Machine model in RationalDMIS is a kind of kinematics. Machine model is the carrier of

measuring sensor. If there is no machine model, the sensor cannot be used even through
assembling device of sensor system. There are 9 in-built machine model templates in
RationalDMIS.
Left click “create machine model”
At this time, you can enter model creation interface
Construct steps are as follows:
Name the machine model to be

created in machine name;
Select machine type to be created in

machine types;
Define home point (origin) of

machine model according to origin
position of CMM. Move the mouse
to origin which is highlighted and
click to select as origin;
Respectively input travels of XYZ

axes;
Select correct coordinate system

direction;
If you can’t see the machine model, you can zoom in and zoom out in the graphical area. For
example, you can roll middle mouse button in the graphical area. If not, you can use
Ctrl+Shift+left mouse button to zoom in and zoom out.
Click “create model” to complete creation for machine model.
- 91 -
Options-Application Setup
General behavior of control system in application setup window at operation of RationalDMIS is:
As for modified options in application setup, modified option in red font can come into effect after
“restarting software” and that in black font can come into effect immediately.
Left click options to select “application setup”
Prompt: you can use “Ctrl+D” to quickly open application setup panel.
At this time, you enter the following interface:
After modification, you can click “apply” or accept” buttons to accept current modification and
quit application setup.
- 92 -
Application Setup-Generic Setup-Directory
RationalDMIS uses 6 directories: IGES directory, STEP directory, DMIS directory, Dbase
directory, output directory and blade directory.
Left click options to select “application setup”-“generic setup” to enter the following interfaces:
Double click
parameter list
corresponding toe
directory and eject
directory edit button;
Left click the

rightmost edit button
and enter directory
edit status:
Select file directory to

be determined with
folder browser;
Click button “OK” to

complete setup
After modification, you can click “apply” or accept” buttons to accept current modification and
quit application setup.
- 93 -
Application Setup-Generic Setup-Language
Language options are divided to “interface language” and “output language” which can
respectively control language display of “interface display” and “output report” of software.
Double click left mouse button to select parameter setup area corresponding to language and eject
options of drop-down menu of arrow icon:
Click drop-down menu of arrow icon and select language type to be used in drop-down menu.
Click button “OK” to complete setup.
- 94 -
Application Setup-Generic Setup-Save Coordinate System
The coordinate system of RationalDMIS in default is MCS (machine coordinate system). Other
coordinate systems are built on the basis of MCS. Coordinate system is part of data in
RationalDMIS Solution. Saving CRD setup option to make coordinate system part of
RationalDMIS system data.
Click arrow icon to eject options of drop-down menu and select “yes” or “no”.
When no is selected (in default), RationalDMIS will not save current coordinate system at exiting.
Hence, there is only MCS coordinate system when RationalDMIS is selected the next time;
When yes is selected, RationalDMIS will save current coordinate system at exiting. When
RationalDMIS is started the next time, the coordinate system saved will recover. At the same time,
current coordinate system activated last time will be activated as current coordinate system.
- 95 -
Application Setup-Generic Setup-Digits Behind Decimal Point
Digit setup of decimal point includes DMIS GOTO, DMIS PTMEAS, DMIS VECTOR and other
DMIS, nom size, nom location, property page which are respectively corresponding to digit of
decimal point shown in the interface of corresponding values.
- 96 -
Application Setup-Generic Setup-Temporary File Manager
RationalDMIS will create a temporary file manager titled “TEMP” under installation directory to
store temporary file created by the system.
Generally, users are unaware of use of file under the directory. File name is created immediately,
without actual sense. “Temporary file management” allows users to delete temporary file from
temporary directory or set up rules for RationalDMIS to delete temporary files.
“Temporary folder directory” shows position of temporary folder created by the current system
and modification is prohibited.
The option can be set up with regard to clearing rules of temporary file through setting up “days
of temporary files”.
Double click “double click clearing file” to clear temporary files under temporary directory.
Double click “double click viewing file” to view temporary files under temporary directory.
- 97 -
Application Setup-Interface Setup-User Interface
3D graph quality
Click drop-down menu of arrow icon and select 3D graph quality level to be used in drop-down
menu:
The graphical window of 3D graph quality setup shows exquisite degree of 3D graph;
3D graph quality setup can be classified to nine-level graphical exquisite degree, from level 1 to
level 9. Exquisite degree increases progressively in order. When 3D graph quality is set as “not
assign”, it indicates that default setup is used.
When 3D graph quality uses display of CAD model with default graphical exquisite degree,
aliasing can be found at the edge.
- 98 -
When 3D graph quality uses display of CAD model with level 9 exquisite degree, aliasing at the
edge cannot be seen.
3D graph background:
Click drop-down menu of arrow icon and select 3D graph background in drop-down menu:
3D graph background is used to control setup of background in graphical browsing area, including three options,
single color/gradient color (fade up)/gradient color (fade down).
single color
gradient color (fade up)
- 99 -
gradient color (fade down)
3D graph transparency type:

Click the drop-down menu of arrow icon and select 3D graph transparency type required in
drop-down menu; default setup is blend and the option has the highest display efficiency;
Setup of toolbar icon size:

Setup of toolbar icon size can change display size of toolbar icon in RationalDMIS.
Click drop-down menu in arrow icon and select icon option to be used in drop-down menu:
Toolbar icon can be shown in “normal icon” and “large icon”. When users use displayer with high
resolution, they can use setup of large toolbar icon;
Normal icon:
Large icon:
You can enter Xecute through operation interface
Left click parameter setup area on the right to eject drop-down menu option of arrow icon:
Click drop-down menu of arrow icon and select “yes” or “no” in drop-down menu:
- 100 -
If you select “yes”, “display Xecute” icon will appear on the top right corner of the interface
You can click the icon to see interface switch prompt. Click “yes” to switch to Xecute interface.
If you select “no”, “display Xecute” icon will not appear on the top right corner of the interface.
- 101 -
Application Setup-Interface Setup-Window Setup
Sensor preview:
Click drop-down menu of arrow icon and select icon option to be used in drop-down menu:
“Left mouse button” indicates that you can activate window preview function through left mouse
button;
“Empty” indicates that window preview is prohibited.
- 102 -
Switch to sensor database:
Mousse highlights current sensor label;
Graphical preview window of sensor will appear below.
Custom view preview

“Left mouse button” indicates that you can activate window preview function through left mouse
button;
“Empty” indicates that window preview is prohibited.
- 103 -
Switch to custom view database:
Mouse highlights graphical label name of
current custom view area;
Graphical preview window of sensor will
automatically appear below.
Automatically unfold sensor data tree:

Select yes. When the software clicks sensor node, the sub-node of sensor node will be unfolded
automatically.
DMIS summary:
- 104 -
Click drop-down menu of DMIS summary icon and there are two options in drop-down menu:
“None” means there is no DMIS summary.
As for “DMIS is running”, corresponding summary will appear below the program after running
DMIS program.
- 105 -
Show feature label index:
Click drop-down menu of icon “show feature label index and select icon option to be used in
drop-down menu:
“No” not to show feature label index.
- 106 -
“Yes” to show feature label index.
Show property deviation column:

Click drop-down menu of icon “show property deviation column” and select icon option to be
used in drop-down menu:
“No” not to show property deviation.
“Yes” to show property deviation.
Allow DRO to be reset as 0:
- 107 -
Click drop-down menu of icon “allow DRO to be reset as 0” and select icon option to be used in
drop-down menu:
“No” not to reset DRO:
“Yes” to reset coordinate corresponding to sensor position as 0 and activate new coordinate
system:
- 108 -
Application Setup-Graphic Window Setup-Indicators
The first indication to set up indication of RationalDMIS symbol and the second indication is to
set up indication of graphical performance with the third one to set up indication position and
status of coordinate system in software graphical interface.
Show logo:
Double click left mouse button to show parameter list corresponding to logo and eject a
drop-down button:
Click drop-down button and select show logo in the menu.
After confirmation, RationalDMIS logo is shown on the top right corner of graphical window:
- 109 -
Show FPS indicator:
Double click left mouse button to show parameter list corresponding to FPS indicator and eject a
drop-down button:
Select “show FPS” in drop-down button menu

Then restart the software.
Graph performance indicator is shown on the left bottom corner of graphic window:
Figures in performance indication represents speed of graphical rendering, with unit of frame/s.
Generally speaking, more graphic object in graphic window, slower speed of graphic rendering is.
There is no exact standard to select graphics card and display chip suitable for operation of
RationalDMIS. However, larger CAD model is in RationalDMIS, more high-level display card
should be used.
Show CRD indicator:

Double click left mouse button to show parameter list corresponding to CRD indicator and eject a
drop-down button:
Select corresponding options in drop-down button menu to control display position or display
status of CRD in graphical area.
CRD is shown on the left bottom corner of graphical interface, as shown below:
- 110 -
- 111 -
Application Setup-Graphic Report Setup-Graphic Report
Option
“Auto arrange” can make RationalDMIS to automatically calculate position of window

arrangement when new report window is created or graphic window is operated. The report
window is arranged along graphic window.
Arrange path can be assigned as ellipse/rectangle path, ellipse arrangement and four-side
right-angle arrangement mode;
After setting up “transparent windows”, form of graphic report will switch from entity status to
transparent status.
“Auto create new session”, when the software calculate that the report window may be unable to
arrange, it will automatically save current graphical report in the name given by the system and
create a new graphical report.
“Create report for UI actual”, when actual feature is created in graphical report interface, it will
be automatically output to report window.
After selecting the option, the software will automatically create graphical report under the
following cases:
a. Current graphic window report is at activated status.
b. Manually measure feature through measurement panel in the interface.
When “show solid CAD model” is not selected, CAD model of graphical report window is
- 112 -
shown in transparent color;
After setting up “show solid CAD model”, CAD model in graphical report window will be shown
in solid status, which is clear at the time of printing graphical report.
After selecting the option of “update when feature associate tolerance changes”, data in the
graphical report will update with change of feature association tolerance;
- 113 -
Application Setup-Graphic Window Setup-Form Error Option
If “auto arrange” function is activated, small window of form error can be arranged
automatically to make them arrange in order; auto arrange will be trigger when new feature is
dragged and dropped to form error window or graph is rotated and moved in form error window.
Double click parameter list corresponding to “max Form Err window counts” to enter edit
window and input quantity in edit window; the software allows 100 floating windows in default
and you should be cautious when the data increase.
“Graph anti-aliasing” options include “none”, “line anti-aliasing”, “full-screen anti-aliasing,
“all” to correspond to different graphical display effects of form window. Default option has the
highest display efficiency;
“Display Cad model” can set up Cad display effect as transparent or solid;
- 114 -
Application Setup-Graphic Window Setup-Blade Option
Graph anti-aliasing options include “none”, “line anti-aliasing”, “full-screen anti-aliasing, “all” to
correspond to different graphical display effects of blade.
- 115 -
Application Setup-Feature Setup-Feature Associate Tolerance
Update FAT during DMIS run: select “yes” to run DMIS program and change upper and lower
tolerance bands of tolerance (such as coordinate tolerance and diameter tolerance). Then,
corresponding output tolerance bands of associate features will be changed. If you select
“delayed”, the program will run to prompt whether to update feature associate tolerance. You can
select “no” not to update.
Sync output with FAT: automatically update output feature associate tolerance
- 116 -
Application Setup-Feature Setup-Nominal Features
From CAD update with CAD：CAD data are subject to MCS when CAD has just been loaded in
default. Under most cases, the coordinate system is not part coordinate system. Hence, after CAD
model loading, the coordinate system should be changed to make data match actual position.
Change coordinate system of CAD model is to assign a new coordinate system for CAD model.
Then the CAD model can move to its actual position. At time of movement, RationalDMIS allows
those theories directly defined from CAD model to move with CAD model. At this time, when
“update” is set up, if you set up “no update”, you will only move CAD model instead of nominal
feature.
Write DMIS when creating Nom from CAD:

When you select Yes to create a nominal feature in CAD model and self-learning switch is opened,
RationalDMIS will create a DMIS statement about feature definition. If you select no, no DMIS
statement will be created.
Hide CAD surface in feature recognition:

When you select Yes and select feature in CAD, corresponding CAD surface will be hidden, thus
avoiding the problem of alternate flashing of rotating CAD model when feature and CAD surface
are shown simultaneously. If you select no and select feature, corresponding surface in CAD can
be kept.
For coordinate transfer: When you select update and move the coordinate system, you will
- 117 -
update values of all nominal features to moved coordinate system. If you select no update, then all
nominal features will maintain original value.
For coordinate recall: When you select update and move the coordinate system, you will update
values of all nominal features to activated coordinate system. If you select no update, then all
nominal features will maintain original value.
Using CAD to update POINT after MEAS: When you select “nominal”, you can find that the
point w sensor ruby of CAD is updated to nominal point within certain error scope after feature is
measured. When you select “actual”, measure point will be projected on nominal point and
updated to actual point according to CAD after measuring feature. Select “no” not to update.
Write DMIS Feat/Gcurve during curve scan path creation:
Select whether to create Feat/Gcurve DMIS statement at the time of creating curve scanning path.
Select no meaning none.
F (GCV1) = FEAT/GCURVE, CART, 55.628928, 104.976573, 28.447410, -0.390164,$
0.268180, 0.880824, $
- 118 -
Application Setup-Feature Setup-Feature Display
Display point feature as: dot type. There is only one point.
，
Vector type, display point vector.
Display line feature as: Line type or vector type is the same as dot display.
Display arc center line/circle center line/cylinder center line/slot center line/ellipse
centerline: effects are as follows;
No: Yes:
Display clear surface: If you set up yes, the clear surface will be shown in the graph in the
- 119 -
form of a semi-transparent plane;
Highlight geometry when selected feature: if yes is selected, the feature will be highlighted
when feature name is clicked; taking plane feature display as an example:
Flash feature time: Set up flash feature time of right click, including short, medium and long;
Curve display quality: including default, fine and very fine; the higher the grade is, the smoother
the curve is;
- 120 -
Application Setup-Feature Setup-Last Feature Setting
Last feature setting can be automatically arranged in drop-down menu for quick selection of users.
Double click list of number of last features to eject text edit box and input figures in the text box.
The scope of maximum number is from 0 to 10.
Double click actual only to eject arrow drop-down menu. Select yes to no to control whether to
list actual feature.
- 121 -
Application Setup-Feature Setup-Point Cloud Setting
Can point cloud convert to point without CAD: you can select whether the point cloud can be
converted to point without help of CAD;
Point cloud on CAD tolerance: set up how far Cad of point cloud distance can obtain finished
point feature;
- 122 -
Application Setup-Feature Setup-CAD Setup
CAD includes several option configuration in setting up CAD:

Rotate CAD at MEAS to make feature visible: if you select yes, model will be rotated
automatically to adjust angle of view at the time of measurement to make measurement feature
shown in the graph;
Min deflection: if you accept parameter input, CAD graph less than min deflection will not be
read.
Import IGES invisible entities: options include: no and yes; if you set up as yes, hidden entities
will be imported;
Import CAD with color: options include disenable and enable: under enabling status, import Cad
will include color and layer information;
CAD material: set up appearance display;
Meshing method: options include: default, fine and very fine; the higher setup grade is, the more
exquisite Cad display is;
Skip duplicate IGES entity: options include: no and yes; as for some Cad models with repeated
surface, repeating part can be ignored;
Split C0 BSpline curve: options include: no and yes.
Decompose shape to face when it is: STEP file import/export requires a lot of continuous
memories and such import/export may fail. New option can divide file to avoid failure. SHELL
connects a series of surfaces through edge line. In reality, some 3D spaces are connected by solid
lines and compound is blending of the two. It is unnecessary to modify and increase solution size.
- 123 -
Application Setup-Measure Setup-Virtual Joystick
When you select “no”, RationalDMIS will not allow using virtual joystick in machine status area
to measure feature;
When you select “yes”, RationalDMIS will allow using virtual joystick in machine status area to
measure feature.
- 124 -
Application Setup-Measure Setup-Fitting Algorithm
Evaluation method for fitting algorithms to set up control feature:

Circle Least square method: N points to make quadratic sum of difference between
every point and circle center minimum.
Least covering circle: including or containing all circles with minimum
diameter of fitting points.
Maximum empty circle: including or not containing all circles with maximum
diameter of fitting points.
Minimum radius difference: two concentric circles including or not containing
all fitting points with minimum radius difference. Hence, the circle diameter is
half of diameter sum of the two concentric circles.
Arc Least square method: N points to make quadratic sum of difference between
every point and circle center minimum.
Minimum radius difference: two concentric circles including or not containing
all fitting points with minimum radius difference. Hence, the arc radius is half
of radius sum of the two concentric circles.
Plane Least square method: N points to make quadratic sum of difference between
every point and plane minimum.
Minimum plane distance: two parallel planes containing all fitting points with
minimum distance. Hence, the plane divides the two planes equally.
Curved surface Options include: fit actual surface and only fit surface point; only fit actual
surface will not show actual surface graph;
Nominal PTMEAS for curve Options include: no and yes. If 3D curve needs to be compensated, it should be
compensation set as yes;
Min best-fit iteration Set up minimum times of best-fit;
- 125 -
Application Setup-Measure Setup-Quick Measure
Point pick & measure retracts to clear surface: in terms of point feature, measure the point
whether to retract to clear surface;
Search distance of Find Nom: find nominal search distance;
- 126 -
Application Setup-Measure Setup-Scan Setting
SP25 Calibration deflection: set up maximum and minimum deflection value of SP25 calibration
of Pantec controller;
Scan density: control density of scanning point;
Curve scan points sequence definition: after curve scan defines starting point, direction point
and ending point, scan can be conducted according to 1-2-3 (starting-ending) or 3-2-1
(ending-starting) which is applicable to management window of measure point;
Desired deflection [0.2-0.7]: scanning point can be accepted when the sensor reaches
corresponding set value of deflection quantity in scanning;
Create GOTO for scan path: whether to create GOTO point for scanning path program;
- 127 -
Application Setup-Measure Setup-Point Generation Rule
Curve point generation There is fixed distance and fixed curvature algorithm at present.
rule: Fixed distance means a measure point is generated every other
certain distance; fixed curvature means measure point is generated
according to size of curvatures in all places of curve. More
measure points are generated where the curvature is large. Vice the
versa. Fixed curvature algorithm can better reflect curve shape
according to measure point.
Lead for auto circle: Measure point will become a spiral path from parameter value and
the default value is 0. As shown below:
MODE/AUTO, PROG, MAN
MEAS/CIRCLE, F(BOLTPATTER_H1), 6
ENDMES
Run under “MODE/AUTO, PROG, MAN”.
ARC start clearance/ARC end Arc length distance from arc start/ending when the software
clearance: calculates arc distribution measure point.
Curve start clearance/curve end clearance: Arc length distance from curve start/ending when
the software calculates curve distribution measure point.
Line start clearance/line end clearance: Distance from line start/ending when the software
calculates line distribution measure point.
Automatic adjust approach/retract for inner feature: when you select “yes”, inner feature
measure can automatically adjust approach retract distance;
- 128 -
Application Setup-Measure Setup-Math Option
Using unbound features: actual graph is allowed to have no intersection feature to create
construct result at the time of construct;
Enable surface point: feature will not find theory from corresponding surface after enabling
surface point;
Pick curve continuity: C0 and G1 modes control pick curve continuity;
Edge finder skips inner bound search: if you select yes, you can select edge point to skip inner
search and it is faster; for large Cad, selection efficiency can be up-regulated;
Point best-fit using actual on nominal vector: point best-fit uses actual point to project on
vector direction of nominal point;
Filter blade overlap measure point: select filtering overlap measure points;
Filter blade measure points: filter measure points when blade is generated
Closed curve tolerance: when the gap of non-closed curve is less than the value, the software will
automatically close the curve.
- 129 -
Application Setup-Output Setup-UI Output Control
Actual creation is set up as “output”; when measurement panel is used to measure feature, define
actual feature and construct panel is used to construct actual feature, it will be automatically
output to output panel.
Tolerance evaluation is set up as “output”: when tolerance panel is used for evaluation and
feature is dragged and dropped from feature database to certain tolerance of tolerance database for
evaluation, the tolerance will be automatically output to output panel.
If remove output when feature is deleted is set up as “yes”: when the feature is deleted, item
corresponding to feature in the output report will be deleted.
When CART|POL output control is set up as “based on system status”, output feature will be
output based on rectangular coordinate or polar coordinate set up at present; if it is “based on
feature”, output feature will be output according to rectangular coordinate or polar coordinate at
the time of feature generation.
Output Excel using: you can enable NeptuneExcel to select to use Microsoft office or open
office;
Output DMIS summary after DMIS program run: if you select yes, the output window will
output corresponding summary after DMIS runs;
Open PDF file after save: set up whether to automatically open file after saving Pdf;
Embed PDF font: please use default setting “yes”;
- 130 -
Application Setup-Solution Setup
Recent solutions: you can set up quantity of recent solutions
Recent import CAD model: you can set up quantity of recent import CAD model
When file new: you can reset the coordinate system to MCS or save all coordinate systems
Auto save: after opening, the setup below will work;
Auto save interval: you can set up and solution will be saved automatically when the setup
time is reached;
Save CAD model: whether CAD model is included in the solution;

Solution including CAD: if you set up as “yes”, CAD model is included in the solution. if “no”, it
is not included in the solution;
- 131 -
Application Setup-DMIS Setup-Start DMIS
Start up DMIS: you can load an existing DMIS file. When the software is start, you can directly
run DMIS program;
- 132 -
Application Setup-DMIS Setup-Compatibility
DMIS compatibility setup allows supporting file not generated under RationalDMIS environment
in RationalDMIS
Default means using local DMIS5.0 environment;
Option 1 will be compatible with program generated in Virtual DMIS.
Apply clear surface in Mode/Pro,Man: after selection, clear surface will be called automatically
under program mode and position of clear surface will be calculated according to nominal
position;
Crete PTMEAS with Apprch/Retrct: if it is set up as yes, there will be approach retract
parameters in PTMEAS statement of DMIS program recorded;
Creat MEAS with Clear Surface setting: if it is set up as yes, there will be safe plane setup
parameters in MEAS statement of DMIS program recorded;
Evaluate last Tol/DIAM in Tol/Pos calculation: as for evaluation of tolerance of location degree,
if there is entity status, diameter tolerance of corresponding feature will be evaluated;
Xterm execution: if there are two XTERNs at “reset at DMIS XTERN”, the first statement will
be unavailable after running the second XTERN. Save two XTERN macros are available in “save
in memory”;
- 133 -
GOTO/X[YZ]AXIS: “incremental” go corresponding GOTO in the form of increasing coordinate,
“absolute” to go to absolute position of coordinate system;
Maximum DMIS character per line: set up maximum character of DMIS statement per line in
double database;
SNSLCT activates calibration motion parameters: set up whether to set up motion speed
parameters as calibration parameter when sensor is activated;
Point group measurement DMIS: if you select “yes”, you can drag and drop multiple point
features to program area to generate measurement group statement;
VECBLD sample points in PROG mode:
“USER” will record position statement of sample point assigned by users; “DMIS” will not
record sample point which is evaluated by the software;
Planar TOL/ANGLB evaluation: if you set up yes, evaluation plane selection interface will
appear;
Internal code for predefined macro when available: after setup, you should run to drag and
drop feature measure point as statement of point feature. Macro statement will not run every time.
It runs in the software to improve efficiency;
Profile tolerance evaluation: setup of curve profile/curved surface profile uses Y14.5 or ISO1101
standard;
Slot true position evaluation: two different tolerance standards, parallel lines and center point; if
only center point is set up, you need to evaluate slot center position;
Construct line by 2 points using macro for nominal: two points under self-learning mode
constructs line whether to generate macro statement;
- 134 -
Application Setup-DMIS Setup-DMIS Font
DMIS editor font: set up double database---font in DMIS program area;
DMIS program font: set up font in DMIS editor;
MEAS/POINT sets DRO in MAN mode: when DRO1 or DRO2 is set up under man mode,
distance from target measure point will be shown in real time. “No set” will not be shown;
Generated DMIS automatic remove comment and empty line: if you select “yes”, comment
(bearing symbol $$) and empty line in the program area will be removed automatically.
- 135 -
Application Setup-Warning Setup-Play Sound
We provide a method to open or close sound feedback under certain conditions in option of
playing sound.
In addition, you can select to use Wave file as feedback.
To remove sound, please select “empty”; to adopt default name, please select “sound”. If you want
to select sound defined by yourself, you can click “WAV file” and a WAV file path setup option
will appear under corresponding item. Double click sound file path editing area. Click “ ” to
open dialog box, find sound file to be used locally and click button “open”. Click the check box on
the left of “sound file path” to make the sound setup come into effect.
Speech notification: You can select “open” or “close” and use synthetic speech sound to read text
input by users or that of the system.
Voice Reminder When MEAS: You can select “open” or “close”. The default status is “close”.
When it is “open”, the software will provide sound to prompt measurement feature at the time of
executing CNC program.
- 136 -
Application Setup-Warning Setup-Warnings
Warnings have set up several notification option configuration of the system.

Measure with un-calibrated sensor: options include accept, regard wrong and speech
notification;
Measure without error compensation: options include accept, regard wrong and speech
notification;
Measure with expired calibrated sensor: options include accept, regard wrong and speech
notification;
Sensor calibration form error exceeds tolerance: options include prompt, regard wrong and
speech notification;
Incorrect calibration gage location: options include prompt, regard wrong and speech
notification;
Incorrect calibration gage size: users will be prompted when there is several values’ difference
between setup and standard dimension of calibration gage;
Machine travels out side of error map: users will be prompted when the machine moves beyond
the scope of compensation;
Sensor calibration data valid in: options include 4/8/12 hours, 1/2/3/4/5/6/7 days, always; when
the period is exceeded, the sensor will turn red;
Update DMIS when rename: when the label (such as feature and sensor) is renamed, name in
DMIS program will be updated;
Update DMIS when feature is deleted from feature tree: options include never, always and
speech notify;
- 137 -
MAN POINT measure off target: set up nominal actual deviation acceptable to measurement
result value;
Change from MAN to CNC warning: change between the two modes will eject prompt window;
UI probe change warning: prompt will pop up when other sensors are activated in the interface;
Probe change warning in DMIS MODE/MAN mode: prompt will pop up if sensor statement is
switched in manual program during running;
Redefine coordinate label: when there has been a name of coordinate system, prompt will be
given when other features are used to establish name of the coordinate system;
Machine model show RED when out of travel: it turns red when the machine moves out of
machine model;
- 138 -
Application Setup-5 Axis Setup
Create 5-Axis command in: DMIS and I++ formats are available;
Create probe direction in DMIS using: statement in “HEADCS” format is fixed angle and angle
of statement in “PCS” format vary with coordinate system;
PH20 touch angle in degree: set up angle of 5-axis measurement of other features except the
hole;
Circle points generation: there are two methods when circle generates measure points: “min
angle change” and “min travel”;
PTMEAS uses current head touch controls I++ command: set up whether to execute according
to HEADTOUCH/ALLAXIS behind statement at the time of PTMEAS execution; if setup is no, it
will be set up on the whole;
- 139 -
Application Setup-Probe/Styli Changer
Probe/styli changer
Double click parameter list corresponding to probe/styli changer to eject a drop-down button:
Select type of probe/styli changer to be added in drop-down menu.
RationalDMIS supports four kinds of sensor change systems:

MCR20,
SCR200,
FCR25-L3,
FCR25-L6,
MRS,
It requires no additional file or initiation to active these sensor change systems. Only one sensor
change system can be activated in the same time. Namely, the system cannot use two sensor
- 140 -
change systems at the same time.
Restart the software after selection to make setup come into effect.
Changer will be shown in sensor database;

Right click changer node to eject right click menu of mouse.
Click “hide toolholder” to hide graphical display part of

toolholder in the graphical area.
Click disable toolholder to enable toolholder not to work at the

time of changing sensor, with same effect as not adding
changer.
Drag and drop sensor label name to port of changer to relate sensor with port.
After relating port, you can preview correlation graph of sensor and port in the software graphical
area.
Right click port to eject menu and select “cancel port” to cancel correlation.
At the end of the change cycle: you can select to stop at the “same probe head position” or “same
ruby position” after change;
- 141 -
Rotary table:
Double click parameter list corresponding rotary table with left mouse button to eject a drop-down
menu:
Click drop-down button on the right of parameter list and select “yes” in drop-down menu to
activate rotary table in the software.
It requires no additional file or initiation to active the rotary table. It will immediately come into
effect if you click application button after changing setup of rotary table.
Click “machine status area”.
Operation panel of rotary table will be added in the status area. You can click
icon of rotary table to enter operation interface of rotary table:
Prompt: you can use Ctrl+F6 to quickly switch to operation window of status area.
Input diameter, height, datum diameter and datum height parameter of rotary table.
Click “make table” to make a graphical rotary table in the software.
If sensor database is not shown in the double database at present, firstly, we switch double
database to sensor database.
- 142 -
Right click node of rotary table and select “enable” and “show” in option menu.
Click to enter operation area of rotary table:
Drag and drop measured

upper surface and center
circle of rotary table to
calibration panel of rotary
table.
Click button “application” to

complete calibration of
rotary table.
Click drop-down menu on the right of control options to select control parameters in control area
of rotary table and input rotation angle.
Sensor change moves above specified height: If you select “yes”, the sensor will move above
specified height to avoid collision at the time of change. If you select “no check”, it will not.
Disk stylus calibration: You can set up two different dot types to calibrate disk stylus.
End face: a point at the top of sphere will be measured at the bttom of stylus;
On equator: all measure points are distribtued near the equator;
- 143 -
Options-Keyboard Input Mapping
Keyboard input mapping can be found through “options” in main menu.
Digital keyboard mapping controls with external digital keyboard.

Select option of keyboard input mapping to activate definition window of keyboard mapping.
Drag and drop unmapped fissures to icons corresponding to buttons to achieve figures correspond
to icons,
Select check box in the front of activating keyboard mapping,
For example: when we drag and drop “20” to “measurement finish button” and “activate keyboard
mapping”, pressing digital key 20 in wireless digital keyboard is equal to pressing “measurement
finish button” in software interface.
- 144 -
Click “OK” to quit definition window of keyboard mapping.
- 145 -
Main Menu-Window
You can find option “window” in the main menu.
Window help provides functions for control interface to show window and position.
The window includes the following functions:

Switch viewer and data Switch positions of viewer display and data window on the left and
window right (F11)
Restore default window Restore all icon positions to default position.
position
Data window Show or hide feature database (F12)
Operation window Show or hide operation window (Ctrl+F11)
Status bar Show or hide status bar
Shortcut window Show Rational shortcut window
Data window shortcut Control display and display contents of shortcut window in double
database
- 146 -
Main Menu-Window-Switch Viewer and Data Window
Switch viewer and data window can exchange positions of viewer and data window.
Through clicking “switching viewer and data window”:

Or you can use F11 shortcut key to operate quickly.
- 147 -
Main Menu-Window-Restore Default Window Position
Option of restoring default window position can control the window to restore to initial position
status of software.
You can click “restore default window position” to restore software operation interface to initial
position status.
Restore default window position can quickly restore double database to default position.
- 148 -
Main Menu-Window-Data Window
You can control to show or hide database through “data window” option.
Visibility of data window can be set via checking check box in front of “data window” option:
Or use “F12” shortcut key to quickly show/hide data window.
- 149 -
Main Menu-Window-Operation Window
You can control to show or hide operation area through “operation window” option.
Visibility of operation window can be set via checking check box in front of “operation window”
option:
When you select to hide “operation window”, RationalDMIS interface is shown in the following
picture.
Or you can use “Ctrl+F11” shortcut key to quickly show/hide operation window.
- 150 -
Main Menu-Window-Status Bar
You can control to show or hide status bar through “status bar” option.
Visibility of status bar can be set via checking check box in front of “status bar” option:
When you select to hide “status bar”, status bar below RationalDMIS will be hided.
- 151 -
Main Menu-Window-Shortcut Window
You can control to show or hide Rational shortcut window through “shortcut window” option.
Visibility of status bar can be set via checking check box in front of “shortcut window” option:
Or you can continuously click twice “Ctrl” key to open and show Rational shortcut window.
Customize custom shortcut area

Your can customize icons shown in custom shortcut area.
After clicking arrow icon in Rational shortcut title bar, shortcut menu will be ejected and you can
select the menu item of “customize”:
After selecting menu item of “customize”, you can open dialog box of custom:
- 152 -
Add: user can pitch on the icon to be added and then click “add” button to add the icon to custom
shortcut area.
Remove: user can pitch on the icon to be removed in added toolbar box and then click “remove”
button to return the icon to available toolbar buttons.
Reset: user can click “reset” button to empty all added toolbar icons.
Close: after user finished the customization and clicked “close” to save, added toolbar icons will
be shown in custom shortcut area.
- 153 -
Main Menu-Window-Data Window Shortcut
You can control to show or hide shortcut icon display in double database through “data window
shortcut” option.
You can enable data window shortcut by clicking “data window shortcut”.
After selecting “data window shortcut”, operation interface to enable data window shortcut is
shown as follows:
Select left check box of “enable data window shortcut”.

Use “add” and “remove” to distribute shortcut icons in left and right databases.
After clicking “OK”, double databases will appear shortcut icon(s) and you can use mouse to click
shortcut icon and finish fast select in database.
- 154 -
Main Menu-Help
Help of RationalDMIS includes electronic help manual, help assistant, software license agreement
and view software version number, etc.
Help Electronic help manual

Show assistant Real-time operating tip tool of software contents
Show license agreement Software license agreement
Show machine checking gage viewer View machine checking gage program
Show DMIS execution summary viewer View DMIS execution program
Show sensor Calib history viewer View sensor Calib date program
Show app log viewer View user’s login/logout situation
Support tools It includes tools of Watchdog and ConfigSnap, Pantec
controller＋network cable communication＋sp25 can
also show “scan deflection monitor”.
Check for update
About RationalDMIS Automatically inspect current exiting latest version,
version information, copyright information and
software opened module information.
- 155 -
Main Menu-Help-Show Help
Help is electronic help file of software operation.
You can click “help” and use help menu to open electronic help file.
Prompt: or click “F1” to quickly open “help”.
System will automatically eject help file of RationalDMIS:

You can use “+” in front of content to unfold help content and view detailed help information in
left interface.
- 156 -
Main Menu-Help-Show Assistant
RationalDMIS assistant can provide real-time assistance when user operates RationalDMIS and
help of RationalDMIS assistant is mainly directed at application methods that can’t be directly
expressed on software interface. Drag-and-drop between two data window areas of RationalDMIS
and drag-and-drop of data window is the main scope of assistant to provide help. RationalDMIS
assistant provides help for user through voice and text prompts.
Select “show assistant”
As shown in the figure, RationalDMIS assistant is a cartoonish measuring machine image.

You can use mouse to drag and drop it to a new position.
When user conduct drag-and-drop operation in database, Assistant will eject a prompt window to
provide operation help; operation help provided by RationalDMIS assistant at the time of starting
drag-and-drop is different to that at the time of putting to target area, when something is dragged
and dropped to the target area, RationalDMIS assistant will remind the user of results that will be
created after drag-and-drop.
Take “drag and drop ball feature to MCM coordinate system” for example, when use starts
dragging and dropping a ball feature label name, RationalDMIS assistant will give a tip as shown
in the following figure:
- 157 -
When user drags and drops this ball feature label name on the target, RationalDMIS assistant will
give a new tip, for example: when the ball is dragged and dropped on MCS coordinate system
node of coordinate system database, it will give a tip as shown in the following figure:
The assistant also includes some control options and you can use the right mouse button to click
the assistant:
Show tip It can real-time prompt you during the operation. Prompt: if the
assistant does not give a prompt, you can enable the assistant again
following this display prompt option.
Pause speech Temporarily pause voice prompt. Prompt: you can also use
“Ctrl+F12” to quickly pause voice prompt.
Hide agent Hide the agent.
Start voice command Change the mode of the Assistant to start hearing voice command.
Add/remove voice words Add/remove voice words to/from assistant voice library.
Voice command:
You can click “start voice command” to change the mode of the Assistant to start hearing voice
command.
If the Assistant has two ears, it means that the Assistant is hearing voice command.
Voice command information will be inserted here.
- 158 -
Main Menu-Help-Show License Agreement
License Agreement explained all rights and obligations of software user. Please read carefully.
When you click “show license agreement”, dialog box of license agreement will be ejected.
Dialog box of license agreement lists details of all rights for user:
You can click “OK” to quit “license agreement”.
- 159 -
Main Menu-Help-Show Machine Checking Gage Viewer
MCG is Machine Checking Gage and you can use MCG viewer to view machine checking gage
file.
Click the left mouse button and then click “show machine checking gage viewer”.
The system will eject operation panel of “MCG viewer”:
You can use to open the file with expanded name of .mcg-machine checking
gage file.
- 160 -
Main Menu-Help-Show DMIS Execution Summary Viewer
Tool of “show DMIS execution summary viewer” can help to view summary situation of DMIS
execution program.
You can show it by clicking the menu item of “show DMIS execution summary viewer” in “help”
menu.
After clicking, software will eject DMIS execution summary and analysis box; Log Item recorded
nearest DMIS programs, so you can see the summary of DMIS program in LogDate column after
clicking with mouse.
You can use to open the Dmis execution summary program with name suffix
of .Dmis.
- 161 -
Main Menu-Help-Show Sensor Calib History Viewer
“Show sensor Calib history viewer” can help to view information of sensor calibration.
You can click “show sensor Calib history viewer” to open viewer interface and view historical
data items of sensor calibration in the interface:
You can click to open sensor historical calibration data file with name suffix
of .sch.
Default storage location of historical calibration data file is: Drive: \.\ below
RationalDMIS\MachineSignature folder。
- 162 -
Main Menu-Help-Show App Log Viewer
Login/logout situation of all users can be viewed.
Including user name and time of login/logout:
- 163 -
Main Menu-Help-Support Tools
Support tools include tools of Watchdog and ConfigSnap, Pantec Controller＋network cable
communication＋sp25 can also show “scan deflection monitor”.
WatchDog tool is a tracking software to record user’s operations on the software; when user
encounters problems and needs help, it may require user to open WatchDog and make the same
operation, then save and send back recorded data in WacthDog, so as to use data in WatchDog to
help analyzing problems.
You can click “help” menu and select “Show Watch Dog”; after clicking, the system will eject
“WatchDog”:
By this time, all operations made in the software will be recorded in WatchDog:
ConfigSnap Tool can save registry information related to RationalDMIS software in this
computer to a file and this file can be put to other computer for application.
- 164 -
Main Menu-Help-Check for Update
“Check for update” can help you to search the latest software version information on internet.
Ensure that your computer is connected to Internet;
Click “check for update”.
The software will automatically check and update information panel;

And then it will be automatically connected to Internet to search the latest software version
information.
- 165 -
Main Menu-Help-About RationalDMIS
User can select “about RationalDMIS” menu item in “help” menu of RationalDMIS to understand
version information about RationalDMIS, as shown in the following figure:
The system will eject related dialog box after clicking “about RationalDMIS”.
Dialog box of “about RationalDMIS” will be shown.

Version information, copyright information and license information of the software are included.
- 166 -
You can click drop-down menu of small arrow on the right of “optional modules” to view opened
module function information of current software lock.
- 167 -
Graphic Area
In RationalDMIS interface, view window is located at the middle position. It includes five kinds
of view windows (except modules):
Graphic window: It is used to graphically show various measuring features,

(F3) dynamically show measurement processes and realize selection of
features or measurement points and other operations.
DMIS edit window: (F4) It is the window to edit DMIS program through built-in DMIS editor
of RationalDMIS.
Output window: It is used to create output reports of feature measurement and various
(F5) properties.
Graphic report window: It is used to create graphic report of measuring features or tolerance.
(F6)
FORM error window: Through drag and drop feature to graphic error window can create
(F7) graphic error report of dragged and dropped feature.
- 168 -
Graph Viewer F3
After clicking “graph viewer”, window menu will be switched to graphic window and toolbar will
also be switched to graphic operation toolbar:
There are 3 kinds of icons in the toolbar of graphic window:
Drop-down icon group shows current This kind of icon includes two windows. The first
checked operation icon: window shows current checked icon and operation
represented by the icon will be executed immediately
Sample: (drop-down arrow is after pressing this icon. The second window is
on the right of icon) drop-down window and includes various selectable
operation icons, current checked icon will be
replaced after selecting a new icon in the drop-down
window and operation represented by the icon will
be executed immediately.
Drop-down icon group: This kind of icon itself does not represent any
operation, but a drop-down toolbar or drop-down
Sample: (drop-down arrow is a part menu will be shown after clicking the icon.
of the icon) Operation represented by the icon will be executed
immediately after selecting a icon from drop-down
toolbar or drop-down menu, but selected icon will
not be set as current checked icon.
- 169 -
Direct manipulation icon: This kind of icon just belongs to operation icon.
Sample: (icon has no drop-down

arrow)
Graphic window has 2 modes in total: view mode and select mode
View mode:
When the mouse turns to this shape in graphic window, it means that current graphic window is in
view mode. Graphic view properties are related to size, angle and distance of graphic object.
Under normal conditions, they are called “zoom”, “rotate” and “move”.
“Zoom”: you can roll the middle mouse button to zoom the size of graphic object. Rolling the
middle mouse button and pressing “SHIFT” key meanwhile can reduce zoom factor. Continuous
zoom can also be achieved, namely graphic object can be zoomed out and zoomed in by pressing
“SHIFT + CTRL” keys, pressing the left mouse button and moving the mouse up and down.
“Rotate”: you can press the left mouse button and move the mouse to rotate the graphic object.
Rotation is achieved based on current rotating center, but rotating center will not be shown in the
graphic window. Sometimes rotating center is very important to achievement of rotation purpose.
Rotating center can be changed in RationalDMIS and details are described in the following icon
for setting rotation mode. The graphic object can be rotated along screen axis; when the mouse is
moved to the place near graphic window edge, mouse icon will be changed to indicate rotation
along screen axis is available. At this time, you can roll the middle mouse button to rotate the
graphic object along screen axis. You can rotate the graphic object along screen horizontal axis at
left and right edges of graphic window and rotate the graphic object along screen vertical axis at
top and bottom edges of graphic window.
“Move”: move means to change the position of graphic object in graphic window under the
condition without changing view angle. (Rotation can’t be achieved during moving. Note:
RationalDMIS uses perspective field of view, thus small angle of rotation may be caused during
moving). If you want to move graphic object, you can press the middle mouse button and move
the mouse. In addition, you can also press “SHIFT” key and the left mouse button at the same time
and then move the mouse.
Select mode
When the mouse turns to this shape in graphic window, it means that current graphic window is in
Select mode. Select mode means that you can select a point by pressing the left mouse button.
Selected point is controlled by current selection option and details are described in the following
“selection option” for setting icon group. There are 2 exceptions in select mode:
1. Searching and positioning in select mode: searching and positioning can change view status, but
- 170 -
they are available only in select mode since they require a selected point. Searching and
positioning status can be entered by pressing “S” key in select mode. Then the mouse pointer will
turn to search state pointer, with shape like a cross. At this time, you can press the left mouse
button and select a certain graphic feature to start searching and positioning. Searching and
positioning will put the selected point to the center of graphic window, then you can zoom the
graphic object and set the selected point as the rotating center. If you press the left mouse button
but select no thing, searching and positioning status will be returned to select mode and any
operation will not be made.
2. Setting view angle of nominal feature: setting view angle of nominal feature (at this moment,
selected option must be selected nominal feature or selected actual feature or selected measure
point and details are described in the following “select option setting icon and pop-up window) is
to move the mouse to the graphic feature you are interested and press “N” key. Then
RationalDMIS will set graphic window center to the selected feature and set viewing direction to
parallel to feature direction.
Under above two situations, select mode will temporarily be switched to view mode.
- 171 -
Graph Viewer-Window Selection Icon and Drop-down
Toolbar
The following are previews of effect pictures shown in various view angles:
Front view :
Front view is to set XZ
plane of current
coordinate system as the
current view angle.
Back view :
Back view is to set XZ
plane of current
current view angle.
- 172 -
Left view :
Left view is to set YZ

plane of current
current view angle.
Right view :
Right view is to set YZ
plane of current
current view angle.
Top view :
Top view is to set XY
plane of current
current view angle.
- 173 -
Home view :
The view angle when
RationalDMIS is started.
Except these default view angle settings, RationalDMIS also provides save and reading functions
of custom views. Please refer to description of custom views data window for specific contents.
- 174 -
Graph Viewer-Window Selection Icon and Drop-down
Toolbar
Auto switch: When “auto switch” option and an item of “view mode” are
selected, RationalDMIS will automatically select to switch to
select mode or view mode according to position of the mouse
in current graphic window. Generally, it depends on current
selected option settings (please refer to explanation of the
following “select option setting icon and pop-up window”);
when the mouse points to various features or CAD model and
they conform to current select options, graphic window will be
automatically switched to select mode to make it available for
user to make a selection; otherwise the graphic window will be
switched to view mode.
Show feature name: If you select the item of “show feature name” and stop the
mouse at a certain feature in select mode, RationalDMIS will
automatically show the name of pointed feature. See the
picture below:
Auto show vector: If you select the item of “auto show vector” and stop the
mouse at a certain feature in select mode, RationalDMIS will
- 175 -
automatically show the direction vector of pointed feature. See
the picture below:
Show mouse over coordinate: If you select “show mouse over coordinate” and move the
mouse on digital analogy in select mode, RationalDMIS will
automatically show values of coordinate where the mouse is
located. See the picture below:
- 176 -
Graph Viewer-View Mode
View mode indicating icon indicates that current graphic window is in view mode. You can pitch
on the icon to make graphic window enters view mode.
Note: If “auto switch selection and view mode” in “select mode indicating icon and
drop-down menu” is selected, RationalDMIS will pick automatically selected or unselected
view mode indicating icon during auto switch of view mode:
- 177 -
Graph Viewer-Zoom in Graphic Area
Window zoom icon indicates that current graphic window is in window zoom status. You can
select a certain area in graphic window for zooming in after selecting the icon. See the picture
below:
- 178 -
Graph Viewer-View All
Icon of “view all” can show all graphic objects in graphic window. When some graphic objects are
outside the graphic window, you can click the icon of “view all” to show all graphic objects in the
graphic window.
- 179 -
Graph Viewer-View Rotation Mode
When graphic window is in view mode, you can change rotating center through drop-down tool of
rotation mode.
1. Rotate about origin of coordinate: random rotation can be made by regarding origin of current
coordinate as the center.
When this option is selected, RGB tri-chromatic coordinate arrows representing current coordinate
system will be in the middle of graphic area and original of coordinate will be current rotating
center.
2. Rotate about selected point: random rotation can be made by regarding a certain point selected
in graphic window as the center.
When this option is selected, the mouse will turn to selection shape (like a cross) and user can use
it to select a certain graphic feature; then center of selected feature will be set as the center of
graphic window and current rotating center. Note: a certain nominal feature or actual feature can
be selected only after setting relevant selection option in “selection option settings”.
3. Rotate about CAD center: random rotation can be made by regarding CAD model center as the
center.
When this option is selected, center of CAD model will be set as the center of graphic window and
centroid of CAD model will be set as current rotating center.
4. Rotate about sensor tip: random rotation can be made by regarding sensor tip as the center.
When this option is selected, sensor tip will be set as the center of graphic window and current
rotating center.
5. Rotate about X axis: rotation can be made by regarding X coordinate axis of current coordinates
system as the axis.
- 180 -
When this option is selected, origin point of current coordinate system will be set as the rotating
center. At the same time, rotation will be limited and can only be made along X axis of coordinate
system.
6. Rotate about Y axis: rotation can be made by regarding Y coordinate axis of current coordinates
system as the axis.
center. At the same time, rotation will be limited and can only be made along Y axis of coordinate
system.
7. Rotate about Z axis: rotation can be made by regarding Z coordinate axis of current coordinates
system as the axis.
center. At the same time, rotation will be limited and can only be made along Z axis of coordinate
system.
8. Rotate about selected vector: rotation can be made by regarding direction vector of a certain
selected feature in graphic window as the axis.
When this option is selected, the mouse will turn to selection shape (like a cross) and user can use
it to select a certain graphic feature; then center of selected feature will be set as the center of
graphic window, but rotation will be limited and can only be made along direction vector of the
feature. Note: a certain nominal feature or actual feature can be selected only after setting relevant
selection option in “Selection Option Settings”.
- 181 -
Graph Viewer-Display Settings
User can set to show/hide graphic objects in graphic window in drop-down menu of “display
settings”. In some cases, graphic objects to be viewed by user can be more obviously shown
through hiding certain graphic objects.
Sensor positioner:
Sensor positioner is an imaginary line with

arrow of sensor stretched from axis direction
of sensor tip in the process of moving. The
imaginary line can help user in more clearly
judge spatial position of sensor during moving,
as shown in the figure below:
- 182 -
Move in Wireframe Mode: CAD model before rotating:
When “move in wireframe mode” option is selected

and CAD model is moved or rotated in graphic
window, only wireframe status of CAD model can be
shown; in this way, moving or rotating speed will be
faster. This function is suitable for larger CAD model CAD model in rotating:
during operations to improve operation speed.
Ambient light： Open:
Set CAD display to decide whether to open ambient

light.
Close:
- 183 -
Graph Viewer-Color Settings
In drop-down toolbar of color settings, you can set background color of graphic window and
display color of graphic objects in graphic window, such as nominal feature, actual feature and
CAD model, etc.
After selecting a certain selected color icon in drop-down toolbar, color select dialog will be
shown as following picture and then user can select favorite color in the dialog.
- 184 -
Graph Viewer-Auto Function Settings
Collision detection:
If “collision detection” is selected, RationalDMIS will automatically detect that whether the
sensor would collide with CAD model or other matters in the process of moving machine sensor;
if collision might be caused, RationalDMIS will eject an error window to prompt user and stop
moving of sensor.
Not detect:
This item is a default of the
software, if “not detect” is
selected, RationalDMIS will
not conduct collision
detection.
road detection：
If “road detection” is
evaluate and detect road on
the basis of sensor.
entity detection:
If “entity detection” is
evaluate and detect road on
the basis of the whole sensor.
Auto target zoom:

If “auto target zoom” is selected, RationalDMIS will automatically move the position where
measure point located to the center of graphic window in the process of selecting measure point or
measurement, so that user can more clearly see the situation of measure point. Note: either or
neither “auto target zoom” and “auto probe zoom” may be selected at the same time.
After selecting “auto target zoom”, user can select a nominal feature, which can be realized either
through DMIS program or in right click menu of point feature node in feature database. Selected
measure point will be set as the center of graphic window. At the same time, RationalDMIS will
automatically zoom graphics to ensure that probe is included in graphic window and can
maximize graphic feature. When “auto target zoom” is selected in dialog box of program settings,
- 185 -
RationalDMIS give out sounds with different tones according to degree of closeness between
probe and selected measure point.
The following two pictures show situations of auto switch of graphic window viewing angle and
lens when probe get close to measure point from far to near. Note: probe head and measure point
are always connected by a white line.
Auto probe zoom:

If “auto probe zoom” is selected, RationalDMIS will automatically move the position where probe
point located to the center of graphic window in the process of selecting measure point or
measurement, so that user can see the moving situation of probe all the time. Note: either or
neither “auto target zoom” and “auto probe zoom” may be selected at the same time.
Auto show CRD:

If “auto show CRD” is selected, selected coordinate system will be flickering and displayed in
graphic window correspondingly after selecting a certain coordinate system in coordinate system
database to provide convenient for user to view situations of coordinate system.
- 186 -
Graph Viewer-Remove
You can remove or hide graphic objects in graphic window via drop-down toolbar of “remove”.
Remove all actual features:

You can hide all actual features in graphic window. Hided actual features can be re-displayed
through settings in feature database.
Remove all nominal features:

You can hide all nominal features in graphic window. Hided actual features can be re-displayed
through settings in feature database.
Remove all motion paths:

You can remove all probe motion paths and removed motion paths can’t be re-displayed.
Remove all Meas points:

You can remove the display of all measure points in graphic window, but corresponding data of
displayed measure point can’t be removed.
- 187 -
Graph Viewer-Measure Point Pick Settings
Function of pick settings toolbar: set feature type obtained from CAD, nominal features/actual
features obtained from graphics and measure points edited/created on geometrical features.
Pick settings toolbar is in unselected status under default condition:
In pick settings toolbar, when you click icon of measure point option and click the pushpin mark,
the toolbar will stay on the interface; otherwise, it will be automatically hided;
- 188 -
Measure Point Pick Settings-Pick None
When this option is selected, any graphic object can’t be selected even though “select mode”
is opened (or “select mode” is set to “auto switch select and view modes” or in “view mode”). As
shown in the figure below: “auto switch select and view modes” in “select mode” is selected, no
matter what type of features of the mouse moved to, the icon is “view mode” all the time and can’t
be switched to selectable status; in addition, CAD mode is shown in translucent status.
- 189 -
Measure Point Pick Settings-CAD Geometry Definition
After selecting this option, a relevant setting window will be added behind facial-type selection.
Nominal definition: define a nominal face feature on CAD.
Nominal & actual definition: define a nominal face feature on CAD and give it an actual value
same as nominal value at the same time.
MEAS: when nominal surface is selected, the software will automatically evaluate measure point
and eject “run DMIS” menu; you can click it to directly measure features.
Measure point generation rule is controlled by rules of automatically generating measure point of
“setting window” in measurement panel:
- 190 -
MEAS DMIS: this item will be displayed when self-learning is opened, number of measure points
will be calculated according to rules of automatically generating measure point of “setting
window” when this item is set; it can record self-learning of measurement program and define a
nominal face feature in feature database, but can’t drive machine to make a measurement.
Menu at pick: when face feature is selected on the model, selection menu will be ejected,
including options of“nominal & actual definition”, “MEAS” and “MEAS DMIS”.
In addition, you can set “select mode” to “auto switch select and view modes” and “view mode”
after selecting this option. As shown in the picture below: when the mouse is moved to any place
outside the digital-analog face feature, it can’t be switched to “select mode” to pick face feature.
Once the mouse is moved to the surface of digital analog, window system will automatically jump
to “select mode” in window selection and the mouse on CAD digital analog will turn to selectable
icon. When you click digital analog surface, face feature will be picked and nominal value will be
added to database window.
- 191 -
As shown in the picture below: (the software can intelligently identify face features, including
“ball”, “cylinder”, “cone”, “curved surface” and other features)
Sub CAD model: you can recombine the selected 3d features to a new CAD.
After selecting 3d features in the graphics, you can click “create CAD” to create a new CAD file.
- 192 -
Measure Point Pick Settings-CAD Wire Geometry Definition
You can use edge line, U flow line and V flow line set types of picked line features respectively;
picked features of U/V flow lines are within the face of CAD and picked features of edge line are
at the boundary of CAD.
Examples of U flow line and V flow line:
Select settings:
- 193 -
Nominal definition: define a nominal face feature on CAD.
Nominal & actual definition: define a nominal face feature on CAD and give it an actual value
and eject “Run DMIS” menu; you can click it to directly measure features.
Rules created by measure points are subject to automatically created rules of

measure point in “setting window” of measurement panel.
VECBLD MEAS: use method created by vector to measure the feature.
MEAS DMIS: on the condition that self-learning is opened, a DMIS program will be
automatically created to measure the feature.
VECBLD DMIS: on the condition that self-learning is opened, a DMIS program will be
automatically created by using method created by vector to measure the feature.
Menu at Pick: when face feature is selected on the model, selection menu option will be ejected.
After selecting the option of line feature, you can set “select mode” to “auto switch select and
view modes” or select “view mode”. When the mouse is moved to any place outside the
- 194 -
digital-analog, it can’t be switched to “select mode” to pick line feature.
Once the mouse is moved to digital analog, window system will automatically jump to “select
mode” in window selection and the mouse on CAD digital analog will turn to selectable icon; after
clicking the mouse, the nearest line feature will be picked and nominal value will be added to
database window.
After pitching on “select line feature” option, right side of pick selection setting icon of graphic
window toolbar will display linear thickness input box and overturn vector icon at the same time,
as shown in the picture below:
In which, linear thickness input box is used to set linear thickness when line feature is selected;
overturn vector icon shows the operation to overturn vector in the pressed statues.
- 195 -
Measure Point Pick Settings-CAD Point Geometry Definition
Nominal Definition: define a nominal face feature on CAD.

Nominal & Actual Definition: define a nominal face feature on CAD and give it an actual value
and eject “Run DMIS” menu; you can click it to directly measure features.
Rules created by measure points are subject to automatically created rules

of measure point in “setting window” of measurement panel.
VECBLD MEAS: use method created by vector to measure the feature.

MEAS DMIS: on the condition that self-learning is opened, a DMIS program will be
automatically created to measure the feature.
VECBLD DMIS: on the condition that self-learning is opened, a DMIS program will be
automatically created by using method created by vector to measure the feature.
Menu at Pick: when face feature is selected on the model, selection menu option will be ejected.
- 196 -
After selecting point feature, when you move the mouse to CAD model in Select Mode, a point
feature can be created and picked, which includes point feature and edge point feature.
When you pick a point feature on CAD model, RationalDMIS will automatically produce a
default feature label name for selected feature (Please refer to contents related to feature name
prefix in measuring feature properties window of measuring operation area.). Selected features
can’t be defined repeatedly; when you pick the same feature twice, a nominal feature with the
same parameters will not be created again and the feature picked and defined previously will be
highlighted and displayed in feature database.
After pitching on “select point feature” option, right side of pick selection setting icon of graphic
window toolbar will display linear thickness input box, overturn vector icon and point select
function icon at the same time, as shown in the picture below:
Default point select function icon includes the following functions: surface point, edge point, wire
point, sheet edge point and sheet metal point.
Surface point: feature picked on the surface of CAD
- 197 -
Edge point: feature picked on the edge of CAD
Wire point: picked point on the scribed line
Sheet edge point: straight line, circle, ellipse, round/square keyway and other featuers picked on
the thin-walled workpiece or common workpiece.
Select a square keyway on thin-walled workpice and click to accept.
Sheet metal point: select several control points on CAD with the left mouse button and produce
measure point with “create surface point” or “create edge point” function:
- 198 -
Pitch: density of controlled measure points
Offset: distance between controlled offsetting measure points
Create surface point: measure point created on the surface of control point
Create edge point: created measure point perpendicular to control point surface
Nominal point: turn measure point to nominal point
Measure point: after closing self-learning, clicking “measure point” will drive the machine a make
a measurement
Set angle point and corner point:

Find out “KNeptuneRegUtil.exe” in root directory of the software, select show angle point and
corner point and then reboot RationalDMIS.
- 199 -
Pick of angle point and corner point:
Left part of above picture shows the angle point; you can use the mouse to pick angle point for
definition according to the position of red point shown in the picture. Angle point definition:
1. It must be on the intersecting line of two planes.
2. It must be at the nearest position to red pick point.
3. The vector divides nominal vector of two planes equally.
Note: in order to correctly define angle point vector, 2 planes must be visible.
Right part of above picture shows the corner point; you can use the mouse to pick corner point for
definition according to the position of red point shown in the picture. Corner point definition:
1. It must be the intersecting point of 3 planes.
2. The vector must be the arithmetic mean of nominal vector of 3 planes.
Note: in order to correctly define corner point vector, 3 planes must be visible.
Measure of angle point and corner point:
- 200 -
During measurement of angle point and corner point, 3 measure points will automatically created
on each plane; angle point always uses 6 measure points and corner point always uses 9 measure
points. Distance between points can be set in the window shown as follows:
DMIS program:
Angle point
RMEAS/ANGLEPT, F (AP1), 6, VECBLD, 6.000000, 6
ENDMES
Corner point
RMEAS/CORNERPT, F (CP1), 9, VECBLD, 6.000000, 9
ENDMES
Angle point and corner point can’t be directly measured, which requires using vector to create
point structure on the plane. Measurement can be realized in program mode, but GOTO and
PTMEAS statements are elided.
● Angle point and corner point can’t be defined with DMIS statement and must be picked on
CAD.
● Support point profile, coordinate tolerance, distance tolerance and symmetry tolerance
● Support graphic report, SPC, display of graphic view window.
● Support halve/vertical/parallel/tangent/projection/mobile/ fitting structure
- 201 -
Measure Point Pick Settings-Select Nominal
When current status of toolbar is set to “select nominal”, CAD entity will turn to transparent
status;
When function of “select nominal” is used, there must be existing defined nominal features on the
graph; otherwise any feature can’t be selected;
When nominal feature is selected on the graph, relevant features will be picked in feature database,
as shown in the picture below:
You can directly drag and drop nominal features on the graph; for example: drag and drop circle
into point feature:
Multiple select features with Ctrl + left mouse button:
- 202 -
When you use Ctrl + left mouse button to drag out a dotted box in the graphic area, multiple
nominal features within the box will be selected.
- 203 -
Measure Point Pick Settings-Select Actual
When current status of toolbar is set to “select actual”, CAD entity will turn to transparent status;
When function of “select actual” is used, there must be existing defined actual features on the
graph; otherwise any feature can’t be selected;
When actual feature is selected on the graph, relevant features will be picked in feature database:
You can select actual features and conduct drag-and-drop operation on the graph; for example:
drag and drop actual features to structural window, tolerance evaluation window, etc.
In the same way, when you use Ctrl + left mouse button to drag out a dotted box in the graphic
area, multiple nominal features within the box will be selected.
- 204 -
Measure Point Pick Settings-Create/Edit Measure Points on
Geometry
After confirming that measuring operation area is opened and selecting type of measure features,
you can click the mouse to select measure points:
If current window is statistical graph window and is online, the

machine will make real-time measurement.
If current window is measure point administration window,

RationalDMIS will record nominal measure points on measure point administration window (as
shown in the picture above). After dividing measure points, you can use to preview
machine motion path; if there is collision, you can real-time adjust the path; if there is no problem
of path, you can use to complete the measurement.
- 205 -
DMIS Editor F4
Since DMIS program window in double database window is not a DMIS editor, it can just display
DMIS program or add DMIS program created inside RationalDMIS. Edit of DMIS program must
be completed by using build-in DMIS editor of RationalDMIS. In DMIS program window, when
you click icon of “move to DMIS editor”, contents in DMIS program window will be sent to
DMIS editor for editing; you can also click icon of “send to program window” to send back
edited DMIS program to DMIS program window.
Select “DMIS editor window”:
DMIS editor window is shown in the picture below and toolbar at upward side is DMIS editor
toolbar:
When you click the right key of DMIS editor window, option of DMIS command will be ejected
from DMIS template.
- 206 -
DMIS Editor-File Options
New:
When you click “new”, the system will empty DMIS program of current part to create a blank
DMIS edit interface, as shown in the picture below:
Open :
When you click “Open”, the system will automatically eject a dialog box of “Open Dmis File”;
then you can select required part program file under assigned directory and click “Open” to show
part program on current edit interface.
Save :
When you click “save”, the system will automatically eject a dialog box of “save Dmis file”; then
you can input legal program name, set save path and click “save” to save part program in assigned
path.
- 207 -
Print : you can directly print DMIS program.
Print preview : preview program to be printed.
- 208 -
DMIS Editor-Edit Options
Undo: you can use this key to undo edited action of last step and make continuous undoing,
until there is no available action for undoing and the key turns to un-selectable status .
Redo: it is used to redo undone edit action and make continous redoing, untile there is no
available action for redoing and the key turns to un-selectable status .
Cut: it is used to cut selected DMIS program.
Copy: it is used to copy selected DMIS program.
Paste: paste cut or copied DMIS program at assigned position.
In addition, you can directly click the right mouse button to select required edit action in dialog
box of ejected edit options. As shown in the picture below:
- 209 -
DMIS Editor-Search and Replace
Search content window

It is used to input contents to be searched. You can choose former searched contents by clicking
drop-down icon.
Search down:
When this key is selected, the system will automatically find the next required content in DMIS
program from top to bottom.
Search up:
When this key is selected, the system will automatically find the previous required content to in
DMIS program from bottom to top.
Replace:
When you click “replace” key, the system will automatically eject the dialog box of “replace” as
shown in the picture below:
User can input content to be replaced in “find what” and input content after replace in “replace
with”, then select suitable replace way to replace corresponding contents according to different
needs.
- 210 -
DMIS Editor-Bookmark
Toggle bookmark:
User can use bookmark at interesting place for easy to find later. “Toggle bookmark” will set a
bookmark at current program line. As shown in the picture below:
Next bookmark:
When you select “next bookmark”, bookmark will be searched from current program line and the
cursor will be moved to the program line of the bookmark. As shown in the picture below:
Pre bookmark:
When you select “pre bookmark”, bookmark will be searched upward from current program line
and the cursor will be moved to the program line of the bookmark. As shown in the picture below:
- 211 -
Clear all bookmarks:
When you select “clear all bookmarks”, all set bookmarks will be cleared. As shown in the picture
below:
- 212 -
DMIS Editor-Format Options
Comment selection:
When you selected DMIS statement to be commented in program window and clicked “comment
selection”, the system will add comment characters $$ in front of selected DMIS statements and
comment them. As shown in the picture below:
Uncomment selection:
When you selected the statement to be uncommented and clicked “uncomment selection”,
comment characters in front of selected statement will be deleted and the statement will become
executable statement. As shown in the picture below:
Tab:
In order to layer program and facilitate search, amount of indentation can be added for suitable
statements, if necessary. You can select the statement to be indented and click “Tab” to indent the
selected statement backward for a distance. As shown in the picture below:
- 213 -
UnTab：
You can select the statement to be reversely indented and click “UnTab” to move the selected
statement upward for a distance. As shown in the picture below:
- 214 -
DMIS Editor-To Program
After editing part program, you can click “to program” icon to send back edited DMIS
program to DMIS program window from DMIS editor window and complete “execute” program
or other functions in DMIS program window.
- 215 -
Graphic Area-Output F5
Output window is used to output measured results and various properties; RationalDMIS supports
output of traditional text format, text and pictures output, user customized output, Excel tabular
form output and SPC statistical graph output, etc.
Output window is composed of two parts: main output window and output setup window.
As shown in the picture below, all output contents of RationalDMIS are displayed in main output
window:
Main output window includes toolbar, custom output window and Excel output window. You can
operate output content window, open output setup window and print output contents through
output toolbar. Available mode of icon in output toolbar will be changed along with the switch of
output content window between custom output window and Excel output window; please refer to
the following description for specific contents.
- 216 -
Output-Set Saving Path for Output File
Before creating output report, user either assigns the save path for output file or uses default
output path of the system. Steps to change output path are as follows:
You can click “option” menu in main menu of RationalDMIS and select “application setup” in
ejected drop-down menu or use shortcut key “Ctrl+D”:
When the system automatically pops “application setup” window, you can modify the save path of
output file in output directory under “directory”.
Use the left mouse button to click right blank area of output directory.
The system will eject a view button.
Use the left mouse button to click the view button and select suitable output path in ejected dialog
box:
- 217 -
- 218 -
Output-Output Toolbar
Open/close output setup window:

You can open or close output setup window; please refer to the following descriptions for
situations related to output setup window.
Open output file:

You can load previously saved Excel format output file to Excel output window. This icon is
available only when it is switched to Excel output window.
Save output file:

When it is switched to custom output window, content in output window can be saved as Html
webpage file; when it is switched to Excel output window, content in output window can be saved
as Excel file. Saved Html webpage file can be viewed in web browser.
Delete all output items:

User can delete all output items in custom output window to empty the custom output window.
This icon is available only when it is switched to custom output window.
Delete selected output item:

User can certain selected output item in custom output window. This icon is available only when it
is switched to custom output window. In custom output window, a shadow will appear on the
bottom of selected output item to express that this output item is selected currently, as shown in
the picture below:
Not selected Selected
Add output text:

User can add a span of text in custom output window. This icon is available only when it is
switched to custom output window. After clicking this icon, a text output window will appear on
the bottom of custom output window, then user can input text he wants to input in this window
and press “enter” key to add the text behind the last output item in output window after
- 219 -
completing input, as shown in the picture below:
Export data to Excel

Please refer to “NeptuneExcel Instructions” document for application method.
Synchronize feature associate tolerance

Synchronize feature associate tolerance to output window.
Print:
You can print out contents in output window.
Print preview:
You can preview print contents before print.
Screen output:
When you click this icon, contents will be output to normal output window.
Excel output:
It will be switched to Excel output window after pressing this icon.
Report
Please refer for to RationalDMIS-Custom Report.doc for details of custom report format and
function.
Custom output:
You can select custom output format.
Note: Excel output window is available only when the user installed Microsoft Office OWC
Control; otherwise icon of “switch to Excel output window” is grey and unavailable.
- 220 -
Output –Screen Output Window
By default, when you open output window, it shows screen output window. Exportable output
items of screen output window include output feature, output tolerance, output variable, output
picture and output text. You not only can drag and drop relevant output items from database to
realize output, but also can use output statement in DMIS program to realize output.
Output contents of screen output window in the interface is divided into 3 parts: output report
header, output column heading and output content window.
Output report header:

Output report header can show company name, names of measuring personnel and measurement
date. You can set output content of output report header under “report header” in output setup
window. Please refer to description in output setup window for specific contents.
Output column heading:

Output column heading can indicate that what type of value shown in each output table column
during output feature or tolerance is. Column heading includes nominal value, actual value, error
value, lower tolerance, upper tolerance and trend; the trend has 3 situations during display
according to that whether the tolerance exceeds scope and details of out of scope, as shown in the
figure below:
- 221 -
It indicates that the value is within the scope of tolerance.
It indicates that the value exceeds the scope of lower tolerance.
It indicates that the value exceeds the scope of upper tolerance.

You can set output column headings to be shown in “default” under “format definition” of output
setup window; please refer to description in output setup window.
Output column heading can be shown only when output direction is set as “vertical direction” in
“direction” under “format definition” of output setup window.
Output content window:

What shown in output content window are all specific output items and these items include
features, tolerances, variables and images. When they are output features, their label name [red
line box] and system environment [blue line box] will be displayed on the top of output items and
their parameters names [green line box] will be displayed on the left side of output table, as shown
in the picture below:
In which, when features are output, the system environment includes current enabled coordinate
system name, length unit, angular unit, coordinate system type and working plane during output;
for example: CRD5/MM/ANGDEC/CART/XYPLAN in above picture indicates that current
enabled coordinate system name is CRD5, current length unit is mm, angular unit is degree,
current coordinate system type is Cartesian coordinate system and working plane is XY plane
during outputting features. You can set name of parameter to be shown at left in “feature
definition” of output setup window; please refer to description in output setup window for specific
contents.
When tolerances are output, label names of output tolerances, feature name used for evaluating
tolerance and system environment during outputting tolerance will be displayed on the top of
output item, as shown in the picture below:
In which, system environment during outputting tolerance including the length unit and angular
unit; for example: in the above picture, MM/ANGDEC indicates that current length unit is mm
and current angular unit is degree during outputting tolerance. Name display of feature used for
evaluating tolerance is convenient for user to view; for example: in the above picture, TPOS2D1
Eval Feat= CIR1 [Bonus=0.0000] indicates that feature used for evaluating tolerance is CIR1.
- 222 -
When variable is output, only variable value rather than variable name will be output, as shown in
the picture below:
“VCART” indicates that what output is a vector type variable and (0.0000, 0.0000, 1.0000) is
value of the variable.
Output images, they mainly includes saved observed view picture and view pictures of graphic
report in output custom view database. You can drag and drop view labels to be output to output
window from custom view database for outputting view pictures.
When you click the right mouse button on a certain output item in output content window, right
click menu of “delete” will be ejected to delete selected output item.
- 223 -
Output-Excel Output Window
Excel output window is an Excel form built in RationalDMIS, where user can output contents as
Operation of Excel output window is the same as that in Excel of Office software. Exportable
output items of Excel output window include output features and output tolerances. You not only
can drag and drop relevant output items from database to excel output window realize output, but
also can use output statement in DMIS program to realize output.
Excel output with more complex output requirements can be realized by using NeptueExcel
function. Please refer to “NeptueExcel Instructions” document for specific operation methods.
Note: Excel output window can be used only when user has installed Microsoft Office Xp or
Office Xp above version.
- 224 -
Output-Output Setup Window
Output setup window is used to set various properties of output window, these properties include
style of custom output window, output device setting and output parameters setting of all output
items, etc. You can open or close output setup window by clicking “open/close output setup
window” icon at the left side of output toolbar.
Settings will be displayed abreast beside main output window when output setup window is
opened. Tree structure is used to save output settings in output setup window and output settings
tree has 5 father nodes, they are “device definition” node, “format definition” node, “feature
definition” node, “decimal places” node and “output style” node, as shown in the picture below:
- 225 -
Output Settings-Device Definition
Device definition node is used to set output device and attribute of output device. RationalDMIS
predefined 3 kinds of output devices: file, printer and screen; in which, file also predefined Excel
file and default file, as shown in the picture below:
There is a check box in front of each predefined device, checked box means that the device is
opened and unchecked box means that the device is closed. You can also open or close some
predefined devices through running DMIS program, these devices include Excel file, printer and
screen and corresponding DMIS keywords are OPEN/DID and CLOSE/DID. However, default
file can only be opened and closed with hands.
Declare new output device:

There are two methods to declare new output device: execute DMIS program through right click
menu of “device definition” node.
When you right-click on “device definition” node, right click menu for declaring new device will
pop up, as shown in the picture below:
After selecting “declare device” menu item, dialog box for declaring device will pop up, as shown
There are 4 types of device in the dialog box of “declare device” for declaring new device and
- 226 -
they are Store, Term, Print and Comm, but only new Store device (namely file device) can be
defined through dialog box of “declare device”. “Device ID” is device tag name shown in output
settings tree; “device name” is the name of file saving output contents, which can be selected by
clicking browse button beside. Created new output file device will be added below predefined file
devices, as shown in the picture below:
Definition of new device by executing DMIS program is realized via DMIS keywords [DEVICE/
[STOR, TERM, PRINT, EXCEL, INCR].
EXCEL is DMIS extended keywords to define Excel device and the following DMIS statements
can be used to define an Excel device:
DID (ExOut) = DEVICE/EXCEL,'C:\TextExcel output.xls'

INCR is DMIS extended keywords of output file (*.mea) for definition and statistics and the
following DMIS statements can be used to define a device:
DID (SPC_DATA) = DEVICE/INCR,'C:\SPCDATA\Test_Part.mea'
Output type:
Currently, RationalDMIS can output five types of features, they are:
Measure feature
Tolerance
Image
Text
Variable
Note: text and variable only allow to be output to file type (excluding Excel) and image only
allows to be output to screen printer or Html file. Specific rules are shown in the table
below:
- 227 -
Measure feature Tolerance Image Text Variable
Screen Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Printer Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
File Yes Yes No Yes Yes
Excel Yes Yes No No No
Html file Yes Yes Yes No No
Print function:
When you select “printer” device in “device definition”, all output targets will be automatically
output to printer; when one page is full, this page will be automatically printed out and page
number will be accumulated automatically. At the same time, from segment line in output window,
you can observe current automatically printed position. See red arrow shown in the picture below:
If the last page is not fully filled in, it will not be printed out automatically; you can execute DMIS
statement Endfil or click print icon on output toolbar to print out this page.
When “printer” device in “device definition” is not selected, you can click print icon on
output toolbar to print out output content; at this time, what printed are conents of the whole
screen.
- 228 -
Output Settings-Format Definition
Node of format definition is used to set the format of output item shown in output window, as
Direction
Direction node is used to set displayed direction of output feature and tolerance. Direction node
has two direction options: horizontal direction and vertical direction; only one of them can be
selected at the same time. When horizontal direction option is selected, output features and
tolerances will be displayed as the picture below:
When it is displayed in horizontal direction, “output column heading” at the top of custom output
window will be hided and output headers will be correspondingly displayed at left column of
output feature item and the top line of output tolerance.
- 229 -
When vertical direction option is selected, output features and tolerances will be displayed as the
picture below:
When it is displayed in vertical direction, “output column heading” will be displayed on the top of
custom output window.
Vector
Vector node is used to set form of displayed feature vector during setting output features.
Show out tolerance item only

If “enable” item under node of “show out tolerance item only” is selected, only data tolerance item
will be shown during output, so as to make it convenient for user to view. The following picture
shows the output situation when “enable” item is not selected:
The following picture shows the output situation when “enable” item is selected:
Show parameters descriptions

When it is selected, relevant parameters of measure features will be shown, such as enabled
coordinate system, length unit, angular unit, coordinate system type and working plane, etc.
The following picture shows the output situation when “enable” item is not selected:
- 230 -
Show feature output option

Output contents of feature can be shown when this item is selected.
The following picture shows the output situation when “enable” item is not selected:
Show feature label

When “show feature label” is enabled:
When it is not enabled:
- 231 -
Output trend with OK or NP
When “output trend with OK or NP” is enabled, whether it exceeds tolerance or not can be
expressed with OK or NP:
When it is not enabled, the situation is expressed by digital out of tolerance or trend:
Combine same feature tolerance

When this option is enabled, same feature tolerance will be combined and displayed:
When this option is not enabled, output feature tolerance will be separated:
Operation document
Node of operation documents is used to record necessary user operations and this operation
document is automatically generated under certain user interface operation. If it is generated from
- 232 -
operation of DMIS program, it will have no any action. Operation document is just suitable for
screen output and HTML output. Corresponding user operation records will be displayed when the
option is enabled.
Statements of automatcially recording and creating coordinate system:
Don’t show zero Tol item

When “don’t show zero Tol item” is enabled, tolerance zone with 0 in upper and lower tolerance
zones will not be displayed:
Don’t show feature not evaluated of tolerance

When this option is enabled, due to tolerances of Y and Z coordinates are not evaluated, thus it is
not output:
- 233 -
When this option is not enabled:
Show print page number

When “show print page number” is enabled, current page number can be shown after preview or
print:
The page number will not be shown when this option is not enabled:
Drag & drop new item before selected item

When this option is enabled, new output item will be output in front of selected item.
Use default tolerance table
- 234 -
When “use default tolerance table” is enabled, output tolerance zone will correspond to set
tolerance table:
Title text for each item

When “title text for each item” is enabled, title text for each output item will be separately
displayed:
Show description of tolerance datum

When “show description of tolerance datum” is enabled, description of tolerance will be output:
Print full header on each page

When this option is enabled, each print page will have a separate header:
- 235 -
No print page margin
When “no print page margin” is enabled, printed report will be full in horizontal direction to the
greatest extent:
- 236 -
Compatibility-use absolute value as coordinate tolerance
It can output nominal and actual values of all coordinate tolerance in output window after taking
absolute values; when this option is enabled, numerical values of output coordinate tolerance will
be output after absolute values are taken:
- 237 -
Output original negative values when this option is enabled:
Compatibility-use absolute X/Y/Z value to evaluate X/Y/Z error

In relevant error evaluation of output window, nominal value will participate in evaluation and
output after having its absolute value taken; it is shown in the picture below when the option is
enabled:
Integer seconds in DD: MM: SS
When you want to display the angle in form of “DD: MM: SS”, you can “enable”
and then relevant angle value will be output in interger seconds:
Default
Default node allows user to set whether to display nominal value (NOM), actual value (ACT),
deviation value (DEV) and tolerance (TOL) of output items. If you checked check box in front of
a certain option, it means that you want to display numerical values in output items related to this
option. Output sequence of output items of nominal value, actual value and deviation value can be
changed by dragging them among tree nodes; while output sequence of UpTol and LwTol in
tolerance output item can also be changed. Method: when you click the mouse on the left column
of tolerance items, a drop-down select box will be ejected to allow user to make a choice, as
- 238 -
Default node actually is default VForm in RationalDMIS and user can also custom VForm; please
refer to description below.
Custom VForm:
You can select “create VForm” in right click menu of father node of “format definition” to add
new format. See the picture below:
After selecting “create VForm” menu item, dialog box of create VForm will be ejected, as shown
You can input VForm name to be created in VForm label input window of dialog box of create
VForm and there are 3 check boxes of nominal value (NOM), actual value (ACT) and deviation
value (DEV) for setting specific contents of format. When VForm is created, a new node will be
generated under the father node of format definition, as shown in the picture below:
User can also add new VForm format and corresponding DMIS keyword of VFORM through
DMIS program.
- 239 -
All created VForm formats are available for output of file, screen, printer and Excel. In node of
“device definition”, user can manually select device output format as customized Vform, as shown
User can also use keywords of OPEN and FDATA to select customized Vform in DMIS program;
for example: OPEN/DID (stor1), FDATA, V (VForm1), OUTPUT, OVERWR.
- 240 -
Output Settings-Report Option
VECBLD point reports actual projected on to nominal

When you select “enable”, vector created point will output report in the form of actual projected
on to nominal:
All point report actual projected on to nominal

When you select “enable”, all point will output report in the form of actual projected on to
nominal:
- 241 -
Point reports in major coordinate only
When you select “enable”, only coordinate of vector direction will shown when points are output;
for example: if vector at PT1 direction is (0, 0, 1), then only coordinate of Z direction will be
output:
When it is not enabled, all coordinate values will be output:
Custom PROFP nominal value

You can custom PROFP nominal value by enabling it and then output the feature; displayed
PROFP nominal value is defined value.
When it is enabled, you can input PROFP nominal value:
Output PROFP nominal value of the feature is the default value “2”:
PTMEAS to calculate Dx, Dy Dz, Dr

When this option is enabled, you can output Dx, Dy, Dz, Dr of PTMEAS measure points:
- 242 -
- 243 -
Output Settings-Feature Definition
Feature definition node allows user to set parameters of output items to be specifically output.
Generally, except output images, parameters of output items include X, Y, Z values and I, J, K
values.
There is check box in front of each parameter setting of output

item; if the check box is selected, it means that this parameter
will be output during outputting. Take circle for example, as
shown in the right picture:
Settings in above picture express that when circle is output, X, Y, Z values and diameter value of
the circle will be output:
- 244 -
Parameter setting of output image is different from other settings of output items, as shown in the
picture below:
User can use these setting items to control aligning place of output images and check that whether
they can automatically matched.
- 245 -
Output Settings-Decimal Places
User can use decimal places node to set output angular value, distance value and decimal places of
deviation value. When you click the mouse on the right column of decimal places node to be set,
decimal places input edit box as shown in the picture below will appear:
You can also use DMIS keywords of DECPL/[angle, dist, dev] to set decimal places.
Decimal control:
Option of decimal control can control current modified decimal places settings to determine that
whether apply it to new created output item without modifying numerical value of previous output
item, or apply it to all output items. When you select “global” option, not only current decimal
places settings will be used by new output items, but also previous output items values will be
applied, when you select “new item” option, it has no any affect on previous output contents and
can just affect later added output item.
- 246 -
Output Settings-Output Style
Output style node is used to set output style of output report, including form of report header, used
font and color for output. In addition, RationalDMIS also predefined several output styles, so that
user can directly make a choice for use.
Report header:
User can customize contents of report header through sub node of report header; contents can be
customized are as follows:
There is a check box in front of sub node of report header; if this check box is selected, it means
that report header will be shown in output report; if it is not selected, report header will not be
shown. Company name in customized contents takes from hardware secret key; date and time are
computer date and time when it is output, which can’t be modified; other contents can be directly
modified in the displayed edit box by clicking the mouse on the right column.
Current style
You can set font and color for output in the grid nodes of current output style, as shown in the
- 247 -
picture below:
When you click the mouse on right column of settings item, there will be font or color selection
button; when you click this button, font or color selection dialog box will be injected for user to
choose form, as shown in the picture below:
User can save the customized output style through right click menu current output style father
node, as shown in the picture below:
“Save as custom style” can be selected and used in node of “custom output style”; please refer to
the following descriptions for specific contents.
Custom output style:

Currently, RationalDMIS provides three predefined output styles for user to make an alternative
use; at the same time, user can also use default style, as shown in the picture below:
- 248 -
There is a check box in front of each output style option; when this check box is selected, it means
that the selected output style will be applied. Note: only one check box among them can be
selected at one time and multiple selections are not allowed.
“Default style” option refers to a default output style of the software.

“Custom style” option refers to the custom output style saved in node of “current output style”.
- 249 -
Output-Various Output Forms Samples
A Traditional output report：

If you want to generate traditional text form output report, you can use the mouse to click and drag
one or more date (including feature, tolerance, etc) to output window.
Note*: multiple selections can be realized by pressing “shift” or “Ctrl” on the keyboard to click
for picking.
B Output report with texts and pictures:

User can directly or indirectly send graphic report of “graphic report window” and “graphic error
graph window” to “output report” to generate graphical output report.
-Output graphic report: please refer to sections and chapters of creating graphical output report for
details.
Graphic report examples:
- 250 -
Graphic Report Example 1 Graphic Report Example 2
-Output graphic error report: please refer to output report of creating graphic error graph for
details.
Graphic error graph report examples:
Graphic Error Graph Report Example 1 Graphic Error Graph Report Example 2
C User customized output report:

User can make various settings for output in output setup window to meet specific output demands
of user. Please refer to output setup window for details.
Screen output report examples:
- 251 -
Screen Output Report Example 1
D EXCEL form output report：
Excel output window is available only when the user installed Microsoft Office Xp or above
version; otherwise icon “switch to Excel output window” is grey and unavailable.
If you want to output EXCEL form type output report, you must to switch to “EXCEL” window
firstly:
Drag and drop data to be output to output window from database:
User can use NeptuneEXCEL to operation more complex Excel output mode:
- 252 -
E SPC statistical graph report:
You can drag and drop feature tag or tolerance tag to root node of SPC database window to create
SPC data.
SPC graph can be created in graphical report window. If you want to create SPC graph, you can
drag and drop SPC tag to graphical report window. The operation processes are the same as those
of dragging and dropping feature and tolerance to graphical report window to create graphical
report.
Please refer to SPC window module operation instructions for details.
SPC statistical database will real-time show number of measurements according to number of
repeated measurements required to be confirmed by user.
After measurement, you can drag and drop SPC item to be output to graphic area. The following is
example of SPC statistical graph report:
SPC Statistical Graph Report Example 1
- 253 -
F——project views:
F—1: observation viewing angle graph

In “observation viewing angle” of custom views database, you can directly drag and drop viewing
angle to be output to output report window to complete view output.
F—2: graphical reports

In “graphical reports” of custom views database, you can directly drag and drop graphical report
to be output to output report window to complete view output.
- 254 -
Note*: graphical report output graph generated through dragging and dropping in custom views
window has no background color.
F—3: form error reports

In “form error reports” of custom views database, you can directly drag and drop error report to be
output to output report window to complete view output.
Note*: error report output graph generated through dragging and dropping in custom views
window has no background color.
- 255 -
Graphic Area-Graphical Reports F6
You can create graphical report of measure feature or tolerance in RationalDMIS graphical report
window. Graphical report is composed of several small windows of graphical report that used to
indicate attribute parameters of feature or tolerance.
A typical small window of graphical report is shown in the picture below:
Created graphical report windows are included in graphical report window area; graphical report
window area is composed of two parts: graphical report main window and graphical report
toolbar.
- 256 -
Graphical Report-Toolbar
Graphical report toolbar is located at the top of graphical report window area, as shown in the
picture below:
Functions of most of icons in graphical report toolbar are the same as those in toolbar of graphic
window area, but graphical report toolbar also includes icons specialized to graphical report
window area.
Icon of viewing angle selection:

Functions of this icon are the same as these of toolbar in graphic window area; please refer to
descriptions in graphic window area.
Icon of select mode indication:

Icon of view mode indication:

Icon to zoom in window:

Icon to view all:

Icon to view rotation mode:

Icon to show settings:

- 257 -
Icon of color settings

Icon of selection for alignment:
When you use the mouse select floating window after selecting alignment mode, the floating
window will be aligned according to requirements.
Hide feature without graphical report

When this icon is clicked, the software will hide features unlisted in graphical report.
Create new graphical report incon:

When you click this icon, all small windows of graphical report in current graphical report
window area will be removed. If current graphical report had not been saved, RationalDMIS will
eject a dialog box to prompt user to save it.
Save icon
Save as graphical report: you can use this icon to save all small windows of graphical report in
current graphical report window area as graphical report. When this icon is selected, a dialog box
of “set report name” will be popped up, as shown in the picture below:
- 258 -
After setting graphical report name, user can save the graphical report with set name. Saved
graphical report will be added to graphical report name selection window in toolbar, so that user
can switch over several saved graphical reports through graphical report name selection window.
Saved graphical report will also be added to custom views database, so that user can enable or
remove a certain graphical report in custom views database.
Save as PDF file:
When you select this option, a dialog box of “save PDF” will pop up, then you can select build-in
template of the software or use PDF template maker to design a template for output by yourself.
Save as picture: you can save the graphical report as picture format (selectable picture formats are
jpg, bmp, gif and png).
Graphical report settings icon:

This icon can be used to set parameters of feature to be shown in small window of feature
graphical report. When this icon is selected, graphical report settings window will be shown
beside graphical report window area, as shown in the picture below:
- 259 -
Graphical report settings window is tree structure; father nodes show types of all features and
place below father nodes of each feature type shows parameters of the feature. There is a check
box in front of each feature parameter item; when this check box is selected, it means that this
parameter will be shown; when this check box is not selected, it means that this parameter will not
be shown, as shown in the picture below:
Settings in the above picture indicate that only X, Y, Z, D parameters of circle and their tolerances
will be shown in small window of circle graphical report.
Graphical report name selection window:

All saved graphical report names are listed in this selection window and user can switch over
graphical reports through this window to view specific contents of graphical reports.
Icon of to output window:
- 260 -
This icon can be used to export contents of current graphical report window area to output window
in the form of picture to make it convenient for user to print and output.
Icon of size marking:

When this icon is pressed, graphical report window area will enter size marking status; please
refer to help menu of “size marking” for descriptions related to size marking function.
- 261 -
Graphical Report-Main Window
In fact, main window of graphical report is the same as the window area of graphic window
operation area, except that operations of picking feature or measure point can’t be made. Small
windows of graphical report dragged and dropped to graphical report area are shown in main
window of graphical report, as shown in the picture below:
At present, small window of graphical report can only be created through drag-and-drop operation.
User can both drag and drop feature from feature database to graphical report window area to
create graphical report of dragged and dropped feature and drag and drop tolerance from tolerance
database to graphical report window area to create graphical report of dragged and dropped
tolerance.
Small window of graphical report:

Various parameters values are listed in small window of graphical report created through
drag-and-drop operation of feature or tolerance; meanwhile, there is a line pointing to the
represented feature from small window of graphical report; for tolerance, this line points to feature
of generated tolerance. A typical small window of graphical report is shown in the picture below:
Contents shown at left side of the top of graphical report small window are tag names of
represented feature or tolerance; for example, “CIR1” in above picture. There is corresponding red
line, green line or no line under tag names of feature or tolerance on the basis that whether there is
actual feature of nominal feature and whether it exceeds the tolerance.
- 262 -
There will be a bold line under the tag when it only
has nominal feature rather than actual feature.
——〉
There will be a green line under the tag when it both
has nominal feature and actual feature without
exceeding the tolerance. ——〉
There will be a red line under the tag when it both has
nominal feature and actual feature exceeding the
tolerance. ——〉
Parameter list is located below red line or green line. Column number and line number in
parameter list vary with features pointed by small window of graphical report and these
parameters can be set in graphical report settings window.
For measured features, the first column of its parameter list shows numerical value of nominal
feature with black color; the second column shows numerical value of actual feature and the color
of numerical value will correspondingly turn red or green on the basis that whether it exceeds the
tolerance; the third column shows deviation value and the color of deviation value will
correspondingly turn red or green on the basis that whether it exceeds the tolerance; the fourth and
fifth column show tolerance values, when check box in front of “Show Tol” of a certain feature
type in graphical report settings window, tolerance values will be shown with blue color; the last
column shows trend value, when it not exceeds the tolerance, green block chart of trend will be
shown; when it exceeds the tolerance and is negative error, deviation value will be shown in
brown; when it exceeds the tolerance and is positive error, deviation value will be shown in red.
Small window of tolerance graphical report:

For tolerance, any name and word will not be shown on the top of small window of graphical
report, but red line or green line will be shown on the top on the basis that whether it exceeds the
tolerance. Small windows of tolerance graphical report can be divided into three forms according
to different tolerance types.
The first form:

Tolerance types with tolerance report shown in this from include angularity tolerance,
perpendicularity tolerance, parallelism tolerance, 2D/3D positional tolerance, cylindricity
tolerance, concentricity tolerance, circular run-out tolerance, whole run-out tolerance, roundness
tolerance and flatness tolerance and straightness tolerance and symmetric tolerance; this kind of
tolerance report includes three columns of data: the first column shows tolerance deviation value;
the second column shows tolerance zone; the third column shows tend chart.
The second form：

Tolerance types with tolerance report shown in this from include distance tolerance, angle
- 263 -
tolerance, diameter tolerance, radius tolerance, coordinate tolerance, width tolerances and cone
angle tolerance. This kind of tolerance report includes six columns of data: the first column shows
nominal tolerance value; the second column show actual tolerance value; the third column shows
tolerance error; the fourth column shows the lower tolerance; the fifth column shows the upper
tolerance; the sixth column shows the trend chart.
The third form:

Tolerance types with tolerance report shown in this from include point profile tolerance, line
profile tolerance and face profile tolerance.
This kind of tolerance report includes four columns of data: the first column shows tolerance
deviation value; the second column shows the lower tolerance; the third column shows the upper
tolerance; the fourth column shows the trend chart.
Small window of measure point graphical report:

For measure points, in normal mode, left side of the top of graphical report small window will
show serial No. of this measure point in all measure points of the feature, right side of the top will
show deviation values, serial numbers and “|” separator between deviation values. There will be
corresponding red line or green line below serial numbers and deviation values on the basis that
whether the measure point exceeds the tolerance, as shown in the picture below:
Except display forms displayed in normal mode, small window of measure point and point feature
graphical reports also supports display of vector trend diagram. In the mode of vector trend
diagram, deviation values at three directions of X, Y, Z will be displayed in the form similar to
graphical small coordinate system, as shown in the picture below:
In which, red arrow indicates X direction, green arrow indicates Y direction and blue arrow
indicates Z direction. In addition, positive and negative direction determination of X, Y, Z
conforms to right-hand rule.
Vector trend diagram mode must be opened in settings of graphical report settings window. There
is an option of “vector diagram” in “general settings” of graphical report settings window, you can
select front check box to open vector trend diagram mode.
- 264 -
Auto arrange small windows of graphical report
User can either manually arrange potions of small windows of graphical report in graphical report
window area, or allow RationalDMIS automatically arrange potions of small windows of
graphical report to more clearly and orderly show graphical report. Automatically arranged small
windows of graphical report are set in program settings window of RationalDMIS (can be opened
through “program settings” menu item in “options” menu); there is a “graphical report settings”
item in program settings window, as shown in the picture below:
Please refer to descriptions in program settings window for conditions of these options.
- 265 -
Graphical Report-Set Graphical Report
Color settings
Dev OutTol color: set color for deviation when it is out of tolerance; the following picture can
reflect corresponding relationship of colors:
Trend color: set displayed color for trend
Enable tolerance vector color option of point feature coordinate system: when nominal vector
direction of point feature and coordinate tolerance evaluation direction (X axis, Y axis, Z axis) are
- 266 -
within certain limits, you can select check box at left side to determine that whether to display
tolerance error color of point feature coordinate and color setting method is the same as above.
Column option
In column option, you can select to show characteristic item of output feature. When this check
box is selected, it means that this parameter will be shown; when this check is not checked, it
means that this parameter will not be shown, corresponding graphical report of above settings is
It shows outputs when all check boxes are checked:
It shows outputs when partial check boxes are not checked:
Text setting
In text settings, you can set to display text describing relevant parameters of the feature; generally,
text display is consistent with original parameter for easy to identify and understand; except
special cases, they shall be the same to the greatest extent.
- 267 -
For example: modify diameter D to ‘DIA’:
General setting
Update report when setting changes: when the setting is selected, it will real-time update
displayed contents of output report. For example: when feature output parameter item is changed,
graphical report will be changed in real time.
- 268 -
Show Feat title: when this option is selected, feature title will be shown in the graphical report.
Show feature label: you can select this option to show feature label.
Show tolerance label: when it is selected, tolerance label will be shown.
Show description of tolerance datum: when it is selected, standard description of tolerance

datum will be shown.
Vector diagram: show in the form of vector diagram
No Tol indicator for label only: when this option is selected, there will be no tolerance indicator
for label only output.
When this option is selected:
When this option is not selected:
- 269 -
Show gradient background: when it is selected, background will be shown in color gradient.
Show gradient background:
Don’t show gradient background:
Show out tolerance item only: items out of tolerance are shown, while items within tolerance are
not shown.
Don’t show zero Tol item: don’t show tolerance item when the tolerance is zero.
All point report actual projected on to nominal: when this option is selected, actual points will
be output after being projected on to nominal point direction.
Point reports in major coordinate only: when this option is selected, only coordinate of vector
direction will shown when points are output; for example: if vector at point PT1 direction is (0, 0,
1), then only coordinate of Z direction will be output; if direction of vector is not consistent with
any coordinate system, such as (1, 1, 1), then all coordinates will be shown.
Decimal place: you can customize displayed decimal places in graphical report.
Report font: you can click select box of font to select required font type and click OK to accept.
- 270 -
- 271 -
Graphic Area-FORM Error Report F7
RationalDMIS FORM error window can create graph error report of measurements. A typical
FORM error report is shown below:
The created FORM error window is included in the graph error window and the FORM error
window is composed of two parts: FORM main error window and FORM error toolbar.
- 272 -
FORM Error Report-Toolbar
Graph error toolbar locates in the top of the graph error window, as shown below:
Set operation type:

Operation type settings can shift between panels of “Form error analysis of single feature” and
“Form error analysis of multi-feature”.
Set view type:
View type includes three types, click (Iridescent Cloud Dot) or (VectorRing) or
(ColorLine) to change.
Linkerrors:
Link all FORM points with line segment.
Show arrow: measuring point is shown in arrow
- 273 -
Show index:
Show serial number of FORM points.
Switch view:
Switch between rectangular / perspective projection.
Default view:
The icon is used to make the graph error recovered to default state.
- 274 -
Amplification slider:
Used to amplify the view of feature graph error. Click this icon, popup amplification slider:
Click silder, drag it to change the amplification times, or input the number of magnification times
required in the right amplification box [redline box].
Definition of upper / lower tolerance (warning band):

This icon is used to define upper and lower tolerance of feature. Click this icon, the system will
automatically popup “Set Upper / Lower Tol” dialog:
Set appropriate upper / lower tolerance in

the “Set Upper / Lower Tol” window, and
click “OK”. Then, the upper / lower
tolerance (warning band) of feature is set
and corresponding graph error picture will
update its tolerances accordingly.
Line width
Set showed line width of Form error window.
- 275 -
Selection range
This function can be realized only by cooperative use of ColourLine .
: Select external point
: Select internal point
: Add internal point
: Select all points
: Input range
: Reset selected point
: Fitting, make curve fitting
- 276 -
: Range of Form error, show the error curve of the whole curve
: Min / Max error, show deviation point of min / max error
Set number of output point:
- 277 -
Add a new dropdown list in the FORM error report window to select measuring point elevation
and number of output points; it enables to select output percentage, or select to output only min /
max error; if select to add new point, it will popup window for setting:
Method can be selected is: Interval / Range.
Rotation:
The angle value input in the view rotation shall ensure that its rotation complys to right-hand rule.
Background color:
This icon is used to change the background color of graph error. Click this iron, it will popup
“FormErr Color Setting” dialog:
In “FormErr Color Setting” dialog, the user can select favorite background color.
- 278 -
Background Color: set background color of Form window.
Text Color: set text display color.
Norm Feat Color: set color of nominal feature.
Act Feat Color: set color of actual feature.
Upper Tol Color: set upper tolerance color of feature.
Lower Tol Color: set lower tolerance color of feature.
Max Err Color: set maximum error display corror.
Min Err Color: set minimum error display color.
In Tol Color: set inside tolerance color.
Upper Warning Band Color: set upper warning band color.
Lower Warning Band Color: set lower warning band color.
Save:
Icon to save such graph report.
To output window: this icon can used to transfer the contents in the current graph error
window to output window in form of pictures for convenient print and output of the user.
- 279 -
- 280 -
FORM Error Report-Main Window
At present, graph error report can be created only through drag and drop and error report of drag
and drop feature can be created through dragging and dropping features from feature database to
graph error window. The case diagram is as follows:
Graph error tolerance parameter box:
- 281 -
Show feature label, upper and lower tolerance, maximum tolerance, minimum tolerance,
maximum tolerance point, minimum tolerance point, and magnification times and so on.
Schematic diagram of error graph:

After dragging and dropping features to graph error window, the system will automatically
construct error schematic diagram behind main window of graph error: including showing upper
and lower tolerance, each measure point and vector direction, maximum error point, minimum
error point and so on.
- 282 -
Double Database
RationalDMIS interface can show two database windows of them, as shown in the following
graph:
These two database windows show different databases at the same time. At the top of each
database window, there is a TAB switchover toolbar. Use the mouse to click TAB at the top,
switchover toolbar will pop up to make users open a certain database, as shown in the following
graph.
Using “data window shortcut” can set shortcut show of double database:
Feature database (Alt + F): contains all graphic features defined in the system and
constructed as well as measured features.
Coordinate database (Alt + C): mainly contains all established and stored coordinate
systems in current system.
Probe database (Alt + S): contains probe data, calibration gage of sensor, rotary table,
- 283 -
replacing support of probe and the other information.
Tolerance database (Alt + T): contains all kinds of tolerance data to create features.
Variable database (Alt + V): contains DMIS variable and DMIS macro and it is mainly
used in DMIS high-level language operation.
DMIS program database (Alt + P): it is used to show DMIS program of components and
add DMIS program generated inside RationalDMIS.
User-defined view database (Alt + W): shows user-defined observation view, graphic report
view and Form error report view
Measurement methods (Alt + M): shows all kinds of scan route information.
SPC statistics (Alt + X): database that can conduct SPC statistics
Vane (ALT+B): vane analysis module
RationalDMIS does not allow the same database to be shown in two database windows at the
same time.
- 284 -
Feature Database
Feature database includes all graphic features defined, constructed and measured in current
system.
Feature database is divided into two columns: nominal feature column and actual feature nominal.
Corresponding actual feature can be created only after nominal feature is generated in advance
but it is allowed to have nominal feature when corresponding actual feature does not exist. As
shown in the graph above, feature PT1 and feature PT5 only have nominal features and actual
feature column is empty.
- 285 -
Feature Database-Drag and Drop of Nominal Feature and
Actual Feature
In many cases such as conducting measurement, construction or calculation of tolerance, current

available graphic feature can be used as basis. Dragging and dropping features from feature
database to corresponding operation window will rapidly start calculation based on graphic
feature. At the time of dragging and dropping feature, drawing a clear distinction between
nominal feature and actual feature is very important because some calculation may have different
calculation results for different nominal features or actual features.
If one nominal feature needs to be dragged, it requires selecting this nominal feature label and
press left mouse button to drag it. At the time of dragging, the graph of nominal feature is yellow,
as shown in the following graph:
If one actual feature needs to be dragged, it requires selecting this actual feature label and press
left mouse button to drag it. At the time of dragging, the graph of actual feature is red, as shown in
the following graph:
- 286 -
Feature Database-Point Cloud
Node of point cloud is located at the bottom of the window in feature database, see the picture
below:
Numbers beside point cloud label refer to numbers of points

included in the point cloud.
Note: when load IGES/STEP, point data included in the file will be transferred into point cloud
data.
Point clod operation:

Point cloud operation is accomplished by its right click menu and right click menu of father node
of point cloud is shown as the following picture.
Enable operator:
If you select “enable operator”, menu item will show point cloud operator in graphic area. Point
cloud operator is a special window. All operation of point cloud is carried out by toolbar in the
window. Point cloud operator is a transparence window. The following picture explains the
transparent function of the window. Buttons with function of “drag-n-drop” will be expained in
detail in the last part.
Delete all: delete all selected point cloud

Reading data from data file: open a dialog box of a file which allows users to assign ASCII file
- 287 -
that includes point cloud data. Thereinto, file format is data with X, Y, Z, ASCII and the data is
separated by spacing, comma, TAB, colon and semicolon.
Reading from STL: support to read file in .stl format.
Export to IGES: open a dialog box of a file which allows users to create a file named IGES and
all point cloud data will be written into the file as point data of IGES. When in process of output
data, users can select MCS or PCS as reference of coordinate system.
Export to text: open a dialog box of a file which allows users to create a TXT text file and all
point cloud data will be written into the file in form of text and numerical value. When in process
of output data, users can select MCS or PCS as reference of coordinate system.
Right click menu of single point cloud node is shown in the following picture:
In which menu items of “delete”, “show
feature”, “ flash feature ” and “seek graphic
feature” are consistent with menu items of other
feature types.
Function of menu items of “export to IGES” and
“export to TXT” are consistent with the two
menu items of father node of point cloud.
Delete: delete the point cloud data

Hide feature: hide the point cloud
Show this feature and hide all the others: hide all the other features except for this feature
Flash the feature: the feature is selected in graphic area in flash
Seek graphic feature: zoom on the feature quickly in graphic area
Generate measurement: point cloud data can programme measurement path automatically and
generate measurement point by reference to CAD data.
Export of IGS file: open a dialog box of a file which allows users to create an IGES file name
and all point cloud data can be written into the file as point data of IGES. When in process of
output data, users can select MCS or PCS as reference of coordinate system
Export to text: open a dialog box of a file which allows users to create a TXT file and all point
cloud data can be written into the file as text and numerical value. When in process of output data,
users can select MCS or PCS as reference of coordinate system.
Re-sequence: re-sequence internal sequence of point cloud according to regular rules
Drag-and-drop button:
When point cloud collects any points included in basket, drag-and-drop button will be enabled.
Users can drag and drop the button to nodes of dot, line, face, circle, ball, cylinder, fixed
point-theorem and curvilinear on feature data window. The system tries to create a drag-n-drop
feature as best-fit.
Drag and drop a point cloud label is consistent with dragging and dropping “draggable button”.
Drag and drop on points and centroid of an average point or point cloud will be created.
Drag and drop on root node of features and use these point cloud data to create a new nominal,
- 288 -
actual feature as best-fit.
Drag and drop on one feature node and an actual feature will be created. As for circle and curve,
best-fit plane will use nominal circle and nominal curve plane.
- 289 -
Feature Database - Feature Selection
Selection of feature can be single selection and multiple selections. The feature can be single
selected by using mouth to click certain feature. Single select one feature before multiple
selections then press SHIFT key to go on contiguous selection or press CTRL to go on multiple
selection. Drag-and-drop selection is also applied to multiple features. Note: according to different
purpose windows, some purpose windows can accept multiple drag-and-drops of features while
some windows just accept single drag-and-drop feature.
Under conditions of “select nominal” or “select actual” of measurement point, you can use Ctrl+
mouse coordinate to select nominal or actual feature in graphic area as the following picture.
- 290 -
Feature Database -Rename Feature Label
The feature is identified by label name of the feature. One label name can only identify one feature.
In default, newly created label names are systematically controlled by label name of software
(please refer to relevant description of set of features in measuring operation area). Once a feature
is defined, label name the feature will be showed in feature database. The showed label name can
be renamed. If you want to rename a label name of a feature, you can just select the label name
and then click on it (it is not double-click but to click twice), edit window shows up to input label
name of the feature.
The feature can be renamed by inputting a new name. The label name of the new feature shall be a
legal DMIS label name, or it will pop up the error window and the original label name will not
change as well.
Note*: DMIS label name
The length of the label is 1-64 characters. Legal character has letter (A-Z, a-z), number (0-9),
broken line ‘-’, full stop ‘.’And underline ‘ ’.
- 291 -
Feature Database –Feature Property
What are shown in property page are geometrical parameters. Feature property can make users
inspect or check geometric definition of the feature quickly and modify its nominal feature value.
If you want to want to show feature property, you can just double click our mouse on label name
of certain feature. Property page is shown in the following picture:
The property page includes label name (Label) of the feature, geometrical parameter of the feature
in current coordinate system, current length unit and angular unit and some properties in feature
creating process. As the example shown in the above picture., it is showed that the property page
is created in rectangular coordinate system; the activated sensor is ROOTSN1, activate coordinate
system is CRD3 then; corresponding actual feature is created by measurement at the time of May
5, 2010; turn on probe compensation and semi-diameter of sensor tip is 1. Coordinate system type
can show a drop-down selection window, if users want to change nominal feature define from
CART (rectangular coordinate system) to POL (polar coordinate system), you can select POL in
the drop-down selection window. Change from CART to POL will not change geometrical
parameter of the feature but it will change CART to POL when users drag and drop the nominal to
DMIS program window and create DMIS definition statement. PT shows the measurement point
in creating actual feature. These measurement points are always show value which is compensated
by the sensor.
Property of nominal feature can be modified in property page. If you want to modify certain
- 292 -
property, you just need to double click the property item and property value area will display edit
window and updating button will be in available mode after inputting new property. Click
updating button and modify property value as newly input value.
Some features have simplified algorithm property. Property pages of these features will show
algorithm names that are used for feature calculation.
For example, in the above picture, feature CIR1 has 4 simplified algorithms. Current algorithm is
“least square method”. Meanwhile, feature simplified algorithm can be changed, you just need to
select different algorithm from drop-down selection window. After modification, updating button
will change into available mode. After click updating button, RationalDMIS will use the selected
new algorithm to recalculate feature. After calculation, geometrical parameter of the feature will
be updated and showed immediately in property page.
As for entry of measurement point in feature property, the measurement point can be dragged and
dropped to DMIS edit window to generate PTMEAS and measure DMIS statement. The entry of
measurement point can also be dragged and dropped to root node of point feature in feature
database. This kind of drag-n-drop will use parameter of measurement point of it to generate new
point feature.
If there are plenty of measurement points in feature, the interface may be frozen to refresh in
- 293 -
display of property page. Therefore, progress bar will be showed in status bar to indicate update
status of the lists.
Property page of CAD model is different from other property pages. When double click certain
CAD model item, property page will be showed in as the following picture:
Usage of property page of CAD model:

a.“Faces” and “wires” are two root nodes in default. During CAD loading process, all
information of faces and wires will be judged out automatically and be added into list of
property page.
b.There is a checkbox in front of each graphic item to indicate/hide property. Selected
denotes to display while not selected denotes hide. Indicate/hide property can be also
applied to “layer”.
c.Each graphic item can change colors. When select certain item, dialog box of color
selection will be displayed. Select certain color and click “application” button to change the
color. Changing color can be applied to “layer”.
d.Right click mouse on root node, the menu pops up. There is an item of “new layer” in
menu. Another layer will be created after selecting “new layer” and name of the layer is
“Layer 1” in default.
e.Rename layer: select certain item and click on it, the item will become editable condition.
Click the mouse outside edit box after inputting new name and it is renamed.
f.Each graphic item can be dragged and dropped to “layer” and each “layer” can be dragged
and dropped into another “layer” and “layer” can be dragged and dropped to root node.
g.Press Ctrl key and select corresponding item that will be highlighted in property page on
graphic feature of CAD model by mouse.
h.Right click mouse on “layer”, the menu pops up. There is an item of “delete” in the menu.
Select “delete”, “layer” will be deleted from property page. When delete certain “layer”,
the original item belongs to “layer” will be added to root node automatically.
- 294 -
Feature Database-Father Node Right Click Menu
Right click menu of data tree father node is different from that of lower entry of data tree father
node.
Right click menu will pop up if you right click father node. See the following figure:
The left figure shows right click menu of Nom feature circle and the right figure shows right click
menu of actual feature circle. Difference between these two menus lies in that if you want to
delete all features (including Nom feature and actual feature), you must choose “Delete All” in
right click menu of Nom feature circle. If you want to delete all actual features, you must choose
“Reset All Actuals” in right click menu of actual feature circle.
Hide All/Show All: “Hide all/Show all” is a switch menu item, which can show/hide all features
of the same type.
Delete All: if you select “Delete All”, all features of the same type will be deleted form the system
permanently.
Pickable: this menu item is a switch menu item, which is used to set whether a certain type of
feature may be selected by mouse. If you select this menu item, this type of feature can be selected
by mouse. On the contrary, it can not be selected by mouse. In graphics window, features which
can not be selected is shown semitransparent, which is convenient for users to look at or select
feature below the semitransparent feature.
Label Search: “Label Search” is used to search specific label of feature and set the label as the
selected label at present. If you select Label Search, search input window will appear at the top of
feature database.
- 295 -
Add Prefix: Prefix is used to group display features. “Add Prefix” can create and activate a new
prefix. All this type of feature produced from measurement window will have the prefix as prefix
of feature label. If you select “Add Prefix”, a prefix input window will appear as shown in the
following figure:
For example, if prefix of input point feature is “TOP_POINT”, all dot features created later will
have “TOP_POINT” as prefix of label as shown in the following figure:
If you group features you can manage them more

conveniently. Drag and drop feature group equal to
drag and drop all features in the whole feature group.
Sort Ascending/Sort Descending: this type of feature is ascending or descending sorted

according to feature label.
Sort All Ascending/Sort All Descending: all features are ascending or descending sorted
according to feature label.
- 296 -
Feature Database-Right Click Menu of Child Node
Delete: if you select “Delete”, the feature will be deleted from the system permanently.
Show Feature/Hide Feature: show/hide feature in graphic area.
Show this feature, Hide all others: show this feature and hide all other features.
Flash Feature: “Flash Feature” helps users to distinguish features more easily in graphic area.
When you select this menu item, the feature will flash for a while in graphic area.
Seek Graphical Feature: after you select “Seek Graphical Feature”, the assigned feature will be
placed in the middle of graphic area and will become center of graphic operation.
Set as zoom target: “Set as zoom target” will create a Nom measurement target, which will guide
user to move the machine to the measurement point in the graphics. If you want detailed
description, see description of “Auto target zoom” in “Functional pull-down menu” of toolbar of
graphic window.
Auto Measure: function of “Auto Measure” is different according to on-off status of the Learn
Mode. If Learn Mode is open, “Auto Measure” will create measurement DMIS statement in DMIS
program database automatically. If Learn Mode is closed, “Auto Measure” will start to measure
promptly.
Vecbld Measure: function of “Vecbld Measure” is different according to on-off status of the
Learn Mode. If Learn Mode is open, “Vecbld Measure” will create measurement DMIS statement
in DMIS program database automatically. If Learn Mode is closed, “Vecbld Measure” will start to
measure promptly.
Man Measure: function of “Man Measure” is different according to on-off status of the Learn
Mode. If Learn Mode is open, “Man Measure” will create measurement DMIS statement in DMIS
program database automatically. If Learn Mode is closed, “Man Measure” will start to measure
- 297 -
promptly.
Using feature of Man Measure “User Min Pts” in “Set” is the measurement point.
When the first feature is measured, feature index will skip to the next one automatically.
Check Vector: “Check Vector” is used to check vector direction of selected point feature. If
vector direction does not conform to measurement requirement, you can reverse vector of point
feature. After you select “Check Vector”, the window “Check Vector” will appear at the top of
feature data window as shown in the following figure.
The most right part of “Check Vector” shows the point feature name of the vector being checked.
4 buttons in the left are “Accept” button, “Reverse” button, “Preview” button and “cancel” button
successively. All that shows in “Check Vector” will flash vector direction of current point feature
in the graphic window at the same time. If users do not see the vector direction in the graphic
window clearly, they can click “Preview” button to see it again. If vector direction of point feature
needs to be adjusted, you can click “Reverse” button to reverse vector direction. If it does not need
adjustment, you can click “Accept” button and then continue to check the next one. After all
selected features are checked, “Check Vector” will be closed automatically. If users want to
half-stop check, they can click “Cancel” button.
Go to DMIS Definition/MEAS
When “Definition Statement/Measurement Statement” of the feature exists in the program

database, you can select “Go to Definition, Go to MEAS”, software will begin to search from
current line of DMIS program when definition or measurement statement of the feature is
searched, the statement may be used as current line of DMIS program.
Redraw Feature:
“Redraw Feature” only appears when there is no feature in the graphic.
In terms of the deleted graphic feature in “Hide Feature”, you can show it through Redraw Feature
in feature right click popup menu.
- 298 -
- 299 -
Feature Database-Plane Generation Measurement Point
Ref Feat: you can generate measurement point along assigned feature.
# of Pts: pts of generated measurement points

Offset Distance: relative Ref Feat offsets a distance and generates measurement point
Start Reference: set reference position of start
Start Angle: start position of control measurement point
End Angle: end position of control measurement point
# of Pts in U: set Pts in U
- 300 -
# of Pts in V: set Pts in V
U/V start, end clear dist: there is no point generated in the set distance scope of start or end
positioin of U, V.
Generated measurement point can avoid obstacle and the following figure is effect picture:
- 301 -
Feature Database-Circle Generation Measurement Point
When you select right click menu of circle feature “Generate Points”, relevant property page will
popup.
Default “Starting Point” position is calculated according

to position of current sensor.
Starting Point position can be edited.
When you select Starting Point node, you can see current
Starting Point position in graphic area (shown as a small
ball).
When you flash “Starting Point” position with mouse,
you can use “Edit/Create Measurement Point in

Geometrical Feature” to redefine Starting Point position
(as shown in the following figure) in CAD model.
- 302 -
Starting Point position can also have access to the
following options.
If you use + before “Center Axis”, you can unfold Center

Axis. Center Axis data can be calculated according to
Nom feature in CAD and can also be modified manually.
Radius: default data is calculated by Nom feature data in

CAD model and it can be edited.
Type: it offers the option to select Inner/Outer Circle.
Clockwise: it can select directivity of measurement
Total Angle: it can calculate and control distribution

scope of measurement point from Starting Point position.
You can edit and modify data manually.
Pts Count: measurement point amount generated in the

section.
When you select “Generate Pts”, operation panel will

skip to “Measurement Point Management Panel”
automatically.
- 303 -
Function of “Lead”: Lead is a distance value which generates a helical motion path uniformly
along negative direction of circle axis direction.
“Lead” value is a distance value of measurement point produced every two weeks.
- 304 -
Feature Database-Sphere Generation Measurement Point
There are 3 methods for sphere to generate measurement point: horizontal, vertival and
spiral
Take the horizontal method for measurement point generation as an example
Starting Point: set starting point of measurement point
Diameter: display diameter value of sphere
Type: display it is inner sphere or outer sphere
Clockwise: control whether generation rule for measurement point is clockwise or anticlockwise
H Angle: control the scope which generates measurement point
Points per path: number of measurement points per path
Num Of Path: control number of path
- 305 -
Generate Method: apart from the default method, you can set ‘3 Planes’ and ‘2 Planes’ methods.
In terms of ‘3 Planes’ method in the following figure, software generates measurement point only
in the position pressed by 3 planes. Users can drag the white arrow in the graphic to control
generation scope of measurement point.
When you select “2 Planes”:
- 306 -
Feature Database-Cylinder Generation Measurement Point
When you select cylinder right click menu “Generate Point”, property page which generates
measurement points automatically will popup automatically.
Default “Starting Point” position is calculated according to

position of current sensor.
Starting Point position can be edited

When you select Starting Point node, you can see current
Starting Point position in graphic area (shown as a small
ball).
When you flash “Starting Point” position with mouse, you
can use “Edit/Create Measurement Point in

Geometrical Feature” to redefine Starting Point position (as
shown in the following figure) in CAD model.
If you use + before “Center Axis”, you can unfold Center

Axis. Center Axis data can be calculated according to Nom
feature in CAD and can also be modified manually.
Radius: default data is calculated by Nom feature data in

CAD model and it can be edited.
Type: it offers the option to select Inner/Outer Cylinder.
Clockwise: it can select directivity of measurement
Total Angle: it can calculate and control distribution scope
of measurement point from Starting Point position. You can
- 307 -
edit and modify data manually.
Points per path: number of measurement point distributed
per layer of cylinder and it can be modified by right clicking
Num Of Path: number of measurement point layer
When you select “Horizontal Measurement Point”,

measurement point is distributed as shown in the following
figure:
When you select “Vertical Measurement Point”,

measurement point is distributed as shown in the following
figure:
When you select “Spiral Measurement Point”, measurement

point is distributed as shown in the following figure:
- 308 -
When you select “Generate Pts”, operation panel will skip to
“Measurement Point Management Panel” automatically.
- 309 -
Feature Database-Cone Generation Measurement Point
When you select cone right click menu “Generate Points”, property page which generates
It can generate horizontal, vertical and spiral measurement points of cone automatically.
Automatic measurement and distribution measurement point are very convenient.
Horizontal Measurement Point Vertical Measurement Point Spiral Measurement Point
- 310 -
Feature Database-Curve Generation Measurement Point
When you select curve right click menu “Generate Points”, property page which generates
Label: display label of curve.

SD: input distance value, clear distance of curve start
ED: input distance value, clear distance of curve end
Generate Method: there are 3 options, # of Pts, Tol and Max
Dist and Fixed Dist
Method: there are 2 methods: Equal Distance and Equal

Curvature. Equal Distance means that distance between
measurement points is equal. Equal Curvature means that
curvature between measurement points is equal.
Ref Feat: it is suitable for 3D curve. You can drag surface of

CAD or 3D curve to this window and determine direction of
measurement point by CAD or surface.
Offset: offset measurement point
Nom Point: it can make measurement point into Nom
feature.
Measurement Point: it can measure measurement point
with point feature method.
Measurement curve: it can measure curve feature directly
- 311 -
Feature Database-CAD Model Right Click Menu
There are several additional menu items in CAD model right click menu:
Manipulator (Enable Manipulator):
Enable: when RationalDMIS is in off-line state or is not connected to drive, a new item “Enable
Manual Operation” will be added to right click menu of CAD model node. If you select this menu
item, you can enable “Manual Operation”.
Disable: after you enable “Manual Operation” item of certain CAD model, right click menu of the
CAD model node will turn into the corresponding “Stop Manual Operation” menu. If you select
“Stop Manual Operation” menu item, you can disable Manual Operation.
Notes: after you enable “Manipulator”, the menu item appears in right click menu is “Stop
Manipulator” only.
In above figures, the left figure shows that “Manipulator” will surround a cubic frame in CAD
model under default condition.
- 312 -
The middle figure shows rotating condition of “Manipulator”. The purple axis is rotation axis. If
you want to rotate “Manipulator”, you only need to click the vertical yellow line frame in the
cubic frame with your mouse. After clicking, you keep pressing the mouse button and move the
mouse, and then CAD model will rotate along rotation axis.
The right figure shows moving condition of “Manipulator”. The purple cross axis shows the
movable direction. If you want to move “Manipulator”, you only need to click certain surface of
the cubic frame with your mouse. After clicking, you keep pressing the mouse button and move
the mouse, then you can move CAD model. Notes: if you press SHIFT when moving, you can
restrict moving direction of CAD model in one direction.
When CAD model is in “Manipulator” state, if you right click CAD model in graphic area window,
you will see “Stop Manipulator” right click menu instead of “Hide Feature” right click menu. See
the following figure:
Autostop Manipulator: “Manipulator” will stop in the following conditions.

Convert to on-line state
New a solution
Open solution file
Save solution file
Single step DMIS program
Continuous step DMIS program
View: set viewing angle of CAD graphic
- 313 -
Set Model alignment: “Set Model alignment” can move CAD model to current enabled
coordinate system.
Pickable: “Pickable” can set whether CAD model is pickable in graphic window area. When
CAD model is set un-pickable, CAD model will turn into semitransparent in graphic window area
and you can not grasp feature in CAD model. “Pickable” can set pickable state if each individual
CAD model.
Hidden Line Removal: is shown in wire frame (if you want to use this function, you must import
wire frame when importing CAD).
Measurement Point Grid: if you select “Measurement Point Grid”, setting window of
Measurement Point Grid will appear in the property page as shown in the following figure:
- 314 -
CAD model related to grid setting is shown in the following figure:
[Which plane] position is a
pull-down selection window, which
is used to select position and
direction of grid.
Line number/row number position
is used to input line number and
row number of grid.
Blue region is used to adjust size of
grid and make it cover the region
which will generate grid point.
<Preview> button can preview the

generated grid in graphic window
under current setting.
Red arrow indicates position of starting point. Yellow line indicates path and blue line indicates
each actual grid point in CAD model. “Reverse UV Direction” checkbox can change yellow line
path from up-to-down to left-to-right. “Reverse Starting Point and End Point” checkbox can
reverse red arrow back and forth on yellow line path.
<Create Nominal> Button will define all grid points and add them to feature database.
<Create Curve> Button will define projection line of each yellow line on CAD as curve feature
and generates a set of curve definition DMIS statement in DMIS program database. This function
is available only when Learn Mode in on. If Learn Mode is off, error window will appear.
<Measurement> Button will begin to measure each grid point through measuring Histogram
Panel of measurement window. In Histogram Panel, type of measurement feature is controlled by
measurement feature type set by current measurement window. But if measurement window is not
open or Histogram Panel is not enabled window at present, <Measurement> Button will do no
operation.
There are 2 purposes for grid point: create Nom measurement point and measure these points
through measuring Histogram Panel of measurement window. In Histogram Panel, type of
measurement feature is controlled by measurement feature type set by current measurement
window. But if measurement window is not open or Histogram Panel is not enabled window at
present, <Measurement> Button will do no operation.
- 315 -
Feature Database-Feature Drag and Drop Application
Drag and Drop operation in the Manual is based on drag and drop target. For example, when a
coordinate name can be dragged and dropped to CAD model name, CAD model name is drag and
drop target. Because it belongs to feature database, it will be described in feature database. Most
drag and drop is initiated in feature database. But if drag and drop target is not in feature database,
it will not be described. (Other relevant drag and drop application please refer to descriptions for
other database window)
Drag and Drop to father node of point feature:

Drag and Drop source Drag and Drop target: father node of point feature
Drag and drop source feature Drag and drop result point
Arc Center point of Arc
Circle Center point of Circle
Ellipse Center point of Ellipse
Slot Center point of Slot
Edge Center point of Edge
Cone Center point of Cone
Drag and Drop to father node of line feature:
Drag and Drop source Drag and Drop target: father node of line feature
Drag and drop source feature Drag and drop result line
Cylinder Cylinder axis
Cone Cone axis
Drag and Drop to father node of plane feature:
You can drag and drop 2 parallel lines (or line close to parallel) and produce a new plane.
Drag and Drop to father node of sphere feature:
Drag and Drop source Drag and Drop target: father node of sphere feature
Drag and drop source feature Drag and drop result line
A Circle Through dropping sphere of Circle
2 Circles Through dropping 2 spheres of Circle at the same time
Drag and Drop to father node of Cylinder feature:
Drag and Drop target: father node of Cylinder
Drag and Drop source
feature
Drag and drop source feature Drag and drop result cylinder
Through dropping 2 spheres of Cylinder at the same
2 Circles
time
Drag and Drop to father node of Cone feature:
Drag and Drop source Drag and Drop target: father node of Cone feature
Drag and drop source feature Drag and drop result cone
2 Circles Circle passes through 2 circle drop cone
- 316 -
Drag and Drop to father node of Slot feature:
You can drag and drop 2 co-plane circles with equal diameter and different center.
You can drag and drop 2 parallel lines with equal length to generate a new square slot.
Drag and Drop to father node of Surface feature:

Drag and Drop source Drag and Drop target: father node of point feature
Drag and drop source
Drag and drop result surface
feature
Cylinder Cylinder surface
Cone Cone surface
Plane Plane itself
Sphere Sphere surface
3 or more than 3 curves Pass through loft surface of all curves
Drag and Drop to father node of Curve feature:
You can convert drop Arc, Circle, Line, Ellipse and Slot into new curve features.
Drag and Drop to father node of Sphere feature:
You can generate a new sphere feature according to Gage dropped from probe database.
Drag and Drop to CAD model:
When you drag and drop a coordinate name from coordinate database to CAD model name,
this CAD model will move to the drop coordinate. This function can update CAD model
coordinate to the actual coordinate of machine.
Drag and Drop to Surface feature items:
When you drag and drop 3 or more than 3 curves to a surface feature item, you will create an
actual loft surface through dragged and dropped actual curve feature.
- 317 -
Coordinate Database
There is coordinate database in dual database (shortcut key is Alt+C).

There are 5 different data items in coordinate system database window.
Original state of coordinate system node is MCS (machine coordinate system).
DAT node (in terms of data use, please refer to DMIS, which is ISO standard: ISO 22093:2003).
MATDEF node;
Iteration state node;
CRD frame node;
- 318 -
Coordinate System Database-Coordinate System Node
Coordinate system node includes all coordinate systems established and saved in current system.
MCS is root node. When new part coordinate system is established, coordinate system label name
will be added to sub node.
MCS:
MCS is the only coordinate system, which presents machine coordinate system. It is a default
coordinate system in the system and it is the only coordinate system which can not be deleted.
MCS right click menu:
Activate: set MCS as current coordinate system.

Save to File: save the existing coordinate system to outer files.
Open CRD File: open saved outer file coordinate system.
Label Search: input coordinate system label in search for coordinate system. It will set coordinate
system as selected state.
Sort Ascending/Sort Descending: ascending/descending sort coordinate system labels.
- 319 -
Current activated Coordinate system:
Number of coordinate system established by system is not limited. But at any time there is only
one coordinate system being used. This coordinate system is the current activated coordinate
system. There is an icon in the left of activated coordinate system label for identification.
Activate a coordinate system:

Activate a coordinate system is to enable this coordinate system the working coordinate system at
present. There are 2 methods activating coordinate system. One is to use pop-up menu. When the
mouse points to a coordinate system label right click and a pop-up menu will appear.
You can set mouse-appointed coordinate system as the activated coordinate system through
“Activate” item in the menu.
In addition, you can activate a coordinate system through drag and drop. When users drag and
drop a coordinate system label to graphic area, this coordinate system will be activated
automatically.
Preview coordinate system:

After activating a coordinate system, you can refer to its definition. Generally, in terms of users, if
you want to judge whether a coordinate system is expected by users, you need to know position
and direction of coordinate system. When you select “Auto Show CRD” in “Auto Option” of
graphic window toolbar,
Mouse select any CRD label, CRD in the graphic window will flash preview.
- 320 -
You can refer to precise definition of CRD in its property page. If you double-click a CRD label,
its property page will show in another database.
Parameter is relative to MCS, not depending on current unit set.
Delete:
Unlike machine CRD MCS, part CER can be deleted from system. Users can select “Delete” item
in mouse right click menu to delete one or more CRD. One thing you need pay attention to is that
current activated CRD can not be deleted.
Go to DMIS reference:
CRD label right click “Go to DMIS reference” will find out the corresponding DMIS statement
from DMIS program during establishment of the CRD. It is convenient for users.
- 321 -
Coordinate System Database-Outer Coordinate System
Users can open and save outer CRD files through “Save to File” and “Open CRD File” menu
items in MCS node right click menu. See the following figure.
Save to File: it will open a file Dialog; users need to input a file name, <Save> button will save
current coordinate system to the file. “*.KSLNCRD” is the extension name of CRD data file.
The Learn Mode will open and save the following type of DMIS statement:
DID(DID_CRD2) = DEVICE/STOR, 'C:\Program Files (x86)\RationalDMIS\2.kslncrd'
OPEN/DID(DID_CRD2), PCS, PCS
SAVE/D(MCS), DID(DID_CRD2)
SAVE/D(ORG_PT7), DID(DID_CRD2)
SAVE/D(CADM_1), DID(DID_CRD2)
SAVE/D(CRD1), DID(DID_CRD2)
Open CRD Files: it will open a file Dialog, users can select a CRD file, <Open> button will set
file CRD in coordinate system.
- 322 -
After a CRD file is open successfully, added node of CRD data will show in CRD data window.
See the following figure:
a. Root node of this node is the whole file name and path of CRD file.
b. CRD file name does not include “MCS”.
c. If you select a label, position and direction of CRD will show in the graphics.
d. Outer CRD can not be activated by drag and drop. CRD in outer coordinate system data can
only be activated by pop-up menu.
e. Any CRD activated from outer CRD data will be copied from memory to coordinate system.
f. If you delete a CRD label, you will delete this data in data file at the same time. After deletion,
this CRD is not legal any more.
g. You can close outer CRD file through pop-up menu in root node.
h. Learn DMIS:
Open Learn and record the following statement:
DID(DID_CRD1) = DEVICE/STOR, 'C:\Program Files (x86)\RationalDMIS\010.kslncrd'
OPEN/DID(DID_CRD1), PCS
$$
CLOSE/DID(DID_CRD1), KEEP
- 323 -
Coordinate System Database-DAT Node
DAT is used for constraining freedom degree of tolerance evaluation. These data pass through
feature definition and they can be nominal or actual features.
The above figure shows 2 data. Data A is defined by actual feature PLN1 and data B is defined by
nominal feature PLN2. Black label represents nominal feature and green label represents actual
feature.
Define DAT data:

DAT definition is accomplished through drag and drop of feature label. It is a drag and drop from
a database window to another. So these 2 database windows must be shown at the same time. One
is feature database window and the other is coordinate system database window.
The above figure shows 2 database windows. Feature LN3 will be dragged from feature database
window to DAT node of coordinate system database window.
Drag and drop operation in DAT node will create a new data and system will distribute a label
automatically. This type of drag and drop operation can also be conducted in an existing data label.
This will redefine the data feature and update tab bar correspondingly and automatically.
Drag and drop operation of nominal and actual features:

Drag and drop of nominal feature begins from mouse appointment to nominal feature bar and drag
and drop of actual feature begins from mouse appointment to actual feature bar. Graphic colors are
different during drag and drop of nominal/actual features.
Graphics of actual feature drag and drop:
Graphics of nominal feature drag and drop:

Learn DMIS statement:
DATDEF/FA(PLN1), DAT(A)
DATDEF/F(PLN2), DAT(B)
DATDEF/FA(PLN3), DAT(C)
- 324 -
Coordinate System Database-Iteration Node
Iteration is used for determining CNC machine coordinate generally. Iteration offers a real-time
coordinate system iteration state display in coordinate system database window.
Iteration can be defined and executed through DMIS ITERAT statement. The following is a brief
description of iteration:
a.Iteration defines standard of detection. For example, “XAXIS, FA(PT7)” will only
detect feature PT7 along X axis of current coordinate system.
b.Iteration defines a “good coordinate system”. Users can define a standard for good
coordinate system. Such as the following example. If you input number “1.00000”, this
means that detection offset of all features in the statement must be below this standard.
c.It will result to auto iteration. There are 2 labels for iterative statement: iteration label
and failing label. If offset exceeds Max offset, statement execution will enter into
iteration label. If offset does not reach Max offset but Max iteration reaches, statement
execution will enter into failing label.
In terms of description of iteration details, please refer to DMIS standard (ISO 22093:2003).
The above figure shows iteration branch. Green branch shows that iteration statement will execute
label SS. Red branch shows failing iteration and execution will enter into EE label. When all
standard of coordinate system are met, execution will enter into next iteration statement.
Real-time information:
Down level of iteration node shows summary of current iteration. SS is iteration label and EE is
failing label. 10 is the allowed Max iteration and 1 is current iteration.
If you double click sub-level of iteration node, you can open iteration property page, which shows
current iteration details. See the following figure:
- 325 -
Coordinate System Database-CRD Frame Node
CRD frame node saves stacking axes of current CRD, coordinate plane and coordinate origin
information. The information may be used for construct operation and tolerance evaluation. The
information is always related to current activated CRD regardless of specific CRD.
Label names (XAXIS, YAXIS, ZAXIS, XYPLANE, YZPLANE, ZXPLANE, ORIGIN)
representing these information are retained label name of RationalDMIS and can not be changed.
Conduct tolerance evaluation as shown in the following figure:
- 326 -
Coordinate System Database-Drag and Drop Operation of
Coordinate System
Coordinate system database support inter-window drag and drop operation with feature database
and sensor database.
Shortcut origin:
Shortcut origin is a shortcut used to move current coordinate system. You can get new position
through feature drag and drop. The feature can be point, line, circle or sphere and shall be related
to nominal or actual features. The placed node must be machine coordinate system node. Drag and
drop operation of shortcut origin will activate newly established coordinate system automatically.
Shortcut plane:
Shortcut plane can change Z axis of coordinate system conveniently and rapidly, make it parallel
to Z axis of dragged feature, move its origin and make origin Z coordinate of dragged feature zero
in the new coordinate system. This feature must be plane and this placed node must be MCS
machine coordinate system label. Drag and drop operation of shortcut plane will activate newly
established coordinate system automatically.
CAD model coordinate system:
- 327 -
Drag and drop to DAT node:
You can drag and drop features to
DAT node from feature database to
Note: DAT node does not accept simultaneous drag and drop generate or modify a DAT. When
of several features. you drag and drop to DAT father
node, a DAT related to dragged
feature will appear. The dragged
feature will replace the original
DAT feature.
Drag and drop to iteration node:

You can drag and drop point
feature to iteration father node
from feature database to generate
an iteration. You can conduct
iteration evaluation through feature
drag and drop.
You can drag and drop point,
plane, circle, arc, sphere, cone and
ellipse features to iteration
sub-node from feature database.
You can conduct iteration
evaluation anew through feature
drag and drop.
Drag and drop to outer
coordinate system node:
You can drag and drop other inner
coordinate system other than MCS
coordinate system to certain outer
coordinate system father node.
inner coordinate system will be
added to this outer coordinate
system.
- 328 -
Sensor Database
Sensor database includes father node: calibration gage node, table node, sensor changer node and
sensor node.
Activation of table node and sensor changer node is controlled by relevant set of program setting
window.
There may be several sensor nodes in sensor database and each sensor represents a physical
sensor.
- 329 -
Sensor Database-Sensor Node
The above figure shows 6 sensor nodes and indicates that there are 6 physical sensors in current
system. There is an icon (such as PH10M_30X4 in the above figure) before activated sensor
at present. Sensor father node is called father sensor. If it is index sensor, father sensor is always
(0,0) angle. Sensors with same physical assemble but different rotation angle will be shown as
sub-sensor automatically under father sensor. There is no angle setting on fixed sensor, so there is
no sub-sensor.
Sensor setting is in RationalDMIS and is part of machine setting. Data in sensor database is
separated from solution file data. Sensor data will be loaded automatically during launch of
RationalDMIS.
Sensor type:
Sensor type is determined in sensor assembling (please refer to description of sensor operation
area).
Conventional sensor types supported by RationalDMIS are: autoindex sensor, man index sensor,
fixed sensor and hard sensor. Autoindex sensor such as Renishaw PH10M sensor is driven by
motor and its angle can be adjusted by computer digital controller. Man index sensor angle can
also be adjusted but it needs manual operation of users. Angle of fixed sensor can not be adjusted
but it is still trigger sensor. Angle of hard sensor can not be adjusted and it is not trigger sensor.
Generally additional trigger equipment is needed to cooperate with hard sensor. These trigger
equipment includes keyboard, programmable long-distance key board and pedal plate etc.
Sensor type can be distinguished through angle of father sensor in database (note: angle of father
sensor is always 0).
Nominal and actual sensor:

Nominal sensor is defined sensor and actual sensor is calibrated sensor. In sensor database, black
sensor label name represents nominal sensor and green sensor label name represents actual sensor.
Sensor calibration instruction:

Sensor label color can indicate sensor calibration
condition. Specific information is as follows:
Black: represents common sensor which is not
- 330 -
calibrated.
Green: represents calibrated sensor. Form tolerance
is not over tolerance and calibration is not out of
date.
Red: represents calibrated sensor with calibration
data overdue.
Blue: represents calibrated sensor with Form
tolerance over tolerance.
Sensor angle:
In terms of index sensor, its angle setting is listed on the right of sensor label name. There shall be
a sensor label name corresponding to every type of angle setting. One type of angle setting
representing 2 or more sensor label name is forbidden.
Activate sensor:
Activate sensor is to set sensor as the current working sensor. There are 2 methods to activate
sensor. One is to activate by right click menu.
Right click menu function is only applicable to current selected sensor. If you want to activate
sensor, you need to select “Activate” in right click menu. Another method is to drag and drop a
sensor label name to graphic window. This can set dropped sensor as the working sensor at
present.
Delete sensor:
Sensor deletion can only be accomplished by selecting “Delete” in right click menu. You shall pay
attention to that current activated sensor can not be deleted.
Sensor sort:
Global label sort: global sensors are sorted by label name.
Global calibration time sort: global sensors are sorted by calibration time.
Local Sort: it is divided into “Sort A angle”, “Sort B angle”, “Sort label”, “Sort calibration time”.
- 331 -
You can ascending sort
sensors under sensor
father node according to A
angle or B angle through
clicking “Sort A angle” or
“Sort B angle” in sensor
father node right click
menu. This is convenient
for users to search for
sensor angle information.
Sensor Preview:
Sensor database window may show a sensor preview small window for appearance of physical
sensor. When multi-sensors are used, for example sensor change system, sensor preview can
distinguish physical sensors through sensor label conveniently.
Sensor right click “preview”: display effect is as follows:
- 332 -
The above figure shows that sensor change system saves sensor preview with father sensor label
of PH10M_40X4.
Sensor preview window is at the bottom of sensor database window. When you select certain
father sensor node with your mouse, sensor preview window will appear automatically. When no
father sensor node is selected by mouse, sensor preview window will be hidden automatically.
Sensor preview window may be disabled by setting in program setting window.
Copy label:
It will copy sensor label to clipboard. It terms of uccserver sensor, it can set the correspondence
between server sensor and software sensor rapidly and conveniently.
Reset calibration data:

Make clear calibration result. There will be no actual result after reset and label will show black
which indicates uncalibrated state.
Calibration use:
You can conduct sensor calibration through selected calibration gage.
- 333 -
Sensor property page:
If you double click certain sensor label with your mouse, sensor property page will show in the
sideward database window. Typical sensor property page is as follows:
Label is sensor label. General, label length will exceed table length. If you want to see whole label,
you need to place your mouse on label table for a while, then a prompt window will appear to
show the whole label. Prompt window lists all parts of assembled sensor.
Calibration Date is time and date of sensor calibration. General, time and date length will also
exceed table length. If you want to see whole time and date, you need to place your mouse on
label table for a while, then a prompt window will appear to show the whole time and date. There
is no time and date for uncalibrated sensor. In terms of nominal sensor, the actual information item
is blank for there is no any calibration information.
Type shows that the test is to scan sensor/trigger sensor.
Offset from quill:
- 334 -
Dx, Dy, Dz are offset parameters during MCS
coordinate system measurement. Dx, Dy, Dz are
evaluated from origin of starting sensor.
Offset from rotation:

Drx, Dry, Drz are offsets evaluated from rotation
center of sensor.
Tip direction:
i, j, k are unit vectors of sensor Tip during
machine coordinate system measurement.
“Diameter” is size of sensor gem sphere.

Actual diameter is calibrated diameter and it may
not be equal to nominal diameter exactly.
“Form” is form tolerance or sphericity of

calibration sphere during sensor calibration. This
value is related to quality of sensor calibration
generally.
Calibration parameter:
It records measurement speed/measurement
accelerated speed during calibration. In order to
ensure consistency between measurement speed
and calibration speed, you can set to call speed
parameters in the record when activating the
sensor.
- 335 -
Sensor Database-Calibration Gage Node
Calibration gage node includes 2 nodes: sphere gage and ring gage.
Ring gage node: it shall be calibrated manually in general condition.
Sphere gage: it is defined in sensor operation area (please refer to description in sensor operation
area). There is no restraint on number of used and saved calibration gage in the system.
Sphere gage graphics:
If users want to enable sphere gage graphics, they can drag and drop sphere gage label to
graphic window and they can also right click “Show Gage” on certain sphere gage label.
Sphere gage graphic is used to distinguish calibration gage when there are several calibration
gages. If users want to hide sphere gage graphics, they can right click sphere gage node and
select “UnShow” in the pop-up right click menu.
Calibrate sensors in DMIS program:

If you right click “Calibrate sensors in DMIS program” on sphere gage, it will search for the
sensor recorded in current DMIS program and finish sensor calibration automatically.
Sensors outside of program will not be calibrated.
- 336 -
Sphere gage property page:
If you double click certain sphere gage label, calibration gage property page will appear. Property
page lists calibration gage parameters.
- 337 -
Sensor Database-Rotary Table Node
Rotary table is a selectable sensor tree node and it is available only when program setting window
is set to display rotary table. Rotary table can be deemed as an additional locating axis of machine.
In terms of detail description and operation related to rotary table, please refer to description in
machine operation area.
Rotary table graphics: under default condition, if you set to show rotary table, the graphic
window will appear.
There is an item “Show” in right click menu of rotary table node. It can show/hide rotary table in
graphic area, as shown in the following figure:
Rotary table property page: if you double click rotary table node, rotary table property page will
show in sideward database window.
Property page includes rotary table position and

horizontal direction information.
- 338 -
Rotary table calibration:
Rotary calibration needs to be finished in rotary table calibration position of rotary table definition
interface. You can drag and drop a measured plane to control axis and you can drag and drop a
circle to control center.
In the following figure, the left rotary table is calibrated and the right one is uncalibrated.
- 339 -
Sensor Database-Sensor Change Node
Sensor change node is a selectable sensor tree node and it is available only when program setting
window is set to change system by sensor.
Sensor change node name is Renishaw rack name. For example, the above figure shows MCR20
sensor change system. Changer system supported by RationalDMIS includes: MCR2, SCR200,
FCR25-L3, FCR25-L6, MRS. In the above figure, Port1-Port6 represents 6 physical ports of
MCR20.
Port distribution:
The column on the right of port label name shows port distribution condition. If there is a sensor
associated with port, the right column will show name of associated sensor. Otherwise the right
column will show null. The above figure shows that Port2 is associated with sensor PH10M_30X4
and Port4 is associated with PH10M_40X4. Even if the sensor associated with port is sub-sensor
under father sensor, the right column still shows father sensor name. RationalDMIS does not allow
one physical sensor associated with several ports. When users do in this way, RationalDMIS will
disable the previous association and then associate sensor with new port. Disable association
between port and sensor can be realized by right click menu.
- 340 -
If you want to associate sensor, you only need to drag and drop a sensor label to a
sensor change port.
The above figure shows how to associate port4 port with sensor PH10M_40X4.
There is a physical correspondence between sensor change system and ported sensor. This
correspondence also influence success of sensor association. This correspondence is summarized
as below:
MCS20 TP20
SCR200 TP200
FCR25_L3 SP25M
FCR25_L6 SP25M
If this relationship is not met, port association will not succeed.
Sensor change system graphics:
Under default condition, if you open sensor change function, graphic window will show sensor
change system.
The following information can be concluded from the above figure:

a.Port association
- 341 -
There are 2 ports being used at present. Appearance of sensor port part is the same as that of
physical sensor in the port.
b.Activated sensor and port at present
The red line circle place in the above figure is a normal sensor and it represents that the sensor
is in the port at present. White line circle place is a virtual image sensor, which represents that
sensor is being used in the machine at present.
If you want to hide sensor change system in graphic window, you need to select “Hide
ToolHolder” in right click menu of sensor change node. when you do not want to use changer, you
can right click “Disable ToolHolder”.
Drag and drop calibration of sensor change system

There are specific sensor change setting process for MCR20, SCR200 and FCR25. There is a
complete documentation related to it in Renishaw. This set will create a local coordinate system on
sensor change system and it is finished in sensor operation area (note: sensor change system
calibration window is displayed only when you open sensor change system in program setting
window). Users can create the same coordinate system according to Renishaw setting process and
drag and drop it to sensor change node. Whether sensor change system is calibrated can be seen
from the color displayed in the figure.
The left sensor change system is not calibrated and the right one is calibrated.
- 342 -
Sensor Database-Sensor Database Drag and Drop
Application
Drag and drop to calibration gage item:

This drag and drop is the short cut method to calibrate sensor or generate sensor calibration DMIS
program. When Learn Mode is open, DMIS program database will generate sensor calibration
DMIS statement. When Learn Mode is closed, sensor calibration will begin (CNC machine needs
real-time calibration). This dragged and dropped source is one or more sensor labels.
The above figure shows how several sensors are dragged and dropped to sphere gage S1. The right
column beside sphere gage S1 is number 5, which indicates that calibrated point is 5. If you click
the right column, point selection window will pop up. See the following figure:
Point selection window lists calibration points which are used frequently.
Drag and drop to sensor change port:

Please refer to partial description of “port distribution”.
Drag and drop to certain sensor node:

In terms of index sensor, you can drag and drop a sensor node to another one to copy sensor angle
setting of drag and drop source sensor.
The right figure in the above shows the condition of dragging and dropping sensor node
- 343 -
PH10M_30X4 to sensor node PH10M_40X4. Pay attention to that current PH10M_40X4 has no
any sub-sensor. After drag and drop of copy, PH10M_40X4 has the same sensor angle setting as
PH10M_30X4.
Use feature to select optimal measurement angle:

In terms of index sensor, you can drag and drop a feature to sensor root node to select a sensor
most aligned to feature vector. If there is no such sensor, a new sensor will be established and
activated.
- 344 -
Variable Database
Variable database is used for DMIS high-level language operation (DMIS conforms to ISO 22093
standard). Variable database includes DMIS variable, DMIS macro and outer resources.
DMIS variable:
RationalDMIS supports 4 types of variables: integer type, real number type, character string
type and vector type. Variable type of DMIS high-level language is more than these 4 types.
RationalDMIS integrates some types of variable. For example, double precision type and real
number type are individual variable type in DMIS while they are all real number types in
RationalDMIS. Users can use real number type variable of variable database in the place for
double precision type and real number type in DMIS program.
Variable database includes 2 columns: variable name column and variable value column. In terms
of 4 types of variable, RationalDMIS offers 3 default variables respectively with prefix name of
KNPT.
- 345 -
Variable Database-Create New Variable
If you want to create a new variable in variable database (note: variable can also be defined in
DMIS program directly), you can realize it through right click menu of variable father node.
If you select “New” in right click menu, variable declare dialog will pop up. See the following
figure:
There are 2 input windows in variable declare dialog. They are used for inputting variable name
and variable starting value. Item of variable name must be input by users. Variable name must be
a legal DMIS label name.
DMIS label name:

Label length is 1-64 characters. Legal characters are letters (A-Z, a-z), numbers (0-9), broken line
“-”, full stop “.” and underline “_”.
Users can input proper variable starting value according to variable type and they can also select
proper starting value through pull-down selection window. Pull-down selection window lists
system value and the value is different according to variable type. The above figure shows
pull-down selection window of integer type variable. PRCOMP represents compensation state of
current sensor.
A. Integer type
- 346 -
GOTO, XAXIS represent return to x position under current
coordinate system.
GOTO, YAXIS represent return to y position under current
coordinate system.
GOTO, ZAXIS represent return to z position under current
coordinate system.
ACLRAT, MESACL represent return to current measurement
acceleration setting.
ACLRAT, POSACL represent return to current position
acceleration setting.
FEDRAT, MESVEL, FEED represent return to current
measurement speed setting.
FEDRAT, POSVEL, FEED represent return to current position
speed setting.
FEARAT, SCNVEL, FEEED represent return to scanning
speed setting.
SNSET, APPRCH represent return to current approach
distance.
SNSET, RETRCT represent return to current retract distance.
SNSET, SEARCH represent return to current search distance.
SNSET, CLRSRF, DIST represent return to current safety
plane distance.
SNSET, DEPTH, DIST represent return to current depth
distance.
B. Character type
WKPLANE represents return to current working plane setting in character type.

Possible return values are: 'XYPLAN'/'YZPLAN'/'ZXPLAN'
DATSET represents return to coordinate system label.
MODE represents return to current DME execution mode.
Possible return values are: 'AUTO,PROG,MAN'
'AUTO,MAN'
'PROG,MAN'
'MAN'
- 347 -
SNSLCT represents return to label of current activated sensor.
SNSET, CLRSRF represent return to label of current safety plane feature in character type. If
there is no interval plane feature, or CLRSRF is closed, it will return to null character.
UNITS, DIST represent return to current length unit.

Possible return values are: 'MM'/ 'CM'/ 'M'/INCH'/ 'FEET'
UNITS, ANGL represent return to current angle unit.
Possible return values are: 'ANGDEC'/ 'ANGRAD'/'ANGDMS'
C. Vector type
GOTO, POS represent return to [x,y,z] position under current coordinate system.
SNSMNT, XVEC represent return to X axis direction of sensor coordinate system under MCS in
vector type.
SNSMNT, ZVEC represent return to Z axis direction of sensor coordinate system under MCS in
vector type.
SNSMNT, MNTLEN represent return to sensor placement offset under MCS in vector type.
- 348 -
Variable Database-Delete Variable
You can delete all variables of the selected variable type through selecting “Delete all” in right
click menu of variable father node. You can also select “Delete” in right click menu of variable
sub-item to delete selected variables.
- 349 -
Variable Database-Edit Existing Variables
Defined variables in variable database can be modified through variable modification function
established in RationalDMIS internally. If you want to modify a variable, you need to double click
variable name and variable edit window will show in the top of database window. See the
following figure:
Variable edit window is an expression window. You can input mathematical expression in
variable edit window. See the following figure:
Variable edit window also support DMIS variable operator. If you right click in variable edit
window, variable operator menu will pop up. See the following figure:
Each sub-menu lists corresponding DMIS variable operator.
In terms of detail description of each operator, please refer to DMIS manual.
- 350 -
Variable Database-Variable Drag and Drop Application
Drag and drop of integer type father node:
If you drag and drop feature from feature database to integer father node, a new integer variable
will be generated. Variable value is the measurement points included by feature. If there is no
actual feature in the feature or actual feature is not measured, drag and drop will not generate any
variable.
Drag and drop of real number type father node:

2 data types can be used as drag and drop source to drag and drop to real number type father node:
feature label name and tolerance label name.
When you drag and drop feature from feature database to real number type father node, database
window top will show an option window for users to select which feature parameter can be used
to create variables. In most conditions, option window contains several options. In general, feature
position and feature size under current coordinate system can be used to create variables. When
nominal feature is dragged and dropped, nominal parameter will be used.
You can drag and drop actual feature to real number type father node:
When you drag and drop actual feature, actual parameter will be used. Typical option window is
shown as below:
You can drag and drop tolerance in tolerance database to real number type father node:
- 351 -
When you drag and drop tolerance in tolerance database to real number type father node, database
window top will show option window for users to select which feature parameter can be used to
create variables. Dragged and dropped tolerance must go through at least one tolerance evaluation.
Nominal tolerance can not be used to create real number type variables.
Drag and drop of real number type sub-item:
When you drag and drop sensor from sensor database to certain real number type sub-item,
diameter with a variable value of sensor will be modified.
Drag and drop of vector type father node:
When you drag and drop feature from feature database to vector type father node, a new vector
type variable will be created along the direction vector of dragged and dropped feature on current
coordinate system.
- 352 -
Variable Database-DMIS Macro
Variable database includes a DMIS macro father node. DMIS macro father node includes
internally created DMIS macro and outer DMIS macro.
Predefined macro is the internally created macro in RationalDMIS and they can only be called
through DMIS CALL statement.
User macro is used to load macro program created by users and it can finish special function of
custom.
There is a drag and drop icon before MINMAX macro, which means that it can be used in drag
and drop evaluation. This will be described later. Extern macro is null under default condition and
users can set certain directory containing DMIS macro file to added extern DMIS macro.
RationalDMIS will parser these files and list all available macro names.
Macro description:
A CLEAR_SENSOR_MOUNT
- 353 -
This macro is called during auto sensor calibration.
This macro uses input parameter to define a safety plane (see white line in the above figure). After
a sensor calibration is finished and before next sensor calibration begins, you can call this macro
to move to safety plane, make it not collide with calibration sphere during sensor angle changing.
- 354 -
RationalDMIS will create safety plane automatically according to current sensor components
information and position of calibration sphere.
B CLEAR PLANE
This macro is used in DMIS program mode. Safety plane is used to avoid sensor collision. Safety
plane setting only influence DMIS auto execution mode. This macro uses auto macro interval
plane logic to create DMIS programming mode safety plane.
The following figure shows that after measuring measurement point, yellow sensor moves from
position A to position B to prepare for measuring another measurement point. Interval plane
(yellow plane) is used. Sensor will move to another measurement place through upward side of
interval plane, which will avoid collision with CAD model (imaginary line represents traverse
path which avoids collision).
- 355 -
C MOVE_TO_LINE
If you click the item beside MOVE_TO_LINE macro, Open/Close pull-down choice box will
appear. This pull-down choice box can enable or disable MOVE_TO_LINE macro and its default
value is closed.
D ABOVE_PLANE
- 356 -
If you click the item beside ABOVE_PLANE macro, Open/Close pull-down choice box will
appear. This pull-down choice box can enable or disable ABOVE_PLANE macro and its default
value is closed.
E GET_PTMEAS_AT
If you want to measure an actual feature, individual measurement point can be gained from or
saved to real number type variables. Macro GET_PTMEAS_AT can be used to get any
measurement point easily.
- 357 -
Pay attention to that the last input parameter must be integer type. This macro may not get any
measurement point. If required measurement index value exceed scope of all measurement points,
the last integer BERROR shall be set as 1 to show fail to call macro. If it is set as 0, it represents
success. CALL statement must check BERROR value to see whether call is successful or not. It is
also important for CALL statement to use defined integer type variable as input parameter.
For example:
DECL/REAL, XX,YY,ZZ,II,JJ,KK
DECL/INTGR, EE
CALL/M(EASI_GET_PTMEAS_AT), (FPT1),10,XX,YY,ZZ,II,JJ,KK,EE
If/( EE .EQ. 1)
$$ failed
ENDIF
F GETX_INDEX
DMIS allow getting feature parameter from integer type variables or save feature parameter to
integer type variables. Feature parameter gain is associated with feature position. For example, in
terms of a X value which get a circle with an index value of 4, the plane index value is 3. This
allow users to get index value of all feature at X position.
- 358 -
After this macro is called, XINDEX will return to X index position. In this way, users can use
gained variables to get X value of all features.
For example:
DECL/INTGR, II
CALL/M(EASI_GETX_INDEX), (FCI), II
After calling this macro, you shall get X, Y, Z value of feature FCI as shown in the following
statement:
- 359 -
X = OBTAIN/F(FCI), II
Y = OBTAIN/F(FCI), II+1
Z = OBTAIN/F(FCI), II+2
G MEAS_STAT
MEAS_STAT macro is used to check feature measurement environment. When feature uses
specific sensor for measuring at specific coordinate system for the first time, corresponding
feature measurement DMIS statement block will be generated. As DMIS is an explanatory
language, users may run the generated DMIS statement block with different coordinate system and
sensor compared with previous measurement. This may result to sensor collision or no
measurement result. This macro can ensure measurement DMIS statement block run in the same
measurement environment. The measurement environment includes length unit, angle unit, sensor
and coordinate system.
For example:
CALL/M(EASI_MEAS_STAT), 0,(ROOTSN1),(MCS),(MM),(ANGDEC)
MEAS/POINT, F(TOP_POINT3), 1
- 360 -
PTMEAS/CART, 356.370, 200.00, 187.06, 0.0, -1.0, 0.0
ENDMES
CALL/M(EASI_MEAS_STAT), 1,(DUMMY),(DUMMY),(DUMMY),(DUMMY)
The first input parameter represents that MEAS_STAT macro is used. 0 represents return to the
measurement environment at that time. 1 represents return to current measurement environment.
If you click the item beside MEAS_SAT macro, Open/Close pull-down choice box will appear.
This pull-down choice box can enable or disable MEAS_SAT macro. See the following figure:
H ROTATE_CRD_ABOUT_FEAT
I 6PT_TO_CRD
You can use 6 points to create coordinate system. For example, the first 3 points control Z
direction, 4th and 5th points control X axis direction and Y origin and 6th point controls X origin.
- 361 -
J 2PT_TO_LINE
Its function is to use 2 actual features to create a nominal line.
- 362 -
K EDGEPT_OFFSET
It is used to offset measurement actual value of edge point. There are 2 directions for offset.
L DEFINE_INDEXED_POINT
It will get XYZIJK of feature and use it to define new feature.
- 363 -
M GET_ACTSIZE
It is used to gain actual size parameter of feature such as actual diameter of circle.
- 364 -
N MINMAX_DIAM \ MINMAX_RAD \ MINMAX_XCOORD \ MINMAX_YCOORD \
MINMAX_ZCOORD
Functions of the above macros are to evaluate and get MaxMin diameter, radius, X coordinate, Y
coordinate and Z coordinate. It will be called automatically when feature is dragged and dropped
to the following 2 items.
MINMAX_PROFP supports drag and drop of points and edge points.
If you open Learn Mode, drag and drop feature to item, Learn DMIS program will be generated
automatically. If Learn Mode is open, output panel will output evaluation results directly.
- 365 -
Example of output results is as follows:
O GET_T_V
MACRO/'TOLLABEL', VAL_ACT, VAL_NOM, VAL_LTOL, VAL_UTOL, VAL_DEV,
VAL_TND
VAL_ACT Actual tolerance/feature information
VAL_NOM Nominal tolerance/feature information
VAL_DEV Tolerance
VAL_LTOL Upper tolerance
VAL_UTOL Lower tolerance
VAL_TND Out of tolerance
If you double clock this macro, character string definition window will pop up.
- 366 -
This macro supports direct drag and drop of tolerance label. For example, you can drag and drop
cone angle tolerance to realize the following DMIS statement:
CALL/M(EASI_GET_T_V),(DCONEANG), VAL_ACT, VAL_NOM, VAL_LTOL, VAL_UTOL, VAL_DEV,
VAL_TND
WRITE/DID(TXT_OUTPUT)
This function is developed for those clients who need to output tolerance as ACSII files.
P Extern macro:
Extern macro is the macro extended by users. RationalDMIS DMIS program can use
CALL/EXTERN to call extern macro. Extern macro must be introduced before call. Once extern
macro is introduced, it will appear below extern macro father node.
Add extern macro:

If you right click extern macro father node, right click menu will pop up. See the following figure:
If you select “Add macro path”, directory selection dialog box will pop up.
After you select a directory containing DMIS macro, RationalDMIS will search for index
available DMIS macro in the directory and list results. See the following figure:
- 367 -
Create a new macro node and all available macro files names are below it.
RationalDMIS judges whether macro file is available by these rules:
1. Macro file name must be the same with macro name. Macro file extension must be “.DMI”.
2. Macro file must contain only one legal macro without any other useless information.
Remove extern macro:

If you want to remove an extern macro, you can finish it through extern macro right click menu.
If you select “Reset Extern Macro”, you will delete all added extern macro.
- 368 -
Variable Database-External Resources
External resources include picture resource and audio resource.

If you right click “New” on picture resource or audio resource, “Select Resource File” window
will pop up.
You can drag and drop picture resource to output panel and insert an external picture output.
- 369 -
Program Database
This part describes operation of DMIS database rather than DMIS grammar description. DMIS
conforms to ISO 22093 standard. You can purchase file description of DMIS standard from
standard organization. RationalDMIS uses DMIS 5.0 at present.
DMIS program database includes 3 functional areas: DMIS execution toolbar, DMIS function
toolbar and DMIS program window. You can use CTRL+T to shift Chinese and English display.
- 370 -
Program Database-DMIS Execution Toolbar
Open DMIS File:

DMIS file is text file. If you click this icon, you can browse and import a DMIS file to database.
Under default condition, DMIS file extension is *.dmi. Imported DMIS file will show in DMIS
program window. Newly imported DMIS file will override the previous one.
Insert open:
Insert an external DMIS file in current program. This will not override the existing program.
Save DMIS file:

DMIS program in DMIS program window can be saved as DMIS file. DMIS program in DMIS
program window is part of RationalDMIS solution file and it will be opened or saved
automatically with open or save of solution file. “Save DMIS File” can separate DMIS file and
solution file and import DMIS file individually. Note: when there is no DMIS statement in DMIS
program window, save dialog box will not pop up.
- 371 -
Single step execution: if you click this icon, system will execute current DMIS statement and
current DMIS statement line will point to next DMIS statement.
Continuous execution: if you click this icon, system will execute DMIS statement
continuously from current DMIS statement until DMIS program is finished or ENDFIL keyword
of DMIS is met or there is error in DMIS program.
Stop execution: if you click this icon, system will stop execution of DMIS program
immediately.
Set breakpoint: if you click this icon, system will set breakpoint on current DMIS statement
line. Breakpoint will stop DMIS program execution. There is on restraint on breakpoint number in
RationalDMIS. Set breakpoint icon is a switch icon. When DMIS statement line does not set
breakpoint, the icon will set breakpoint. When DMIS statement line sets breakpoint, the icon will
delete the breakpoint.
The following figure is the display after setting breakpoint. There is a red icon before statement.
Delete all breakpoints: if you click this icon, system will delete all breakpoints.
To DMIS Editor:
DMIS program window is not a DMIS editor. It can only show DMIS program or add DMIS
program generated in internal RationalDMIS. DMIS program edit must be finished through DMIS
editor internally created in RationalDMIS. If you click this icon, system will send DMIS program
window content to DMIS editor for editing (please refer to relevant description of DMIS editor).
Note: if you double left click your mouse in DMIS program window, you can also send all
window content to DMIS editor for editing.
- 372 -
Bookmark function pull-down menu: if you click this icon, pull-down menu will pop up. See
the following figure:
If users are interested, they can use bookmark, which is convenient for later search. “Toggle
Bookmark” can set a bookmark in current program line. If there is a bookmark in current
program line, it will delete the bookmark. “Pre Bookmark” will search for bookmark from current
program line to the upside and move it to the program line where bookmark exists. “Next
Bookmark” will search for bookmark from current program line to the downward and move it to
the program line where bookmark exists. “Clear All Bookmarks” will delete all bookmarks.
- 373 -
Program Database-DMIS Function Toolbar
Toolbar drawing pin: there are 2 states for toolbar drawing pin: nail upward and nail
down . In nail upward state, toolbar will disappear and reappear along mouse moving. In nail
down state, toolbar is always visible. If you click drawing pin icon, you can switch between nail
upward and nail down.
DMIS program header: DMIS program header icon will activate DMIS program header
definition window. DMIS program header is a group of DMIS state statement. In DMIS program
header definition window, you can set whether to generate DMIS program header and which
content is included in DMIS program header.
- 374 -
The left column of window is
DMIS statement type and right
column is pull-down selection
window. Options in pull-down
selection window define DMIS
statement option in the left
column during DMIS program
header is created.
DMIS property page icon: DMIS property page icon is used to open the property window
showing description of DMIS statement in DMIS program window. DMIS statement description
property window will show in another database window outside DMIS program window. This
showing type is similar to other property page windows. The following figure shows DMIS
statement description property window.
DMIS statement description property window will parser DMIS statement in DMIS program
window item by item and list brief description of all statements. In terms of neighboring DMIS
statement description of the same type, property window will list them in the same group and
make the first DMIS description becomes father node of other DMIS descriptions. Similarly, in
terms of high-level DMIS language statement such as DO loop and IF judgment statement,
property window will also list other DMIS statement of these high-level language statement below
high-level language statement. This is convenient for users to clean flowage structure of all DMIS
program when looking DMIS description.
In DMIS statement description property window, in order to locate DMIS statement corresponding
to certain description quickly, users can click the DMIS description, and then DMIS program
window will set current DMIS statement line to describe corresponding DMIS statement. Users
can look the corresponding DMIS statement immediately. On the contrary, if users change current
DMIS statement line in DMIS program window and DMIS statement description property window
- 375 -
is open, system will select the DMIS description corresponding to current DMIS statement line.
Edit current line:

Users need to select current line to be edited and then click this icon.
Not all statements can be edited.

Support edit keywords: MEAS, PTMEAS, GOTO, RMEAS, $$, TEXT/OUTFIL,
TEXT/OPER;
MEAS edit window: it can set 2 interval planes. The first interval plane controls
pre-measurement and the second control after-measurement.
- 376 -
Statement will be generated when you click “Apply”.
MEAS/POINT,F(PT1),1,CLRSRF,F(PLN1),10.000000,CLRSRF,10.000000
PTMEAS edit window: in addition to editing XYZIJK of PTMEAS, you can also edit
approach/retract parameter of this measurement point.
When you use PH20 or REVO, you can also edit 5 axes measurement statement. There are 2
control methods for 5 axes angles: HEADCS and PCS. HEADCS signifies A, B angle and PCS
angle is related to current coordinate system. The following is description of DMIS 5.2 PCS angle.
PCS signifies that the axis system is rotated relative to the current part coordinate system:
the axis system is rotated around Z by the first angle, then around the newly created Y axis,
and finally around the newly created Z (which is the ZYZ Euler angle convention).
The resultant head orientation will be such that the active probe tip shaft (or the main
direction of an optical sensor) is aligned with the Z axis pointing towards the sensor. The
alignment of the tool with respect to the X and Y axes will be tool dependent, e.g. to align a
laser plane
- 377 -
Goto edit window: when current sensor is PH20 or REVO, you can select to set 5 axes goto:
PTMEAS/CART,-251.239838,-312.942871,-564.999989,-0.000000,0.000000,1.000000
When you select “Goto/Pcs[HEADCS]”, 2 axes rotation angle instruction

HEADCS,30.000000,30.000000,HEADTOUCH will be generated.
RMEAS edit window:
- 378 -
Support the following statement edit:
RMEAS/CIRCLE, F(KR1), 3, VECBLD, 4.000, 3, CLRSRF, 15.000000, CLRSRF, 16.000000
RMEAS/CPARLN, F(SLT1), 6, VECBLD, 3.000, 3, CLRSRF, 15.000000, CLRSRF, 16.000000
RMEAS/EDGEPT, F(EP1), 1, VECBLD, 3.000, 3, 3.300, CLRSRF, 15.000000, CLRSRF,
16.000000
RMEAS/POINT, F(PT4), 1, VECBLD, 4.000, 3, CLRSRF, 15.000000, CLRSRF, 16.000000
Gray items can not be edited and is controlled by offset set.
Other statement edit:

$$
TEXT/OUTFIL
TEXT/OPER
The following keywords do not support “Edit current line” function, as these statements will
change internal state of grammar actuator.
CALL; MACRO; ENDMAC; DO; ENDDO; SELECT; CASE; ENDCAS; DFTCAS; IF; ELSE;
ENDIF; ASSIGN
- 379 -
Pre-programmed DMIS statement icon group:
There is a group of icons used for pre-programming DMIS statements in functional toolbar.
Mode commands:
There are 3 modes to select in pull-down menu. Self-learning will record corresponding statement
after switch.
Endfil:
This icon will add DMIS statement “ENDFIL” to DMIS program window directly.
Work Plan:
Home:
DMESW/COMAND,'HOME' send home command and machine will move to corresponding

home
FROM/CART, 76.294032,58.542470,-175.166522 set soft reset
GOHOME execute soft reset
- 380 -
Start:
This icon will add DMIS “GOTARG” statement to DMIS program window directly.
FLY:
FLY/1.0 Airplane mode is open

FLY/OFF Airplane mode is closed
PSTHRU Control：
PSTHRU/CONTIN
PSTHRU/PAUSE
PSTHRU/START
PSTHRU/STOP
Compensation：
GECOMP/ON
GECOMP/OFF
TECOMP/ON
TECOMP/OFF
PRCOMP/ON
PRCOMP/OFF
- 381 -
Insert comment line:
$$
TEXT/OUTFIL, 'text'
TEXT/OPER, 'text'
Clear DMIS statement:
Clear DMIS icon can delete all content in current DMIS program window. Before deletion, a
dialog box will pop up for users to confirm.
Drag and Drop icon group: drag and drop icon group is next to pre-programmed DMIS
statement icon group. There are 4 icons.
Drop definition:
This icon supports drag and drop of feature label from feature database. When you drag and drop a
nominal feature to the icon, drag feature defined DMIS statement will be generated in DMIS
program window. Basis of definition DMIS statement is current length and angle unit.
Drop output:
This icon supports drag and drop of feature label from feature database. When you drag and drop a
nominal feature to the icon, DMIS statement which outputs drag nominal feature will be generated
in DMIS program window. When you drag and drop an actual feature to the icon, DMIS statement
which outputs drag actual feature will be generated in DMIS program window.
Drop output+: if current executed statement in DMIS window is “OUTPUT/FA”, when you
drag and drop a tolerance label to drop output + icon, DMIS TA (LABEL) statement will be added
to current output statement.
For example, DMIS code is as follows:
OUTPUT/FA(CIR1), TA(TCX), TA(TCY), TA(TCZ), TA(TDIAM)
After code execution, data outputted to screen is as follows:
- 382 -
Drop measurement statement block: This icon supports drag and drop of feature label from
feature database. When you drag and drop a nominal feature to the icon, RationalDMIS will
generate measurement point DMIS statement block by measurement point generation rule
specified in measurement setting panel of measurement operation area. For example, when you
drag and drop a nominal circle feature to the icon, measurement points will be generated
according to current setting.
This rule is applicable for all conditions where measurement points are generated. In terms of line
type feature such as circle, straight line, ellipse and key slot, using length is 10mm. In terms of
surface type feature such as cylinder, cone, sphere and surface, using area is 100mm2.
Append at the end always:

Under default condition, the icon is open. When the icon is open, DMIS statement generated in
Learn Mode will be added to the end of DMIS program window rather than position of current
program line. When the icon is closed, DMIS statement generated will be inserted to the position
of current program line.
DMIS dependence check icon
There are 2 states for DMIS dependence check icon: close and open. If the icon is pressed down,
when DMIS program is running, it will check whether DMIS statement dependence is complete
automatically. If the icon is not pressed down, it will not check DMIS dependence automatically.
DMIS mirror icon: DMIS mirror icon is used to show DMIS mirror setting window. When
you select DMIS mirror icon, DMIS mirror setting window will appears at the bottom of DMIS
program window.
If you select “Enable Mirror” check box, mirror will come into effect. The following input box
can accept drag and drop of plane feature or coordinate system. When you drag and drop plane
feature, mirror will take dragged plane as mirror plane. When you drag and drop coordinate
system, you can select the specific coordinate plane in the coordinate system as mirror plane.
- 383 -
Program Database-DMIS Program Window
DMIS program window includes the whole DMIS program associated with certain solution file.
DMIS language is an explanatory language and it can parse and execute statement in real-time.
There is no description of DMIS grammar in RationalDMIS manual. If you want to learn DMIS
language, please refer to DMIS standard file (ISO22093).
Current program line
Breakpoint
Bookmark
In terms of “Breakpoint” and “Bookmark”, please refer to description of DMIS execution toolbar.
Current program line indicates DMIS statement executed at present. During DMIS program
execution process, current program line will move to next DMIS statement. Current program line
can not be changed during DMIS execution process. Only when DMIS program is not executed,
you can click the left box of program window and set current program line as the DMIS statement
clicked by mouse.
- 384 -
The above figure shows 3 kinds of DMIS program window setting:
The left figure shows a splitter DMIS window. This window will appear when dual arm
measurement executes DMIS program. The bottom window of splitter window is DMIS program
window of master and the upper window is DMIS program window of slave.
The middle figure also shows a splitter DMIS window. The bottom splitter window will appear
when DMIS high-level language is executed. The window at the upper of splitter window is DMIS
program main window. It will appear when bottom window executes DMIS high-level languages
such as macro and loop.
The right figure shows DMIS program window under default condition.
Run a MEAS measurement block in the program individually.
Right click measurement block and ‘MeasBlock’ will pop up. If you click it, only the selected
measurement block will run.
In DMIS program window, if you double left click your mouse, the whole DMIS statement will go
to DMIS editor window. But when DMIS program is running, this will not happen.
- 385 -
Program Database-DMIS Program Window Drag and Drop
Application
DMIS program also accepts drag and drop to generate DMIS statement:
1. Drag and drop of coordinate system from coordinate system database to DMIS program
window can generate "recall"DMIS statement.
2. Drag and drop of sensor label name from sensor system database to DMIS program
window can generate sensor selection DMIS statement.
3. Drag and drop of variable from variable system database to DMIS program window can
generate variable declaration DMIS statement.
4. Drag and drop of macro label name from variable system database to DMIS program
window can import internally created DMIS macro to DMIS program window.
5. Drag and drop of tolerance from tolerance system database to DMIS program window can
generate tolerance definition DMIS statement.
6. Drag and drop of nominal feature form feature system database to DMIS program window
can generate feature definition DMIS statement.
7. Drag and drop of actual feature from feature system database to DMIS program window
can re-generate actual feature to create DMIS statement according to the generation methods of
dragged actual feature. No matter it is generated from definition, construction or measurement.
- 386 -
Custom View Database
Custom view database includes Project Views, Graphical Reports view, From Error Reports view,
Dimension Label view and Display Layers.
Custom view is part of RationalDMIS solution file. The bottom of database window can display
preview of selected view. After you set to display preview window in program setting window, if
you select a view label, its corresponding preview will be displayed.
- 387 -
Custom View Database-Project Views
There is a pull-down toolbar in graphic window toolbar providing the function of resetting project
view. It can reset project view as initial view, front view and fixed view etc. There views are
default views after evaluation. Drawing view can let users save and reset all views. This function
is very useful for CAD model off-line programming.
Right click menu:
There are 2 right click menus: right click menu of drawing view father node and right click menu
of sub-node of drawing view father node
Right click menu of father node:
Save: the item will save current graphic window with default name, which is “View” plus a
number.
Save As: the item will save name inputted by users in current graphic window.
Delete All: the item will delete all saved drawing views.
Right click menu of sub-item:
Activate: the item will reset graphic window to the saved state. Users can drag and drop selected
items to graphic window to reset graphic window.
- 388 -
The above figure shows process of drag and drop. “View4” is the drawing view to be activated.
Bottom preview window shows the graphic window state saved in View4.
Delete: the item will delete selected drawing view items.
- 389 -
Custom View Database-Graphical Reports View
Graphical reports view offers the function to save graphical reports window data. It offers
convenient method to re-activate and output content saved previously. Graphical reports window
data includes graphic view and state of each small window for report. Users can drag and drop
certain graphical reports view item to graphical reports window and activate dragged graphical
reports in graphical reports window. RationalDMIS also offers preview for graphical reports view.
Right click menu:

There are 2 types of right click menus for graphical reports view: right click menu of graphical
reports view father node and right click menu of sub-node of graphical reports view father node
Delete All: the item will delete all graphical reports views saved previously
- 390 -
Note: graphical reports view can not be created in custom view database. Users can only save
graphical reports view in graphical reports window.
Save All Reports As PDF: save all reports views separate pages in a PDF file.
Right click menu of sub-item
Activate: the item will reset graphical reports window to the state saved in graphical reports view.
Delete: the item will delete selected graphical reports view.
The above figure shows process of activating graphical reports view. “Report1” is the graphical
reports view to be activated. Bottom preview window displays graphical reports view saved by
“Report1”.
Output report to output window:

You can also output graphical reports to output window. If you want to output a graphical reports
view, you need to drag and drop this view to output window.
- 391 -
The above figure shows that graphical reports view “Report1” is being dragged and dropped to
output window.
- 392 -
Custom View Database-Form Error Report View
Form error report view offers the function to save Form error window data. If also offer the
function to output Form error report view to output window. RationalDMIS also offers preview for
Form error report view. See the following figure:
Right click menu:

There are 2 types of right click menu for Form error report view: right click menu of Form error
report view father node and right click menu of sub-node of Form error report view father node
Delete All:
- 393 -
The item will delete all Form error report views saved previously.
Note: Form error report view can not be created in custom view database. Users can only save
Form error report view in Form error window.
Picture layout design:

You can assign row count and column count of PDF output page. You can drag and drop Form
Report label to each cell to finish layout.
Template supports “Portrait” and “Landscape” mode.

Landscape is horizontal layout. Maxmum of row and column is 10X10.
Form error layout can be saved to database as template. The database is part of solution. You can
use DMIS to call this template during saving PDF.
- 394 -
a. can save several templates
b. template name can be edited
c. you can use DMIS to call saved template and save as PDF file
DMIS example:
$$ Set.FormError.OutputTemplate(FormError-T1)
DID(MyTest) = device/STOR,'c:\TemplateTest.PDF'
Open/DID(MyTest), FORMERR, OUTPUT
Close/DID(MyTest)
Called template statement can be generated from Form Error Cmd
$$ Set.FormError.OutputTemplate(FormError-T1)
Right click menu of sub-item:
The item will delete selected Form error report view.
Output report to output window:

You can also output Form error report view to output window. If you want to output a Form error
report view, you need to drag and drop this view to output window.
- 395 -
The above figure shows that Form error report view “FormErr1” is being dragged and dropped to
output window.
- 396 -
Custom View Database-Dimension Label Report View
Conduct dimension marking on graphical report area according to the following dimension labels.
Save graphical report and graphical report of dimension marking: as shown in the following figure
Drag and drop output dimension report:
- 397 -
Custom View Database-Display Layers
You can hide entity in the software through display layers. Examples are as shown in the
following figures:
Layer is not used: Layer is used:
Add Layer: use right click menu of display layers “Add Layer”
You can input layer define parameters in parameter window which pops up. Click “Accept” to
finish layer define.
Shortcut layer definition:

1. Drag and drop plane to “Display Layers” window to create and activate new layers quickly.
2. Drag and drop “CRD Plane” from CRD Frame to “Display Layers” node to create layers
quickly with coordinate system frame:
- 398 -
- 399 -
Function Operation Area
Function operation area includes the following parts:

Measurement operation area (CTRL+F1)
Sensor operation area (CTRL+F2)
Coordinate system operation area (CTRL+F3)
Construct operation area (CTRL+F4)
Tolerance operation area (CTRL+F5)
Machine state operation area (CTRL+F6)
- 400 -
Measurement
RationalDMIS divides measurement features into 2 types: 2-dimension feature and 3-dimension
feature.
In terms of 2-dimension feature measurement, you can use work plane setting to indicate
evaluation plane. Work plane direction is used in project and sensor compensation.
1. Work plane features needed by sensor compensation are: point feature and edge point
feature.
2. Work plane features needed by evaluation are: line feature, circle feature, arc feature,
ellipse feature, slot feature and curve feature.
In addition, RationalDMIS also offers vector construction method for project and sensor
compensation design.
In terms of 3-dimension feature measurement, work plane is not needed. Work plane
selection window and vector construction window will be hidden automatically. RationalDMIS
adjusts measurement value by increasing or decreasing sensor diameter.
Select “Measurement” in “Operation selection toolbar”
(You can open measurement operation interface quickly by Ctrl+F1)

RationalDMIS divides measurement features into 2 types: 2-dimension feature and 3-dimension
feature.
In terms of 2-dimension feature measurement, you can use work plane setting to indicate
evaluation plane. Work plane direction is used in project and sensor compensation.
1. Work plane features needed by sensor compensation are: point feature and edge point
feature.
2. Work plane features needed by evaluation are: line feature, circle feature, arc feature,
ellipse feature, slot feature and curve feature.
In addition, RationalDMIS also offers vector construction method for project and sensor
compensation design.
In terms of 3-dimension feature measurement, work plane is not needed. Work plane
selection window and vector construction window will be hidden automatically. RationalDMIS
adjusts measurement value by increasing or decreasing sensor diameter.
RatioalDMIS feature measurement interface is as follows:
- 401 -
- 402 -
Measurement-Intelligent Measurement
In the process of intelligent measurement, the system will automatically identify categories of
measure features to make operating personnel do not need to manually change categories of
measured features in the process of measurement. Intelligent measurement is only valid in manual
measurement and measurement window with joystick.
Feature types that intelligent measurement supports: point feature, edge point feature, line feature,
plane feature, circle feature, cylinder, cone feature and sphere feature
Select “measurement” in “operation of toolbar selection”:
(Ctrl+F1 can be used to rapidly open measurement operation interface)
Select “smart measurement”:
Intelligent measurement confirms types of features: after intelligent measurement confirms

appropriate types of features according to quantity of measure points, corresponding features in
measurement toolbar will be chosen. When intelligent measurement can not confirm types of
measured features, icon of “measurement” button in measurement window will become grey and
can not be used.
In intelligent measurement, it is allowed to manually select types of measure features;
Select “delete” icon to delete “single point”
“Delete all” icon can be used to delete “all measure points”
After clicking “finish” button , new features will be created in feature

database window;
- 403 -
Measurement-Measurement of Two-dimensional Features
This section introduces how to rapidly measure simple two-dimensional features.

Two-dimensional features in RationalDMIS Measurement are: line, circle, arc, ellipse, slot and
curve; work plane is needed at the time of measuring these features and the work plane is used to
calculate plane.
Taking measurement of line as an example and select “line”:
“Line” measurement interface are as follows:
Input window in feature label can change name of measured line:
Selection window of work plane: list window of work plane has listed 3 coordinate planes in
current coordinate system and one “closest CRD plane”. This window allows dragging and
dropping plane feature from feature database. Dragged and dropped plane feature is used for
calculation and compensation of probe head.
Move sensor of measuring machine to make it slightly contact with surface of component and the
contact point will be measured:
- 404 -
If quantity of measure points is displayed in digit counter window, measure points will be
automatically added to error display window. When the mouse pauses at a certain measure point, a
prompt window will pop up to display actual error of this point. Error of current measure point
will be displayed in right window of error window in detailed value:
Click “delete all” and “delete” these two keys to delete unsatisfied measure points
until measure points meet requirements. Click “finish” key to complete measurement and
measured feature of line will be automatically added to feature database:
- 405 -
Measurement-Measurement of Three-dimensional Features
This section introduces how to rapidly measure simple three-dimensional features.

Three-dimensional features in RationalDMIS Measurement are:
Plane
Sphere
Cylinder
Cone
Circular ring
Surface
Work plane is not needed at the time of measuring these features and work plane will hide
automatically.
Taking measurement of sphere as an example and select “sphere”:
“Sphere” measurement interface are as follows:
Input window in feature label can change name of measured sphere:
Move sensor of measuring machine to make it slightly contact with surface of component and the
contact point will be measured:
- 406 -
If quantity of measure points is displayed in digit counter window, measure points will be
automatically added to error display window. When the mouse pauses at a certain measure point, a
prompt window will pop up to display actual error of this point. Error of current measure point
will be displayed in right window of error window in detailed value:
Click “delete all” and “delete” these two keys to delete unsatisfied measure points
until measure points meet requirements. Click “finish” key to complete measurement and
measured feature of sphere will be automatically added to feature database:
- 407 -
Measurement- Measurement Working Area
Measurement working area is controlled by operation of toolbar selection and click

“measurement” in operation of toolbar selection:
Interface of operation working area will be switched to interface of measurement working area:
Measurement operation area is divided into four operation areas: measurement setting window,
statistical chart window, management window of measure points and definition window of feature.
TAB control located in the top right corner of measurement operation area can be used to operate
or switch these four operation areas. As shown in the following figure:
- 408 -
Measurement Working Area-Setting
Setting of measurement property can be enabled by TAB shown in the following graphs:
Icons in setting window:
A Feature setting:
“Minimum point quantity”: it means minimum number of measure points needed in

calculation of features. Under default condition, RationalDMIS will use Nom minimum point
quantity of each feature.
Feature P Line Ci Arc Plane Curv S Cyli Con Circ Ellip Slot Surf
oi rc e p nder e ular se ace
nt le h ring
er
e
Minimu 1 2 3 3 3 3 4 5 6 9 6 5/6 6
m point
quantity
In general, users can change these point quantity into any number greater than Nom
minimum value. Several points shall be noticed when changing minimum value:
a. Minimum point quantity of point features can be changed into 0. For 0 is very special,
when the minimum point quantity is set as 0, measurement window of point features can
enable “finish” button without any measure point. After this button is pressed,
location of current sensor will be recorded as measure point;

b. Minimum point quantity of point features shall be no more than 2.
“Prefix”:
RationalDMIS use prefix to automatically generate feature label. For example, if “PT10” is
the prefix of point feature, RationalDMIS will successively generate PT101, PT102, PT102
and so on. The prefix itself shall be a legal label name of DMIS.
“Digital calculation”:
- 409 -
Counting method is a drop-down list, with decrease counter and increase counter these two
options. Please refer to description concerning how to use counting method in measurement.
“Automatic generation” and “10mm/100mm2”:
Automatic creation has set the rule of how to create measure point. This rule controls
quantity of measure point generated when drag and drop feature to function and tool bar of
DMIS procedure window. (See DMIS procedure window for reference)
a. When automatic creation is set as “constant value” and the numerical value under
“constant value” is the quantity of measure point to be generated actually. For example, if
feature of circle is set as “constant value” and the numerical value under it is 3, this indicates
measure point 3 will be generated.
b. When automatic creation is set as “density” and the numerical value under “density” is the
setting of density. There are two kinds of geometrical features, line type and plane type. Line
type features include circle, line, arc, curve, ellipse and slot but the plane type features
include: plane, cylinder, cone and surface. The density of line feature is how many in each 10
millimeter and the density of plane feature is how many in each 100 square millimeter. For
example, if density of line feature is set as 3, this represents RationalDMIS will generate 3
measure points in each 100 square millimeter of the plane.
B Scan setting:
The scan setting is different from different types of driver and the drive of connection
machine will decide this option;
When the machine is manually controlled machine, the probe head will enable manual scan if
it is hard probe head;
When the machine is manually controlled machine, the probe head will enable DCC scan if it
is trigger probe head or scan probe head;
When machine controller supports scan, the drive will display it is allowed to scan.
Manual scan: manual scan has 3 options, No Scan, Distance Scanning and Cross Plane
Scanning:
Distance Scanning:
- 410 -
After distance scan is selected, RationalDMIS will automatically generate a trigger point
when the machine moves a distance set in distance window.
Cross Place Scanning:
After cross plane scanning is selected, RationalDMIS will automatically generate a trigger
point when the machine moves across the plane. Cross plane scanning can also use a
predefined plane. Under this condition, drag and drop a plane feature to label window and
RationalDMIS will automatically add parameter of plane to definition window of plane.
DCC Scan：
DCC machine supporting scan is used to enable DCC scan window. The scan parameter will
be displayed in form of graph in window.
C Shrink setting:
Shrink setting is used to set shrink parameter of material and pitch on “enable shrink” check box
and then shrink setting will take effect. The front input box of shrink parameter is used to input
shrink parameter and the value that input parameter represents will be different according to
different unit selected in choice box of parameter unit.
- 411 -
Shrink parameter can also be set as “micrometer per meter”:
D Actual setting of Offset:
At here, set actual offset distance of point, angle point, corner point, circle, slot, ellipse and plane
as well as sample point and sample distance of vector build setting.
E Vector build setting:
At here, individually control approach/ retract for sample point of vector build setting and
approach/ retract of sample point shall be controlled individually and different from overall
measure parameter for there is great offset in workpieces with specific types;
F Clear surface setting:

It can be used to set different safe planes before and after measurement for elevation;
There are 3 set options: none, close and space plane and it is allowed to drag and drop plane in the
window:
- 412 -
Controls the following functions:
A. Clear surface setting of MEAS statement
MEAS/POINT, F (PT13), 1, CLRSRF, F (PLN2), 2.00, CLRSRF, F (PLN2), 20.00
B. Select from Cad and measure as well as call this setting；
C. Automatically measure and call this setting from feature data area;
D. RMEAS/VECBLD supports setting of ‘add clear surface setting at the time of creating MEAS’;
Take these points as examples: RMEAS/POINT, F (PT1), 1, VECBLD, 4.000, 3, CLRSRF, 15.0,
CLRSRF, 26.0
- 413 -
Measurement Working Area-Window of Statistical Graph
A Digit counter:
The leftmost window in schematic diagram window of measurement is the digit counter. Digit
counter has two options: increase counter and decrease counter. Different color is used in interface
to distinguish these two methods.
The increase counter indicates current measured number of measure points. Increase counter will
not automatically finish measurement of a certain feature. <Finish> button or keyboard of remote
control (if exists) can be used to complete measurement of one feature;
The decrease counter indicates number of current measure points that need to be measured. When
the decrease counter shows 0 and feature calculation is completed successfully, this measurement
will be over automatically and the next measurement of feature will begin.
The maximum count value of counter is 9999, among which hundred-bit value is shown in frame
of red line and kilobit value in shown in frame of blue line
B Error window
The error window shows the current error of measurement feature.
- 414 -
Each point in error window represents a measure point, with each icon in small figure representing
a moving point and each icon of sensor representing switchover of sensor.
When the mouse remains in a certain measure point for a while, a hint window will pop up to
show actual error of this point. The error of current measurement feature will be shown in detailed
value in the left window of error window.
“Low Tol” and “Up Tol” control two green lines in error window. When the error of measure point
is between “Low Tol” and “Up Tol”, this measure point will be represented by a light blue point
in error window. Otherwise, it will be represented in a red point. “Cur Error” represents current
measure point of focal point. Under default conditions, the last measure point is current measure
point of focal point. Without doubt, use the mouse to click a certain measure point in error
window to make it current measure point of focal point. Along with index of this measure point,
error of current measure point of focal point will be shown in window of “Cur Error”. For current
points, click delete button (see the following description) to delete current measure point of focal
point. Window of “Max Error” shows current Max Error and the index generates this error. For
iteration measurement, if the error of a certain measure point is too much, set this measure point
as measure point of focal point and press the single delete button to delete it. RationalDMIS will
immediately recount calculation error and update error window. (Please check the following
description concerning real-time calculation of check box)
Attention: moving point is generated by study location button (if exists) under remote
control of keyboard or moving status window of machine (please check description of status
window). The moving point is only applicable to DCC machine. For manually operated
machine, safely ignore it. Inserting moving point is to avoid sensor crash in the process of
sensor moving and operating DMIS procedure.
C Input window of feature label:
In general, RationalDMIS will automatically generate a new feature label. RationalDMIS will use
feature prefix and ever-increasing number to combine a feature label not existing before. (If
feature prefix needs to be modified, please see configuration window of measurement property
and “add and enable prefix” in right click menu in feature database for reference)
- 415 -
Input window of feature label allows modifying label name through keyboard input. Drag and
drop feature label to input window from feature database or directly from graphic window. The
behavior of dragging and dropping feature label to input window and behavior in schematic
diagram of measurement TAB, feature definition TAB and creating measure point TAB are
different. We will discuss it in feature definition TAB and management of measure point TAB. In
statistical graph TAB, this drag and drop will make RationalDMIS measure a new feature
according to Nom feature of drag and drop feature. For a certain features, when Nom features
exist, the feature calculation will be different in conditions without Nom features. But for another
feature, it will have nothing different. We will discuss this problem in discussion of sensor
compensation of individual feature and work plane.
D Window selection aiming at work plane of two-dimensional feature
For two-dimensional feature, work plane is set to indicate calculation window. Using work plane
in calculation and sensor compensation will be illustrated in measurement of each feature.
List window of work plane has listed 3 coordinate system plane of current coordinate system and a
option named “Closest CRD Plane”. This window allows dragging and dropping plane feature
from feature data area. Under this condition, plane feature can be used for calculation and sensor
compensation. The selection window of work plane will automatically show or hide according to
type of features.
Features of work plane needed in sensor compensation are: point feature and feature of boundary
point.
Features of work plane needed in calculation are: feature of line, circle feature, arc feature, ellipse
feature, feature of slot and curve feature
For all the other features, selection window of work plane will automatically hide.
E Creation and measurement of work plane button and activation vector quantity:
Work plane button will switch selection window of work plane to creation and measurement of
vector quantity (key words of DMIS is VECBLD). Under default conditions, this button is “work
plane”. Click this button, the button will be switched between “work plane” and “vector quantity
construct” as follows:
In general, in measuring a two-dimensional feature such as a circle but this circle is not in parallel
plane with any coordinate plane, the following steps are needed:
- 416 -
a. Measure the plane that circle is in.
b. Drag and drop this plane to selection window of work plane.
c. Measure circles in plane.
Methods of “vector quantity construct” are basically to repeat these steps without creating plane
feature. It combines plane measurement with self-reference measurement of circle. We will
discuss methods of “vector quantity construct” in discussion about measurement of each feature.
F Real-time calculation:
Under default condition, check box of real-time calculation is selected. When it is selected,
measure point generated in each time will calculate feature again and update error window and
graphic window. When measure point with great density is generated, check box of real-time
calculation shall not be selected to allow measurement of image scanning to rapidly record
measure point.
G Delete current measure point and repeat current measurement:

When there is measure point in buffer area of measure points, the button of delete and delete all
will be enable d. The button with red point will delete measure point of single focal point which is
the one generated at last. But users can select any measure point as measure point of focal point
(usually select by clicking the blue point in error window with mouse). Delete all buttons may
repeat current measurement of buffer area.
H End current measurement:

When measure points are enough to calculate features of selected type, the finish button will be
enabled. When it is increase counter, end button can be used to end measurement of feature. But
when it is decrease counter, this button is unnecessary and feature measurement will be
automatically over when the counter shows 0. However, when this button is available, users can
still use it to end measurement.
When learn on mode is open, the completion of measurement will generate DMIS measurement
statement.
I Find Nom point:
Find Nom window shall accept drag and drop of the following features: straight line, line, plane,
circle, cone, sphere, arc, ellipse, slot, curve, surface and CAD model. Attention shall be paid
to that either Nom feature or actual feature is dragged and dropped is indicated by sideward
icon color.
When one feature is used to find Nom feature, all measure points will be projected to this feature
to establish buffer area of Nom points.
Under default conditions, this window is empty and there is no buffer area of Nom points
- 417 -
generated from projection.
J Project current features:
Project window shall accept drag and drop of the following features: straight line, line, plane,
circle, cone, sphere, arc, ellipse, slot, curve, surface and CAD model. Attention shall be paid
to that either Nom feature or actual feature is dragged and dropped is indicated by sideward
icon color.
When feature measurement is completed, this window will be searched to find possible projection.
Point feature, line feature, circle feature, arc feature, feature of slot and ellipse feature are all
features of possible projection. When projection can not be conducted, RationalDMIS will not
give out any prompt message. Projection is used to generate the second feature and this feature is
generated from projection of measurement feature on projection window. If projection is
successfully completed, RationalDMIS will generate DMIS projection statement.
For detailed information about projection, please see operation area of feature construct for
reference.
K Scan
Scan is related to controller. When controller is connected with RationalDMIS, controller will
control whether to scan or not. Because scanning methods differ from different controller, we will
illustrate scan in document of each controller.
- 418 -
Measurement Working Area-Create Measure point
Window generating measure points is mainly used in DCC machine or off-line programming.
Users who control the machine with manual work can skip over this part.
Created window of measure points is only used for predefined feature. The function of this
window is to generate measure points whose quantity is shown in the left DRO window.
Tab window:
Measure points will be generated after dragging and dropping a predefined feature to tab window.
If drag and drop features have Nom measure points, the list window will be empty. At this time,
the icon on toolbar will be switched to the type of drag and drop feature.
Point window:
Point window is used to confirm quantity of measure point to be generated. Point window shows
four figures. When the mouse rolls in point window, the mouse wheel will change value of each
bit. When the set point is more than minimum measure point of feature and meets conditions to
generate measure points, the button of “ measure point generated” will be enabled: .
Conditions that feature can be used to generate measure points are as follows:
Point feature – the point quantity is 1.
Edge point feature - the point quantity is 1.
Line feature – the line shall be line with edge and the point quantity shall be equal to or
more than 2.
Plane feature – the plane shall be plane with boundary and the point quantity shall be
equal to or more than 3.
Circle feature - the point quantity shall be equal to or more than 3.
Arc feature -- the point quantity shall be equal to or more than 3.
Ellipse feature -- the point quantity shall be equal to or more than 5.
Sphere feature -- the point quantity shall be equal to or more than 4.
Cylinder feature – the cylinder shall be fragment cylinder and the point quantity shall be
Cone feature - the cone shall be fragment cone and the point quantity shall be equal to or
more than 6.
Slot feature - the point quantity shall be equal to or more than 5.
Curve – the curve shall be curve passing CAD definition and the point quantity shall be
- 419 -
Surface - the surface shall be surface passing CAD definition and the point quantity
shall be equal to or more than 9.
This button will not be enabled for all the other types of features.
Select and cancel selection point in tab window of measure points:

It is allowed to use mouse to click to select points in tab window of measure points. Use Shift +
mouse click can have a continuous multiple choice and use Ctrl + mouse click can also have a
continuous multiple choice. You can choose a measure point in figure window and press Shift key
and use mouse to click can select measure point.
If you want to cancel all choices, click the right button of mouse in list window of measure points.
Delete points in list window of measure points:

It is allowed to delete points in list window of measure points when necessary. Button of single
deletion can be used to delete selected measure points. Button of complete deletion
can be used to delete all measure points in list window of measure points.
Insert point GOTO

Current position of machine can be regarded as point GOTO to be inserted into list window of
measure points. If no measure point is selected, point GOTO will be inserted in the end of the list.
Point GOTO can be inserted and operated through operational tools in graphic area
- 420 -
Mouse can be used to click point GOTO to enable operational tool in point GOTO and use
mouse to drag and drop operational to move position of GOTO; click ligature of point GOTO to
insert a new GOTO point;
At the time of pressing the button “measurement”, operational tool of point GOTO in graphic area
will be prohibited and the point GOTO being operated at present is accepted automatically
Positional value of editing:

Each X, Y or Z unit in list window of measure points is editable window and it is allowed to
change positional value of points. Positional value in list window of measure points is based on
present system of coordinate system and the unit is the unit for present length and angle.
Reverse detection vector：
- 421 -
The button of reverse detection vector allows changing direction of detection vector when
necessary. After pressing this button, all selected vectors of measure point will reverse and will be
displayed in graphic window at the same time. If no measure point is selected, point vector in the
whole list window of measure points will reverse 180 degree.
Offset of measure point:

For line type feature, measure point in list table can be deviated. Line, circle, arc, curve, ellipse
and slot can all be deviated. The distance of offset can use the value in edit box of offset and the
offset direction is the Nom direction of feature. Click the right button can offset feature. The value
unit in edit box is controlled by current length unit.
When measure point is generated under “construction of vector quantity”, the value in this
window will be used for offset distance of sampling distance in construction of vector quantity.
Create DMIS statement:
Press the button of creating DMIS and under learn on model is open, measure pointin list
window of measure point will generate statement of measurement DMIS.
Create point cloud：

Create measure point automatically generated in software as point cloud data;
Preview：
Preview button can be used to check moving conditions of measurement in graphic window under
condition of not moving real machine.
Measurement:
Press measurement button and the measurement will begin. If no measure point is selected,
measure point in this list window of measure point will be sent to the controller. If measure point
is selected, only selected measure point will be sent to the controller for measurement.
- 422 -
Measurement Workspace-Feature Definition
General description:
For feature definition, man input parameter is adopted to define a new element. For some features
such as point, function option is contained in definition window to help find definition parameter.
Feature label:
Feature label window contains feature names to be defined. By default, RationalDMIS will
produce an unused label name by automatically using features prefix. User can change the label
name by inputting a name. The feature label name must be a legal DMIS label name.
DMIS label name:

Label length is 1-64 characters. Legal characters is letter (A-Z, a-z), figures (0-9), broken line ‘-’,
full stop ‘.’ and underline ‘_’
Drag-and-drop of features which can be simplified to be points is acceptable in feature label

window, and these features can be dragged and dropped to window from feature database or
graphic window. When a feature label is dragged and dropped to feature label window,
RationalDMIS will determine the type of the feature, and then to the feature type according to
icon on type switch toolbar. RationalDMIS also will automatically fill the parameter of the feature
to parameter input window, the parameters are based on current coordinate system and units are
current dimension and angle.
Parameter input window:

User defines geometric features of feature by parameter input window. In general, parameter input
windows of all features are different from each other. When feature icon in the toolbar changes,
the window will change correspondingly.
Basically, parameter input window includes position input and direction input. Drag-and-drop of
feature which can be simplified to points is acceptable in X edit box of position input window.
When drag and drop a feature which can be simplified to points to X edit box, the position
parameter of the feature will be filled in X, Y and Z edit box. The position parameter is based on
current coordinate, and the units are current dimension and angle. Drag-and-drop of feature which
can be simplified to points is acceptable in I, J and K edit box of direction input window. When
drag and drop a feature which can be simplified to points to I, J and K edit box, the direction
parameter of the feature will be filled in edit box of direction input. The direction parameter is
based on the current coordinate. The vector is always normalized. When drag and drop some
- 423 -
measure point item from feature property page to X and I edit box, the position parameter and
vector parameter of measure point will be filled in position edit box or direction edit box
automatically. Note: for measure point item, there are nominal measure point and actual measure
point.
Direction input window can’t be empty direction vector. For no input or input value of 0,
operation button will become unusable. When click <Add Nom> or <Add Act> button to finish
definition, direction input window will normalize the input vector automatically.
Operation button:
There are three operation buttons in feature definition window:
Preview button:
It is used to view parameter definition in graphic window. Press the button, the defined
graphic feature will flash in graphic window. The button can only be activated when the legal
parameter is input which means that a feature can be defined through the input parameter.
Add Nom button:
Add a feature definition into Nom feature database. The button can only be activated when
the legal parameter is input. Nom feature can be redefined or modified.
Add Act button:
Add a feature definition into Act feature database. The button can only be activated when the
legal parameter is input. Act feature can be redefined or modified. You can’t define
corresponding Act feature without Nom feature. When the feature is a predefined Nom
feature, point add Act button will add an Act feature in feature database. When there is a Nom
feature, RationalDMIS will define a Nom feature and an Act feature as parameter.
Function option:
Function option is used to find adequate feature parameter. Not all features have function option
whose specific information will be described in definition window of every feature.
Focus button:
A. Stop position of focus button will highlight show button.

B. Key <enter> is acceptable for focus button. The result is equivalent to mouse LB click.
C. Key TAB can automatically jump.
The hotkey of shortcut key “Ctrl+Enter” in feature Nom definition window can define feature
directly.
- 424 -
Feature Definition-Points Feature Definition
Point needs a position parameter and a direction parameter. Position parameter is X, Y and Z, is
based on current coordinate and units are current dimensions and angle. Direction parameter is I, J
and K and is based on current coordinate.
Point is on a plane, the Nom direction of a plane on point position is the direction of the point.
Reverse vector
When the input in direction input window is legal, reverse vector button will be activated. Press
the button, the vector will be reversed.
The function of “find vector” includes an input window accepting drag-and-drop and a operation
button (green arrow button). Dragging and dropping feature from feature database is acceptable in
drag-and-drop window. Operation button find current vectors of X, Y, Z position through
projecting current X, Y, Z position to project plane. The Nom vector of project point and plane
will be filled in direction input window.
Similar to “find vector”, the function of “project point” is also project current position in X, Y, Z
input window to projection feature. What is different is that the function of “project point” not
only fill Nom vector of project point and plane in direction input window, but also fill position of
project plane in position input window.
- 425 -
The function of “offset distance” is offset distance set in input window moving X, Y, Z for a
“offset distance” along I, J, K direction by position of current X, Y, Z input window and direction
of I, J, K input window. Offset distance in “offset distance” input window is controlled by current
dimension unit.
In point window, pick from graphic feature through graphic area and automatically fill X, Y and Z
input window.
Find Nom from CAD: when there is CAD model in software, the software can use two given
parameters and find other parameters from CAD.
Find Nom from CAD (XY +Z):

Given X, Y, software automatically find +Z from CAD and determine vector direction for
point making use of CAD.
Find Nom from CAD (XY -Z):

Given X, Y, software automatically finds -Z from CAD and determine vector direction for
Find Nom from CAD (YZ +X):

Given X, Y, software automatically finds +X from CAD and determine vector direction for
Find Nom from CAD (YZ -X):

Given X, Y, software automatically finds -X from CAD and determine vector direction for
Find Nom from CAD (ZX +Y):

Given X, Y, software automatically finds +Y from CAD and determine vector direction for
Find Nom from CAD (ZX -Y):

Given X, Y, software automatically finds -Y from CAD and determine vector direction for
- 426 -
Feature Definition-Edge Points Feature Definition
Edge point is a special feature and is usually used in thin-wall component. The following figure
shows an edge point.
Edge point feature includes X, Y, Z, and edge point vector is Nom vector of plane of an edge
point;
Position parameter (X, Y, Z) is based on current coordinate system and the type of current
coordinate system, and units are current dimension and angle. Direction parameter (I, J, K) is
based on current coordinate system. Nom vector (nI, nJ, nK) of plane of a edge point is based on
current coordinate system.
Reverse vector
.Edge point can be defined by picking a point on a graphic feature interface of graphic area.
RationalDMIS will automatically find the nearest edge point, edge point vector and Nom vector of
plane of edge point.
- 427 -
Feature Definition-Line Feature Definition
icon is a switch button and can switch the interface to unbound definition method or edge
definition method;
Line defining edge mehthod:
Length method:
(X, Y, Z) is the middle point of line, (I, J, K) is the line direction, (I1, J1, K1) is the plane direction
of line; L is length of line;
2 points method:
(X1, Y1, Z1) is start coordinate of line, (X2, Y2, Z2) is end coordinate of line, and (I1, J1, K1) is
direction of line;
Define unbound method line:
- 428 -
(X, Y, Z) is the middle point of line, (I, J, K) is the line direction and (I1, J1, K1) is the plane
direction of line; when define unbound line, the length is unbound.
Reverse vector
- 429 -
Feature Definition-Plane Feature Definition
Plane feature is defined through a point on a plane and plane Nom vector. The plane defined is
unbound by default. If user will set plane range, he can use Bound method in construction and
operation zone.
Position parameter (X, Y, Z) is based on current coordinate system and current coordinate system
type, and units are dimension and angle.
Reverse vector
- 430 -
Feature Definition-Circle Feature Definition
Circle feature is defined through position of center of circle (X, Y, Z), circle Nom vector and
circle diameter. Circle Nom vector is plane Nom vector including a circle. The vector direction
can be rotated 180 degrees to define the same circle. Note: RationalDMIS can use this direction to
determine the direction of sensor when MeasPt is automatically created under automatic mode.
Circle diameter “D” is a switch button which can switch “D” to be “R”, and then a circle can be
defined through diameter or radius.
“Inner circle” and “outer circle” in drop-down box option can determine material of the circle.
RationalDMIS determine the direction to measure circle feature by this property, so the property is
very important to the circle.
Inner Circle Outer Circle
Reverse vector
Selection for more circles：。Press Shift and point pick the plane of CAD model circle in
definition window of the circle which will neglect current selection position and is only Nom
definition of the circle.
- 431 -
Feature Definition-Arc Feature Definition
Arc feature is defined through the center position of arc (X, Y, Z), arc Nom vector, start point
vector of arc, arc radius and arc angle.
The red point in the above figure is the central position of arc. The start point vector of arc is the
red line. Arc angle is the angle between red line and white line.
Arc Nom vector is Nom vector of the plane containing arc. This vector direction can be rotated
180 degrees to define the same arc.
Note: RationalDMIS will determine the direction of sensor when measure point occurs
automatically under automatic model by this direction.
The arc radius “R” is a switch button and turns to “D” from “R”, so the arc can be defined through
diameter or radius.
“Inner arc” and “outer arc” in drop-down box option can determine material of the arc.
RationalDMIS determine the direction to measure arc feature by this property, so the property is
very important to the arc.
Reverse vector
Click Alternative Definition and tangent plane to swich to another
- 432 -
definition interface:
Click question mark icon and a picture will pop to explain the parameter;
- 433 -
Feature Definition-Sphere Feature Definition
Basic sphere feature can be defined through the position of center of sphere (X, Y, Z) and
diameter of sphere. Position parameter and diameter just only define a “free sphere” which doesn’t
exist in the world without any contact with other features. The definition of a “free sphere” is
acceptable in RationalDMIS.
.Sphere feature can also be defined as part sphere which is bounded sphere and I, J, K in input
window define the limit direction. Angle A sets the part of sphere to be defined.
Yellow Part Being a Defined Sphere
Note: plus angle A defines sphere vector towards sphere direction, but minus angle defines
sphere vector opposite to sphere direction. The angle with 0 degree can define a hemisphere.
Part sphere defined by plus angle is smaller than the hemisphere, and part sphere defined
by minus sphere is bigger than the hemisphere.
The sphere diameter “D” is a switch button and turns to “D” from “R”, so a sphere can be defined
through diameter or radius.
“Inner sphere” and “outer sphere” in drop-down box option can determine material of the
sphere. RationalDMIS determine the direction to measure sphere feature by this property, so the
property is very important to the sphere.
Reverse vector
- 434 -
Feature Definition-Cylinder Feature Definition
Cylinder feature is defined through a point position (X, Y, Z) on cylinder axis, cylinder axis
direction and cylinder diameter. The cylinder axis direction can be rotated 180 degrees to define
the same cylinder. Note: RationalDMIS will use the direction to determine initial contact direction
of cylinder when measure point occurs automatically under automatic model.
The cylinder diameter “D” is a switch button and turns to “D” from “R”, so a cylinder can be
defined through diameter or radius.
“Inner cylinder” and “outer cylinder” in drop-down box option can determine material of the
cylinder. RationalDMIS determine the direction to measure cylinder feature by this property, so
the property is very important to the cylinder.
H parameter is the height cylinder. The parameter restricts the cylinder to the set height. In figure,
the cylinder will show one half above cylinder point and another half under cylinder point.
Reverse vector
- 435 -
Feature Definition-Cone Feature Definition
Cone feature is defined through apex position (X, Y, Z), axis direction and cone angle. The
positive direction of axis direction of cone is the direction from apex to conical mouth.
“Inner cone” and “outer cone” in drop-down box option can determine material of the cone.
RationalDMIS determine the direction to measure cone feature by this property, so the property is
very important to the cone.
Cone can be used to define segmented cone. There are two methods used to define segmented
cone: the use of apex distance and the use of diameter.
For apex distance method to define segmented cone, the distance is evaluated from apex of cone
and the length between distance 1 and distance 2 is the height of cone. Value in distance input
window is controlled by current length unit.
For diameter method to define segmented cone, diameter of one edge of cone is value input in
diameter 1 window, and diameter of another edge is value input in input in diameter 2 window.
The distance of center of circle determined through two diameters is the cone length; Values in
diameter 1 and diameter 2 input windows are controlled by current length unit.
- 436 -
Reverse vector
Click Alternative Definition to switch to another definition method:

Click question mark icon and a picture will pop to explain the parameter;
- 437 -
Feature Definition-Ellipse Feature Definition
Ellipse feature is defined through central position of ellipse (X, Y, Z), long vector of ellipse (I, J,
K showed by blue line), including Nom vector of plane of ellipse (I1, J1, K1), length of long axis
of ellipse and length of short axis of ellipse, and see above figure.
“Inner ellipse” and “outer ellipse” in drop-down box option can determine material of the
ellipse. RationalDMIS determine the direction to measure ellipse feature by this property, so the
property is very important to the ellipse.
Reverse vector
- 438 -
Feature Definition-Slot Feature Definition
Slot feature is defined through central position of ellipse (X, Y, Z), long vector of slot (I, J, K
showed by blue line), including Nom vector of plane of slot (I1, J1, K1), length of long axis of slot
and length of short axis of slot, and see above figure.
“Inner slot” and “outer slot” in drop-down box option can determine material of the slot.
RationalDMIS determine the direction to measure slot feature by this property, so the property is
very important to the slot.
Slot can be round slot (slot in upper part of the figure) or flat slot (slot in bottom part of the figure)
Reverse vector
- 439 -
Feature Definition-Torus Feature Definition
Torus feature is defined through central position of torus (X, Y, Z), torus Nom vector and torus
diameter. Torus Nom vector is plane Nom vector containing torus and the vector direction can be
rotated 180 degrees to define the same torus.
Totus diameter “R” is large diameter of torus

Totus diameter “r” is small diameter of torus
“Inner” and “outer” in drop-down box option can determine the torus. RationalDMIS
determine whether the torus belongs to inner torus or outer torus by the property.
- 440 -
Feature Definition-Curve Feature Definition
There is no parameter definition for curve. Curve definition window just define a plane parallel to
curve. The curve definition can’t adequately create curve in figure. Curve plane is used to evaluate
bidirectional curve in measure. Measure error in plane Nom direction will be neglected in curve
bestfit.
- 441 -
Construct
The function of construct workspace: create all possible construct results to satisfy requirements
of users according to different construct methods and construct features.
Click “construct” in operating selection toolbar:
Operating workspace will switch to construct workspace interface:
Construct toolbar: contains middle construct, parallel construct, perpendicular construct, etc.. To
construct the required results, first of all, select suitable construct methods.
Construct result window: different construct methods should be corresponding to different

construct result windows, and drag and drop construct feature to construct feature window, the
system will list all possible results in construct result window.
- 442 -
Construct-Construct Result Window
A Result feature:
Result window will list all possible construct results according to construct methods and construct
features. The far left icon is used to indicate type of feature, such as point line and plane in above
figure. The name of result feature is created automatically by RationalDMIS.
Click the name of some feature and you will select the feature. The selected feature will show its
value parameter in side parameter window which will be explained in the following. All operation
buttons such as <Preview> and <Add Result> are effective for selected feature.
Double-click name of some feature and you can edit the name of the feature. User can type into
name of a new feature by keyboard to replace name automatically created by RationalDMIS.
Name of feature must be a legal DMIS label name.
DMIS label name:

The length of label is 1-64 characters. Legal characters include letters (A-Z, a-z), numbers (0-9),
dash ‘-’, full stop ‘.’ and underline ‘_’
Type selection of result feature:

There is an icon for type selection of result feature in part construct result feature window, as
follows: click the point type icon bright and only the construct result of point type shows in result
feature to facilitate selection of result feature;
B Parameter window:
Parameter window shows the value parameter of selected feature in result window. The value in
the window is controlled by current dimension and angle. If actual feature is constructed, the
window will show Nom parameter and Act parameter, but if only nominal feature is created, only
the left bar will show parameter.
C Nominal feature window:
- 443 -
[The window of nominal feature can be opened/collected through green arrow]
Drag and drop of feature from feature data window or graphic window is acceptable in nominal
feature window. Icon on the left of window shows type of nominal feature to be constructed. The
role of nominal feature in construct is to determine the suitable construct result when there are
many possible construct results, and to be specific, it is to remove construct feature different from
nominal feature type. When there are many construct result features the type of which is the same
as the type of nominal feature, the feature nearest to nominal feature will be selected as terminal
construct result feature. So when there is one nominal feature in nominal feature window, only one
or no construct result feature will show in construct result window.
D Simplified feature:
“Simplified feature” used in construct is a new feature which can define a different type with part
properties of the feature. “Simplified feature” includes features that can be simplified to points,
features that can be simplified to lines and features that can be simplified to planes.
Features that can be simplified to point: center of circle
center of arc
center of ellipse
center of slot
center of sphere
apex of cone
centroid of line segment
feature that can be simplified to line: cylinder axis
circular cone axis
major axis of slot
E Construct feature window:

Construct feature windows are different from each other in different construct methods. Drag and
drop of feature from feature data window or graphic window is acceptable in construct feature
window. Once legal feature name and type are filled in construct feature window (showed by icon
on the left of construct feature window), RationalDMIS will begin to evaluate construct result.
When there is actual feature in construct feature, there will be nominal feature and actual feature
in construct result feature. Result nominal feature is constructed by nominal value of construct
feature, while result actual feature is constructed by actual value when actual value exists in
construct feature.
Ｆ Reverse vector button:

During constructing procedure, result feature contains vector information, and RationalDMIS will
evaluate a default vector direction. Reverse vector button can rotate the default vector direction in
opposite direction 180 degrees.
- 444 -
Ｇ Operation button:
There are two <Preview> and <Add Result> for operation button. <Preview> button will show
current selected construct result feature in graphic window. <Add Result> button will create
selected construct result feature in feature database of RationalDMIS and remove construct result
feature from construct result window.
Construct-Middle Feature Construct
A Features can participate in middle feature construct are:

Point
Line
Plane
Construct features can be:

Point
Edge point
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Ellipse
Slot
Torus
Measure point
On measure point:
User can drop and drag measure point item from feature property page to feature input box of
construct window, and feature input box after drag and drop will become what the following
shows: , in which icon shows that

current drag and drop feature is measure point and is actual value,but for nominal value, the
- 445 -
icon is . Input box shows name of feature where measure point is located, and number
on the right shows which one the measure point is for the feature. DMIS constructed and
created by measure point is as follows:
CONST/POINT, F(MIDPT1), MIDPT, FA(CIR1)[1], FA(CIR2)[1]
B The following table describes the relations between construct feature and construct result
feature:
The first construct feature is the feature which can be simplified to point
Feature which can
Point: middle point has equal distance from two construct points, and direction
be simplified to
vector is (0, 0, 1).
point
Point: middle point has equal distance from two construct points, and direction
Feature which can
vector is (0, 0, 1).
be simplified to
Line: middle point has equal distance from construct point and construct line,
line
and is parallel to construct line.
Point: middle point has equal distance from construct point and construct
Plane
plane, and direction vector is (0, 0, 1).
circle.
Circle
Point: middle point has equal distance from construct point and project point
of construct point projected to circle, and direction vector is (0, 0, 1).
Point: middle point has equal distance from construct point and construct arc
Arc
center.
cylinder central axis.
Cylinder
of construct point projected to cylinder, and direction vector is (0, 0, 1).
Point: middle point has equal distance from construct point and construct cone
apex.
Point: middle point has equal distance from construct point and construct cone
Cone
central axis.
of construct point projected to cone, and direction vector is (0, 0, 1).
Point: has equal distance from construct point and construct sphere center.
Sphere Point: middle point has equal distance from construct point and project point
of construct point projected to sphere, and direction vector is (0, 0, 1).
ellipse center.
Ellipse
of construct point projected to ellipse, and direction vector is (0, 0, 1).
Slot Point: middle point has equal distance from construct point and construct slot
- 446 -
center.
of construct point projected to slot, and direction vector is (0, 0, 1).
Curve
of construct point projected to curve, and direction vector is (0, 0, 1).
Surface
of construct point projected to surface, and direction vector is (0, 0, 1).
Table 1
The first construct feature is the feature which can be simplified to line
Point: middle point has equal distance from two construct points, and
Feature which can
direction vector is (0, 0, 1).
be simplified to
Line: middle point has equal distance from construct point and construct line,
point
and is parallel to construct line.
Line: Center line has equal distance from two construct lines and is parallel to
construct line. When two construct lines are parallel, center line is
parallel to two construct lines and divides the distance between two
construct lines equally; when two construct line are on the same plane,
center line equally divided the angle of two lines; when two construct
Feature which can
lines are in different planes, center line is angular bisector of middle
be simplified to
point of common vertical line passing through two construct lines.
line
Plane:Middle plane between two construct lines. When two construct lines are
parallel, middle plane passes through middle point of vertical line of
two lines and is parallel to lines; when two construct lines are not
parallel, middle plane passes through common vertical line of two lines
and equally divides angel of two lines.
Line: Center line of project line of construct line and line projected to
Plane:construct plane.
Middle plane of construct line and construct plane which passed
through intersect point of construct line (segment or its extension line)
Plane
and construct plane, and equally divides the angle. When construct line
is parallel to construct plane, middle plane equally divides vertical line
of the line and plane; when construct plane is perpendicular to construct
line, the construct fails.
Table 2
- 447 -
Construct-Parallel Feature Construct
A Construct results can be:

Line
Plane
B “Parallel” construct features can be:

Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Ellipse
Slot
Curve
C “Through” construct feature can be:
Features can be simplified to points
Measure point
On measure point:

CONST/LINE, F(PARALLN1), PARTO, FA(LN6),THRU, FA(CIR2)[1]
D The following tables describe relations between construct features and construct result
features:
“Through” construct feature is the feature which can be simplified to point
Line: middle point of line is construct point and is parallel to construct line.
Line
Plane: middle point of plane is construct point, and the direction of plane is directed
- 448 -
towards construct point from project point of construct point on line.
Plane Plane: middle point of plane is construct point and is parallel to construct plane.
Circle Line: middle point of line is construct point and is parallel to plane of construct circle.
Arc Line: middle point of line is construct point and is parallel to plane of construct circle.
Line: middle point of line is construct point and is parallel to axis of construct cylinder.
Cylinder Plane: middle point of plane is construct point, and the direction of plane is directed
towards construct point from project point of construct point on cylinder axis.
Line: middle point of line is construct point and is parallel to construct cone axis.
Line: middle point of line is construct point, and the direction of line is directed towards
construct point from project point of construct point on cone axis.
Cone
Plane: middle point of plane is construct point and is parallel to construct cone axis.
towards construct point from project point of construct point on cone axis.
Sphere
towards construct point from center of sphere.
Line: middle point of line is construct point, and the direction of line is tangent direction
Ellipse
of project point of construct point on ellipse, and the line is parallel to plane of ellipse.
Slot
of project point of construct point on slot, and the line is parallel to plane of slot.
Curve
of project point of construct point on curve, and the line is parallel to plane of curve.
Table 1
- 449 -
Construct-Intersection Feature Construct
A Construct result features can be:

Point
Line
Circle
Curve
B Construct features can be:

Features can be simplified to lines
Plane
Circle
Arc
Sphere
Ellipse
Slot
Curve
Surface
C The following tables describe relations between construct features and construct result
features:
The first construct feature is the feature which can be simplified to line
Point:is intersect point of two construct lines, and if construct lines are not on
the same plane, the intersect point is middle point of line segment which
Feature which can is the shortest between two lines and its direction is vector product of
be simplified to the line direction of two construct lines; if construct lines are line
line segments, construct intersect point contains the intersect point of its
extension line; if construct lines are parallel, there will be no intersect
point.
Point:is intersect point of construct line (segment or extension line) and
Plane construct plane, and the direction is nominal direction of construct
plane. If construct line is parallel to construct plane, the construct fails
Point:is intersect point of construct circle (segment or extension line) and
construct line, the direction is directed towards intersect point from
Circle center of construct circle, and construct circle and construct line must be
on the same plane . If there is no intersect point between construct circle
and construct line, the construct fails.
- 450 -
Point:is intersect point of construct ellipse (segment or extension line) and
construct line, the direction vector is (0, 0, 1) and construct ellipse and
Arc
construct line must be on the same plane . If there is no intersect point
between construct ellipse and construct line, the construct fails.
Point:is intersect point of construct ellipse (segment or extension line) and
construct line, the direction vector is (0, 0, 1) and construct ellipse and
Ellipse
between construct ellipse and construct line, the construct fails.
Slot
Point:is intersect point of construct curve (segment or extension line) and
construct line, the direction vector is (0, 0, 1) and construct curve and
Curve
between construct curve and construct line, the construct fails.
Point:is intersect point of construct surface (segment or extension line) and
construct line, the direction vector is (0, 0, 1) and construct surface and
Surface
between construct curve and construct line, the construct fails.
Table 1
The first construct feature is plane
Feature which can Point:is intersect point of construct line (segment or extension line) and
be simplified to construct plane, and the direction is nominal direction of construct plane.
line If construct line is parallel to construct plane, the construct fails.
Plane Line:intersect line of two construct planes.
Point:is intersect point of construct circle and construct plane, and the direction
is directed towards intersect point from center of construct circle. If
Circle
construct circle is parallel to construct plane or construct circle is on the
plane, the construct fails.
Point:is intersect point of construct arc and construct plane, and the direction is
directed towards intersect point from center of construct circle. If
Arc
construct arc is parallel to construct plane or construct arc is on the
plane, the construct fails.
Point:is intersect point of construct ellipse and construct plane, and the
Ellipse direction vector is (0, 0, 1). If construct ellipse is parallel to construct
plane or construct ellipse is on the plane, the construct fails.
Circle:a circle obtained through cutting out construct sphere by construct
Sphere
plane.
Circle:a circle obtained through cutting out construct cylinder by construct
Cylinder
plane.
Cone Circle:a circle obtained through cutting out construct cone by construct plane.
Slot
- 451 -
Point:is intersect point of construct curve and construct plane, and the direction
Curve vector is (0, 0, 1). If construct curve is parallel to construct plane or
construct curve is on the plane, the construct fails.
Curve:is intersect line of construct surface and construct plane, is intersect
point of construct curve and construct plane and the direction vector is
Surface
(0, 0, 1). If construct curve is parallel to construct plane or construct
curve is on the plane, the construct fails.
Table 2
- 452 -
Construct-Perpendicular Feature Construct

Line
Plane
B “Perpendicular” construct features can be:

Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Ellipse
Slot
C “Through” construct features can be:

Features which can be simplified to points
Measure point
On measure point:

CONST/LINE, F(PERPLN1), PERPTO, FA(LN3) ,THRU, FA(CIR2)[1]
D The following table describes relations between construct features and construct result
features:
“Through” construct features can be features which can be simplified to points
Line: the line is constructed by construct point and project point of construct point on
Line
Plane:construct line. If construct point is on construct line, the construct fails.
- 453 -
the plane is constructed by direction vectors of construct point and construct line.
Plane
construct plane. If construct point is on construct plane, the construct fails.
Circle
circle. If construct point is on construct circle or center of circle, the construct fails.
Arc
arc. If construct point is on construct arc or center of circle, the construct fails.
Plane:cylinder axis. If construct point is on cylinder axis, the construct fails.
Cylinder
the plane is constructed by direction vectors of construct point and construct
cylinder axis.
Line: cone axis. If construct point is on cone axis, the construct fails.
Plane:the line is constructed by construct point and project point of construct point on
Cone
cone.
the plane is constructed by direction vectors of construct point and construct cone
axis.
Sphere construct sphere. If construct point is on sphere, the line is constructed by construct
point and center of sphere of construct sphere.
construct ellipse. If construct point is on ellipse, the line is constructed by construct
Ellipse
point and nominal direction of construct point on construct ellipse, and the line is
on the plane of construct ellipse.
Slot
construct curve. If construct point is on construct curve, the line is constructed by
Curve
construct point and nominal direction of construct point on construct curve, and the
line is on the plane of construct curve.
Table 1
- 454 -
Construct-Tangent Feature Construct

Line
Plane
Circle
B “Tangent” construct features can be:
Features which can be simplified to lines
Plane
Circle
Cylinder
Curve
C “Through” construct features can be:

Circle
Curve
Measure point
On measure point:

CONST/CIRCLE, F(TANCI1), TANTO, FA(LN2) ,THRU, FA(CIR2)[1]
D R value window of given radius:

When the construct feature is circle, the radius of construct circle can be set by R value window of
given radius. When the construct feature is circle and meanwhile is “tangent” construct feature is
plane, the given R value window will become three input windows of vector I, J, K to determine
the construct circle.
- 455 -
E The following tables describe relations between construct features and construct result
features:
“Through” construct features can be simplified to points

Circle:if given radius R is less than the minimum circle radius from construct
Features which point to construct line, construct result is minimum tangent circle;
can be simplified otherwise, construct result is tangent to construct line and is through
to lines construct point, and the radius is two tangent circles of given radius R; if
construct point is on construct line, the construct fails.
Circle:the construct circle is tangent to construct plane through construct point,
and the nominal direction of circle is projection of given (I, J, K) on the
Plane plane. If given vector (I, J, K) is parallel to nominal direction of construct
plane, the construct fails; if construct point is on the construct please, the
construct fails.
Line: if construct point is on construct circle, the result is a tangent line of
construct circle through construct point; if construct point is outside of
construct circle, two tangent lines are constructed with central points of
tangent lines being two tangent points; if construct point is center of
construct circle or the point and circle are not on the same plane, the
construct fails.
Plane: construct cylinder through construct circle and nominal direction, and
construct tangent plane through cylinder and construct point.
Circle
Circle:if given radius R is greater than 0 and less than minimum tangent circle
radius of construct point and construct circle, the result is maximum
tangent circle and minimum tangent circle of construct point and
construct circle; if construct point is in construct circle and given radius R
is not greater than maximum circle of construct point and construct circle,
two tangent circles tangent to construct circle and through construct point
are constructed; if construct point is on construct circle or center of
construct circle, the construct fails.
Line:if construct point is on construct cylinder, the result is a tangent plane; if
construct point is outside of cylinder, the result is two construct tangent
Cylinder
planes; if construct point is in construct cylinder (including extension
direction of cylinder), the construct fails.
Table 1
“Through” construct features can be simplified to lines
Circle:If given radius R is less than the minimum tangent circle radius from
Features which construct point to construct line, construct result is minimum tangent
can be simplified circle; otherwise, construct result is tangent to construct line and is
to points through construct point, and the radius is two tangent circles of given
radius R; if construct point is on construct line, the construct fails.
Features which Circle:the construct result is four circles tangent with two construct lines with
can be simplified radius being given radius R, and two construct lines must be intersectant
- 456 -
to lines and not be parallel, otherwise the construct fails.
Circle:if given radius R is less than minimum tangent circle radius of construct
circle and construct line, the result is minimum tangent circle; otherwise,
if construct circle doesn’t intersects with construct line, the construct
Circle result is two tangent circles tangent to both construct line and construct
circle with radius being given radius R; if circle intersects with line,
return radius is four tangent circles of given radius; construct circle and
line must be on the same plane, otherwise the construct fails.
Table 2
“Through” construct features are circles
Line: if construct point is on construct circle, the result is a tangent line of
construct circle through construct point; if construct point is outside of
construct circle, two tangent lines are constructed with central points of
tangent lines being two tangent points; if construct point is center of
construct circle or the point and circle are not on the same plane, the
construct fails.
Plane: cylinder is constructed through construct circle and its nominal direction
Features which
and tangent plane is constructed through cylinder and construct point.
can be simplified
Circle:if given radius R is greater than 0 and less than minimum tangent circle
to points
radius of construct point and construct circle, the result is maximum
tangent circle and minimum tangent circle of construct point and
construct circle; if construct point is in construct circle and given radius R
is not greater than maximum circle of construct point and construct circle,
two tangent circles tangent to construct circle and through construct point
are constructed; if construct point is on construct circle or center of
construct circle, the construct fails.
Circle:if given radius R is less than minimum tangent circle radius of construct
circle and construct line, the construct result is minimum tangent circle;
Features which otherwise, if construct circle doesn’t intersects with construct line, the
can be simplified construct result is two tangent circles tangent to both construct line and
to lines construct circle with radius being given radius R; if circle intersects with
line, return radius is four tangent circles of given radius; construct circle
and line must be on the same plane, otherwise the construct fails.
Line:construct result is all tangent lines of two construct circles (the possible
Circle results are 2, 3, 4 tangent lines); if the two circles are on the same plane,
the construct fails.
Table 3
- 457 -
Construct-Project Feature Construct
A Possible construct result features can be:

Point
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Ellipse
B “Project” construct features can be:
Point
Edge point
Line
Circle
Arc
Ellipse
Slot
Measure point
On measure point:

CONST/POINT,F(PROJPT1),PROJPT,FA(CIR2)[1]
C “Project to” construct features can be:

Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
- 458 -
Cone
Sphere
Ellipse
Slot
Curve
Surface
CAD model
Workplane
D The following tables describe relations between construct features and construct result
features:
“Project
to”
“Project” construct features are point and edge point
construct
features
Point:is project point of construct point on line, and the direction is directed towards
Line construct point from project point. If construct point is on line, the direction is
the direction of line.
Point:is project point of construct point on plane, and the direction is directed towards
Plane construct point from project point. If construct point is on plane, the direction is
the direction of plane.
Point:is project point of construct point on circle, and the direction is directed towards
construct point from project point. If construct point is on circle, the direction is
Circle
directed towards construct point from center of circle, and if construct point is
on center of circle, the project fails.
Point:is project point of construct point on arc, and the direction is directed towards
construct point from project point. If construct point is on arc, the direction is
Arc
directed towards construct point from center of arc, and if construct point is on
center of circle, the project fails.
Point:is project point of construct point on cylinder, and the direction is directed
towards construct point from project point. If construct point is on cylinder, the
Cylinder
direction is nominal direction of cylinder at construct point, and if construct
point is on cylinder axis, the project fails.
Point:is project point of construct point on cone, and the direction is nominal direction
Cone of cone at project point. If construct point is on cone axis and in cone, the
project fails.
Point:is project point of construct point on sphere, and the direction is directed
towards construct point from project point. If construct point is on sphere, the
Sphere
direction is directed towards construct point from center of sphere, and if
construct point is on center of sphere, the project fails.
Point:is project point of construct point on ellipse, and the direction is nominal
Ellipse direction of ellipse at project point and is directed towards project point from
center of ellipse.
- 459 -
Slot
Point:is project point of construct point on curve, and the direction is nominal
Curve
direction of curve at project point
Point:is project point of construct point on surface, and the direction is nominal
Surface
direction of surface at project point
Point:is project point of construct point on workplane, and the direction is directed
Workplane towards construct point from project point. If construct point is on workplane,
the direction is direction of workplane.
Table 1
“Project
to”
“Project” construct features is circle
construct
features
Point:is projection of center of construct circle on line and projection of features with
Line
the same point on line.
Point:is projection of center of construct circle on plane and projection of features
with the same point on line.
Circle orif the nominal directions of construct circle of plane are the same, the
Plane
ellipse: result is project circle of construct circle on plane; if construct circle is
perpendicular to plane, there is no projection; otherwise, the result is
project ellipse of construct circle on plane.
Point:is projection of center of construct circle on circle and projection of features
Circle
Point:is projection of center of construct circle on arc and projection of features with
Arc
Point:is projection of center of construct circle on cylinder and projection of features
Cylinder
Point:is projection of center of construct circle on cone and projection of features with
Cone
Point:is projection of center of construct circle on sphere and projection of features
Sphere
Point:is projection of center of construct circle on ellipse and projection of features
Ellipse
Point:is projection of center of construct circle on slot and projection of features with
Slot
Point:is projection of center of construct circle on curve and projection of features
Curve
Point:is projection of center of construct circle on surface and projection of features
Surface
Point:is projection of center of construct circle on workplane and projection of
Workplane
features with the same point on line.
Table 2
- 460 -
“Project
to”
“Project” construct features is arc
construct
features
Point:is projection of center of construct arc on line and projection of features with the
Line
same point on line.
Point:is projection of center of construct arc on plane and projection of features with
Plane
Arc: if the directions of construct arc and nominal direction of plane are the same,
the result is project arc of construct arc on plane; otherwise, the project fails.
Point:is projection of center of construct arc on circle and projection of features with
Circle
Point:is projection of center of construct arc on arc and projection of features with the
Arc
same point on line.
Point:is projection of center of construct arc on cylinder and projection of features
Cylinder
Point:is projection of center of construct arc on cone and projection of features with
Cone
Point:is projection of center of construct arc on sphere and projection of features with
Sphere
Point:is projection of center of construct arc on ellipse and projection of features with
Ellipse
Point:is projection of center of construct arc on slot and projection of features with the
Slot
same point on line.
Point:is projection of center of construct arc on curve and projection of features with
Curve
Point:is projection of center of construct arc on surface and projection of features with
Surface
Point:is projection of center of construct arc on workplane and projection of features
Worlplane
Table 3
“Project
to”
“Project” construct features is ellipse
construct
features
Point:is projection of center of construct ellipse on line and projection of features with
Line
Point:is projection of center of construct ellipse on ellipse and projection of features
Plane Ellipse: if the directions of construct ellipse and nominal direction of plane are
the same, the result is project ellipse of construct ellipse on plane;
otherwise, the project fails.
- 461 -
Point:is projection of center of construct ellipse on circle and projection of features
Circle
Point:is projection of center of construct ellipse on arc and projection of features with
Arc
Point:is projection of center of construct ellipse on cylinder and projection of features
Cylinder
Point:is projection of center of construct ellipse on cone and projection of features
Cone
Point:is projection of center of construct ellipse on sphere and projection of features
Sphere
Point:is projection of center of construct ellipse on ellipse and projection of features
Ellipse
Point:is projection of center of construct ellipse on slot and projection of features with
Slot
Point:is projection of center of construct ellipse on curve and projection of features
Curve
Point:is projection of center of construct ellipse on surface and projection of features
Surface
Point:is projection of center of construct ellipse on workplane and projection of
Workplane
Table 4
“Project
to”
“Project” construct features is line
construct
features
Line:.is project line of construct line on plane; if construct line is perpendicular to
Plane
plane, the project fails.
Line:is construct line projected to plane of circle and is tangent to circle. Construct
line must be parallel to plane of circle, otherwise the project fails; if the line
Circle
between center of circle and center of construct line is nominal line of circle, the
project fails.
Cylinder Line:project line of construct line on cylinder.
Line:project line of construct line on sphere, and if construct line is through center of
Sphere
sphere, the project fails.
Line:project line of construct line on ellipse, and if the planes of construct line and
Ellipse
ellipse are not parallel, the project fails.
Slot
Curve Line:project line of construct line on curve.
Line:project line of construct line on workplane; if construct line is perpendicular to
Workplane
workplane, the project fails.
Table 5
“Project “Project” construct features is line (segment)
- 462 -
to”
construct
features
Point:is projection of center point of construct segment on plane and projection of
Plane
Line: project line of construct line on plane; if construct line is perpendicular to plane,
the project fails.
Point:is projection of center point of construct segment on circle and projection of
Line: is construct line projected to plane of circle and is tangent to circle. Construct
Circle
line must be parallel to plane of circle, otherwise the project fails; if the line
between center of circle and center of construct line is nominal line of circle,
the project fails.
Point:is projection of center point of construct segment on cylinder and projection of
Cylinder features with the same point on line.
Line: is construct line projected to cylinder.
Point:is projection of center point of construct segment on sphere and projection of
Sphere
Line: is construct line projected to sphere and if construct line is through center of
sphere, the project fails.
Point:is projection of center point of construct segment on ellipse and projection of
Ellipse
Line: is construct line projected to ellipse and if construct line and plane of ellipse is
not parallel, the project fails.
Slot
Point:is projection of center point of construct segment on curve and projection of
Curve features with the same point on line.
Line: is construct line projected to curve.
Point:is projection of center point of construct segment on workplane and projection
of features with the same point on line.
Workplane
Line: is construct line projected to workplane and if construct line and plane of ellipse
is not parallel, the project fails.
Table 6
- 463 -
Construct-Moving Feature Construct

Point
Edge point
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Ellipse
Slot
Curve
Surface
B “Moving” construct features can be:

Point
Edge point
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Ellipse
Slot
Curve
Surface
C “Move method” construct features can be:

Line
Plane
Circle
- 464 -
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
D Move methods：
Offset distance：
Input specific move values in dx dy dz window;
Vector distance：
Determine the position of ultimate construct result feature according to the direction of IJK and
distance D;
Material offset：
The role of material offset is zooming in or out features； the moved features can be wires or faces
features;
E The following table describes relations between construct features and construct result
features:
Move methods Moving construct results
- 465 -
Offset distance Move “move” construct feature according to specified offset.
Move “move” construct feature to offset from specified distance
Vector and distance
according to specified vector direction.
“Move method” construct Move “move” construct feature to offset from specified distance
feature is circle according to nominal direction of specified circle.
feature is arc according to nominal direction of specified arc.
feature is plane according to nominal direction of specified plane.
feature is line according to specified line direction.
feature is cylinder according to axis direction of specified cylinder.
feature is cone according to axis direction of specified cone.
feature is ellipse according to nominal direction of specified ellipse.
Table 1
- 466 -
Construct-Best Fit Feature Construct

Line
Plane
Circle
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Curve

Curve
Measure point
On measure point:
User can drop and drag measure point item from feature property page to construct features
list window of construct window, and list window after drag and drop will become what the
following shows:
in which icon shows that current drag and drop feature is measure point and is actual
value,but for nominal value, the icon is . The left list of list window shows name of
feature where measure point is located, and number on the right list shows which one the
measure point is for the feature. DMIS constructed and created by measure point is as follows:
CONST/PLANE,F(PLN_BF1),BF,FA(CIR2)[1],FA(CIR2)[2],FA(CIR2)[3]
Note: continuous measure points index in DMIS can be input by range, for example:
- 467 -
CONST/CIRCLE,F(BFCI1),BF,FA(CIR1)[1,3],FA(PLN1)[1],FA(PLN1)[3]
C Construct feature list window:

Construct feature list window will list all names of construct features and drag and drop of feature
from feature database or graphic area is acceptable for construct feature list window.
D Operation button:
Operation button includes <delete> and <delete all> which can be used to drag and drop feature in
construct feature list window.
features:
Bestfit construct
Number of features needing to be simplified to points
result features
Line At least two features which can be simplified to points are needed.
Plane At least three features which can be simplified to points are needed.
Circle At least three features which can be simplified to points are needed.
Cylinder At least five features which can be simplified to points are needed.
Cone At least six features which can be simplified to points are needed.
Sphere At least four features which can be simplified to points are needed.
Table 1
- 468 -
Construct-Mirror Feature Construct

Point
Edge point
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Ellipse
Slot
Curve
Surface
CAD model
B “Mirror” construct features can be:

Point
Edge point
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Ellipse
Slot
Curve
Surface
CAD model
C “Mirror about” construct features can be:
XY plane
YZ plane
ZX plane
- 469 -
X stacking axis
Y stacking axis
Z stacking axis
Coordinate origin
Point
Edge point
Line
Plane
Circle
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Slot
features:
“Mirror about”
“Mirror” construct feature
construct feature
Construct a feature symmetric with “mirror” construct feature with respect to
XY plane
XY plane.
YZ plane
YZ plane.
ZX plane
ZX plane.
X stacking axis
X stacking axis.
Y stacking axis
Y stacking axis.
Z stacking axis
Z stacking axis.
Coordinate origin
coordinate origin.
Point
point.
Edge point
edge point.
Line
line.
Plane
plane.
Circle
perpendicular line through center of circle.
Cylinder Construct a feature symmetric with “mirror” construct feature with respect to
- 470 -
axis of cylinder.
Cone
axis of cone.
Sphere
center point of sphere.
Slot
edge point.
Table 1
- 471 -
Construct-Bound Feature Construct

Line
Plane
Cylinder
Cone
Curve
B Bound construct features can be:

Point
Edge point
Plane
C To be bounded construct feature window:

To be bounded construct features can be line, plane, cylinder, cone and curve. Drag and drop of
feature from feature database and graphic area is acceptable for to be bounded construct feature
window.
D Bound construct feature list window:

Bound construct feature list window lists names of all construct features and drag and drop of
feature from feature database or graphic area is acceptable in bound construct feature list window.
features:
To be bounded
Bound construct features are point and edge point
construct features
Construct result is a segment cut out by two construct points from a line and
Line
the there must be two construct points and both are on the line.
Table 1
To be bounded
Bound construct feature is plane.
construct features
Construct result is a segment cut out by two construct planes from a line and
Line
the there must be two construct planes.
Construct result is a bounded plane cut out by construct planes and the there
Plane
must be three construct planes which can’t be parallel to be bounded construct
- 472 -
plane.
Construct result is a cylinder segment cut out by construct planes from a
Cylinder
cylinder and the there must be two construct planes.
Construct result is a cone segment cut out by construct planes from a cone and
Cone
the there must be two construct planes.
Table 2
- 473 -
Construct-Cone Function Construct

Point
Circle
B Construct feature can be:

Cone
C Construct method selection window and parameter input window:

There are three kind of methods that is “diameter” “distance” “apex”, and the selection of different
construct method will make side parameter input window change.
features:
Construct
Construct feature is cone
method
Circle: constructed center of circle passes through axis of construct cone, the
Diameter diameter is circle with given value and the plane of circle is perpendicular to axis
of cone.
Circle: center of circle passes through axis of construct cone, the plane of circle is
Distance perpendicular to axis of cone and the distance from apex of construct cone is
circle with given value.
Apex Point: is apex of construct cone.
Table 1
- 474 -
Construct-Extreme Point Feature Construct

Point

Circle
Sphere
Ellipse
Curve
Surface
“Bound” feature
“Plane”
C Construct methods can be:

Vector
X direction
Y direction
Z direction
“Bound” feature line, circle, ellipse and curve,
“Plane”：plane, cylinder, cone, sphere and surface.
“Apex”：point and edge point.
D Extreme value option:

There are two options “min extreme” and “max extreme” for extreme value option.
E Given vector input window:

When “vector” method is selected for construct method, given vector input window is used to
input the required vector value.
F The following table describes relations between construct features and construct result
features:
Construct methods is “VEC”
Minimum Minimum extreme value between Shape showed by construct circle and
Circle extreme Shape showed by plane constituted by point (0, 0, 0) and given vector (I, J,
value: K).
- 475 -
Minimum Minimum extreme value between Shape showed by construct sphere and
Sphere extreme Shape showed by plane constituted by point (0, 0, 0) and given vector (I, J,
value: K).
Minimum Minimum extreme value between Shape showed by construct ellipse and
Ellipse extreme Shape showed by plane constituted by point (0, 0, 0) and given vector (I, J,
value: K).
Minimum
Minimum extreme value between Shape showed by construct slot and Shape
Slot extreme
showed by plane constituted by point (0, 0, 0) and given vector (I, J, K).
value:
Minimum Minimum extreme value between Shape showed by construct curve and
Curve extreme Shape showed by plane constituted by point (0, 0, 0) and given vector (I, J,
value: K).
Minimum Minimum extreme value between Shape showed by construct surface and
Surface extreme Shape showed by plane constituted by point (0, 0, 0) and given vector (I, J,
value: K).
Table 1
Construct methods are “bound” feature, “plane” and “apex”
Minimum
“Bound” Minimum extreme value between Shape showed by construct “bound”
extreme
feature feature and Shape showed by construct method features.
value:
Minimum
Minimum extreme value between Shape showed by construct “plane” and
“Plane” extreme
Shape showed by construct method features.
value:
Table 2
- 476 -
Construct-Three Point Offset Plane Construct
A Possible construct result feature can be:

Plane
B Construct features can be :

Point
Edge point
Circle
Arc
Cone
Sphere
C Distance parameter input window:

There are three distance parameter input window to specify offset distances D1, D2, D3 away
form three construct features.
features:
Construct results
Point Plane :the plane whose distance from construct point is the input offset distance.
Plane:the plane whose distance from construct edge point is the input offset
Edge point
distance.
Circle Plane:the plane whose distance from construct circle is the input offset distance.
Arc Plane:the plane whose distance from construct arc is the input offset distance.
Cone Plane:the plane whose distance from construct cone is the input offset distance.
Plane:the plane whose distance from construct sphere is the input offset
Sphere
distance.
Table 1
- 477 -
Construct-Transfer Feature Construct
The role of transfer feature construct is to move the feature from one coordinate system to another
coordinate system;

Point
Edge point
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Torus
Ellipse
Slot
Curve
Surface
B “Transfer” construct feature can be:

Point
Edge point
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Torus
Ellipse
Slot
Curve
Surface
C “Transfer” feature list window:
- 478 -
Drag and drop of feature from feature database or directly from graphic area is acceptable in
“transfer” feature list window. The left bar of “label name” of “transfer” feature list window
shows names of drag and drop features, and the right bar of “transfer nominal features only” is
used to set that whether only nominal feature is to be transferred. If you check box, only nominal
feature will be transferred, and if you uncheck, both nominal feature and actual feature (if there is
an actual feature) will be transferred in the meanwhile.
The selction icons of select all/delete all can be convenient for the user to select all/delete
all ‘Nom only’ check box when there are many features；
D “Transfer” coordinate input window:

“Transfer” coordinate input window can be used to input coordinates before and after the transfer.
Drag and drop of coordinate from coordinate database is acceptable in “transfer” coordinate input
window.
E “Transfer” construct feature itself checkbox:

If you check ‘construct feature itself’ checkbox, only construct feature itself will be transferred
and new construct result feature will not be created.
Transfer feature construct is transferring the values of construct feature in “before transfer”
coordinate to values in “after transfer” coordinate, and creating a new feature being the same as
construct feature in type by these new values.
- 479 -
Construct-Multiple Points Offset Plane Construct

Plane
Point
Edge point
Circle
Arc
Cone
Sphere
C Construct feature list window:
Drag and drop of feature from feature database or directly from graphic area is acceptable in
construct feature list window. The left bar of construct feature list window shows the name of
drag-and-drop feature, and the right bar is used to input offset distance from the drag-and-drop
feature. By default, when the offset distance of feature dragged and dropped to list window is 0,
user can click offset distance in list window by mouse to type appropriate offset distance.
D Operation button:
For operation button, there are two buttons, that is, <delete> and <delete all> which can be used to
delete drag-and-drop feature in construct feature list window.
features:
Construct results
Plane:the plane whose distance from construct point feature is the input offset
Point
distance.
Plane:the plane whose distance from construct edge point feature is the input
Edge point
offset distance.
Plane:the plane whose distance from construct circle feature is the input offset
Circle
distance.
Plane:the plane whose distance from construct arc feature is the input offset
Arc
distance.
Plane:the plane whose distance from construct cone feature is the input offset
Cone
distance.
Plane:the plane whose distance from construct sphere feature is the input offset
Sphere
distance.
Table 1
- 480 -
Construct-Copy Create Feature Construct
A Nominal features can be:

Point
Edge point
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Ellipse
Slot
Torus
CAD model
Nominal features can be dragged and dropped from feature database/graphic area, and Nominal
features are acceptable in the window
B Construct result feature can be:

Point
Edge point
Line
Plane
Circle
Arc
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Ellipse
Slot
Torus
CAD model
D Methods： (as the following figure shows)

Line (linear copy) Rotation (angle control copy)
- 481 -
E Direction 1/2/3: copy directions of control features
F Step: interval distance of control copy features
G Repetition: repeated number in the axis directions of control copy features
H Rotation copy method:

Axis: rotation axis, can be the coordinate axis or the feature which can be simplified to line;
Step: rotation angle when copying feature
- 482 -
Construct-Sweep Construct
Sweep construct: feature which can be dragged and dropped is 2D feature

Method:
Vector distance: specify D value and IJK, and sweep the curve into a surface in the direction of
IJK;
Trim/extrude: if the construct result is a curve, the length of curve will be changed;
- 483 -
Sensor
Types of probe that RationalDMIS supports now are: automatic indexing probe, manually
operated probe, fixed probe and hard probe.
1. Automatic indexing probe: driven by motor and can be used for digital controller of computer
to regulate angle such as Renishaw PH10M probe.
2. Manually operated probe: can regulate angle but needs manual regulation of users.
3. Fixed probe: can not regulate angle but it is still trigger probe.
4. Hard probe: can not regulate angle and it is neither trigger probe. In general, additional trigger
equipment are needed to coordinate with hard probe and these trigger equipment include keyboard,
programmable long-distance key panel, pedal plate and so on.
Probe setting is one part of machine setting in RationalDMIS. Data in probe database is detached
from data in solution and the probe data will be automatically loaded when RationalDMIS starts.
Before sensor is used in actual measurement, verification or calibration shall be conducted.

Main purpose of verification is to calculate equivalent diameter of sensor and the equivalent
diameter is used as compensation for diameter of sensor in feature calculation. Therefore, only
after sensor calibration is conducted, compensation for sensor data can be correctly conducted and
more accurate measured data can be measured.
Attention: at the time of calibrating sensor, do not move calibration sphere. Moving
standard sphere will cause unnecessary additional error to verification of different
measuring bars.
At the time of measuring, whether measure features along correct direction of vector movement is
one important factor that influences correctness of measured data.
- 484 -
Wrong measuring direction Correct measuring direction
Upper left graph: the compensation that the system has on measuring point of ruby is under it but
the point after being compensated is not on measured plane; this causes so-called “cosineerror”.
But measuring in direction vertical to the plane at the time of measuring will get correct
compensation result.
- 485 -
Sensor-Create New Probe
If probe is needed to be measured, it is necessary to create a graphic father probe and select
“sensor” in “operation of toolbar selection”:
(Ctrl+F2 can be used to open operation toolbar of probe)
Select “build sensor” and you will enter interface of building sensor:
In data window of probe components in the right of interface, firstly to double click name of probe
by mouse to select type of probes:
After a certain component is selected, it will be shown in tree structure in the upper right of
- 486 -
assembly window; data window in lower right will show the next level of component name that
can be selected and match level by level;
Set software probe according to actual assembly conditions of probe and it may be necessary to
select different connector, measuring module, extension rod, joint, extension rod, measuring pin
and so on;
Only after type of probe is selected, operation button <Add Sensor> and <Add/ Activate> at the
bottom of the screen will be activated. Click <Add Sensor> or <Add/ Activate> to finish creation
- 487 -
of new sensor.
Newly-added probe will be automatically added to database window of sensor:
- 488 -
Sensor-Create Calibration Gage of Probe
RationalDMIS supports calibration gage of sphere and ring.

Select “sensor” in “operation of toolbar selection”:
(Ctrl+F2 can be used to open operation toolbar of probe)
Select “Calibrate Sensor”:
Click icon of “Calibration gage definition”:

Calibration gage definition interface is as follows:
Label of calibration gage is a pull-down menu and contains currently defined names of calibration
gage:
Thus pull-down box is editable and it allows keyboard to input a new name of calibration gage.
For example: to define a calibration sphere named “MySphere”:
- 489 -
To define nominal diameter of calibration sphere:
Input coordinate position of the center of calibration sphere:
Input appropriate placement direction of calibration sphere (I，J，K):
Input offset distance in offset window:
Confirm size of placed cylinder (cylinder diameter):
Click button of “definition” to finish definition of new calibration sphere:
- 490 -
Sensor-Sensor Calibration
A Sensor calibration panel:
Sensor label:
Sensor label shows name of sensor that needs to be calibrated. This window accepts drag and drop
sensor label from sensor database.
Nominal diameter: this window shows nominal diameter of sensor.
Actual diameter: this window shows actual diameter of sensor.
Calibration date: this window shows date and time of calibration sensor.
Update gage:
This check box indicates whether gage location of RationalDMIS needs to be calibrated. In
general conditions, at the time of calibrating the first sensor, this check box will be selected. When
this check box is selected, RationalDMIS will not calibrate sensor offset, otherwise, it will record
location of calibration gage. After positioning of calibration gage, check box shall not be selected
to allow other sensors can also use its diameter and offset.
Calibration gage:
Calibration gage window is an editable pull-down window and it contains all defined calibration
gage. RationalDMIS allows using several calibration gages at the same time and only location of
calibration gage is continuously defined. The icon in the left of pull-down box indicates type of
calibration gage.
Input window of calibration gage diameter:

Input window of calibration gage is an editable window. Users can input size of calibration gage
here. For a defined calibration gage selected in pull-down box of calibration gage, its diameter
will be automatically filled in this window.
Automatic calibration:
For DCC machine, it can automatically create calibration sequence, Users can use mouse wheel to
change count and once the count is greater than or equal to 4 and the current pull-down box of
calibration gage shows calibration gage of defined location, the button of generating point
- 491 -
will be activated. Click this button, calibration point will be generated in sliding window, as
shown in the following graph.
If you want to begin calibration, click measurement button and then the machine starts
calibratign sensor.
Click preview button , you may check generated calibration point in graphic area.
: Button of delete one

When list window of calibration point shows, button of delete one can delete selected point. When
list window of calibration point does not show, this button will delete the last calibration point.
: Button of delete all

When list window of calibration point shows, button of delete all will delete all calibration points
and hide list window of calibration points. When list window of calibration point does not show,
the button of delete all will delete calibration points in current buffer area.
: Form error:
This error is the error of sphere in the process of calibration and it means how calibration quality
is.
: Finish button: finish button will receive calibration data and store calibration parameter
in sensor database.
B Calibration gage definition panel:
Pull-down box of calibration gage label:

This pull-down box contains all defined name of calibration gage. This pull-down box is editable
and allows inputting a name of new calibration gage through keyboard.
- 492 -
Calibration gage location:
Calibration gage location (X, Y, Z) is the center of calibration sphere.
Calibration gage label, calibration gage diameter and calibration gage location define a “free
calibration gage”. “Free calibration gage” can be used to calibrate sensor. For manually operated
measuring machine or manually calibrated DCC measuring machine, a “free calibration gage” is
enough. For DCC measuring machine, RationalDMIS can generate calibration point and
measuring machine can automatically calibrate. At the time of automatic calibration,
RationalDMIS needs calibration gage to place information to generate calibration points that will
not collide.
Placement parameter of calibration gage:

Placement of calibration gage consists of placement direction (I, J, K) and size of placed cylinder
(cylinder diameter), as shown in the following graph. It is assumed that placement point of
cylinder diameter is in the opposite location of placement direction.
C Calibration sensor setting:
Click icon of “calibration sensor setting”, the software will switch to the following interface:
- 493 -
Calibration sensor setting panel is used to control parameter of approach distance, retract
distance, clear distance, search distance at the time of CNC calibration.
- 494 -
Sensor-Sensor Calibration Shortcut
Before sensor is used to measure, it is necessary to conduct sensor calibration to confirm size of
sensor compensation.
RationalDMIS has provided several methods of sensor calibration and the initial part only simply
introduces one of them.
Open sensor database in double database window:
Select appropriate calibration gage and set point number of sensor:
Use the mouse to click sensor label needed to be calibrated and drag and drop to this calibration
gage:
After dragging and dropping, the system will prompt whether to continue or cancel calibration.
Press Continue and the system will automatically finish calibration:
- 495 -
RationalDMIS also supports one-time drag and drop calibration of several kinds of sensors and
sensors with several angles. For sensors whose angles need to be manually altered, the system will
automatically pop up prompt dialog box to remind users to alter sensor angle at the time of
calibration of replacing sensor angle. For automatic sensor, the system will finish drag and drop
calibration of all sensor angles at a time. If users have equipped replacing support of sensor, the
system will automatically replace sensor at replacing support of sensor and finish calibration at the
time of conducting calibration on simultaneously dragged and dropped different types of sensors.
- 496 -
Test Head-Probe Assembling
Window of probe assembling is divided into 3 areas. Namely, diagram window of probe
assembling: display the state of probe assembling; data window of probe parts: probe parts are
selectable; window of probe placement information and operation button.
Diagram window of probe assembling:

Diagram window displays the process of probe
assembling. When window of probe
assembling is selected, it will cover the original
content of diagram window. When a part is
selected or not selected in data window of
probe parts, corresponding update will occur in
display of diagram window.
Data window of probe parts:

Data window of probe parts is a relational data base of probe parts. In order to assemble a probe,
users need to double click name of the part, thus adding a part to the probe. When a part is
selected, selectable parts of the next level will occur. Probe assembling is completed by the time
the selected part has no more subparts. Then, operation button <Probe adding> and <Probe
- 497 -
adding/enabling> at the bottom of the screen will be enabled.
Generally, data window of probe parts will list probe name/length/diameter. The majority of probe
names are Renishaw probe names. Only the ultimate probe parts display its diameter.
Users may fail to find the needed probe parts in database of parts. In this case, RationalDMIS has
provided a function that allows the user-defined probe parts to be added into RationalDMIS.
User-defined probe function:
In user-define faceplate, users may define probe, extension piece and stylus by themselves;
Create user-defined probe:
“Label” is used to display name of probe head. Probe head of two different types can be created:
fixed probe and hard probe. Drop-down box of “Probe Type” contains these two options. “Diam”
indicates diameter of probe head. “Length” is very important for it will be adopted in calculation
of total length of probe assembling. “Lower thread” is a drop-down box, containing types of parts
- 498 -
that can be connected to user-defined probe head. Therefore, when creating a probe head, it is
required to learn type of part to be connected to probe and it is of great importance to select proper
connecting thread.
Create parts of extension rod:
“Label” is used to display name of the newly extended part. Extension parts are cylindrical.
“Diam’ and “Length” are used to set the diameter and length of cylindrical parts. Drop-down box
of “Upper thread” and “Lower thread” contains possible connecting types.
Create stylus:
Once a probe is defined by the user and added to RationalDMIS, this user-defined probe will
become part of data of probe parts. It can be used as the predefined Renishaw probe part of
RationalDMIS. User-defined probe is stored at document “Installation Dir/ProbeModel/
CustomSensor.dat”. Deletion of this document will cause missing of all user-defined probes.
Create stylus:
- 499 -
Stylus of types shown in Fig. 2 can be created: spherical stylus and disc stylus;
“Label” is used to display name of the new stylus. Stylus is the last part of probe assembling as it
only has upper thread without lower thread.
Once a probe is defined by the user and added to RationalDMIS, this user-defined probe will
become part of data of probe parts. It can be used as the predefined Renishaw probe part of
RationalDMIS.
Information window of probe placement and operation button:
Probe name:
For assembly of new probe, Rational DMIS will provide a default probe label automatically. This
label can be modified through keyboard input. Probe label must use a legal DMIS label name.
DMIS label name:

Label length is 1~64 character (s). Legal characters include letters (A-Z, a-z), numbers (0-9),
broken line “-”, period “.” and underline “_”. Illegal characters input by users will be replaced by
underline;
Calibration Form Error tolerance:
Default value for calibration of Form Error tolerance is 0.01mm, which is saved in registry. When
this window is switched to, RationalDMIS will read the numerical value saved by last time.
Calibration of Form Error tolerance is corresponding to the type of each single probe, indicating
that probe of each type has its own Form Error tolerance in calibration.
Probe placement:
Probe installation: how a formulated and assembled probe is connected to measuring machine.
In the figure above, the assembled probe is placed downward at direction of –Z axis, with red light
of the probe facing to direction of –Y axis, without offset. Offset value indicates the offset
distance between center shaft of assembled probe and end of shaft of measuring machine. For
- 500 -
instance, when Dx is 20, measuring machine and probe will be connected as shown in the figure
below:
Drop-down box of “Shape type” has the option which allows inserting an object between end of
shaft of measuring machine and probe. There are two shapes to be selected: cylindrical shape and
block-shape. For inserting a cylinder or block, one important thing is to add the height of cylinder
of width of block into the offset, as the figure below.
When parameters of probe placement change, <Update of probe placement> will be enabled. New
settings will take effect at click of this bottom.
<Probe adding> bottom:

<Probe adding> bottom adds the newly assembled probe to probe database. <Probe adding>
bottom will not enable the added probe simultaneously.
<Probe adding/enabling> bottom:

<Probe adding/enabling> bottom adds the newly assembled probe to probe database. < Probe
adding/enabling> bottom will enable the added probe simultaneously to become present probe.
- 501 -
Test Head-Define Angle of New Probe
RationalDMIS provides various methods to define the angle of new probe. In primary
acquaintance of RationalDMIS, only this method is briefly introduced.
Select “Test head” in “Toolbar of operation selection”:
(Ctrl+F2 may be used to open toolbar of probe operation)
Select “New probe”:
For interface to structure a new probe angle, the operation window will be enabled only when the
present probe is indexing probe. Indexing probe may be of manual index or automatic index.
Parent probe label: the root probe when both angle A and angle B are 0. All the probes of
sub-rotation angle are defined based on parent probe.
Label of newly established probe: Rational DMIS will provide a label of newly established probe
automatically, and this label uses the present probe label as its prefix. Users may also modify this
label through keyboard input. Probe label must be a legal DMIS label name.
Angle can be manually input, and the angle input must be multiple of increment angel.
Use features to select the optimal mesuring angle: drag and drop a feature in assist box (as the
figue below PLN4), angel AB fills in the optimal measuring angle automatically;
- 502 -
The angle can also be changed by changing position of the two scroll bars. When position of scroll
bar is changed, probe in graphic area will change its angel correspondingly.
It is selectable to set different increment angle of probe:
When definition for new probe angel is completed, select <Probe adding> or <Probe
adding/enabling> to add probe of new angle.
- 503 -
Test Head-Definition and Automatic Calibration of Probe
Click “Create new probe angel” icon in toolbar of probe, to enter into operation interface of
definition for new probe angle and automatic calibration:
The operation window will be enabled only when the present probe is indexing probe. Indexing
probe may be of manual index or automatic index.
Root probe Label:

Root probe label is probe when both angle A and angle B are 0. All the probes of sub-rotation
angle are defined based on root probe.
Angle selection window:

Angle selection window contains multiple check boxes, with each check box representing a legal
probe angle rotation; Once a check box is selected, so does the corresponding rotation angle. By
default, all check boxes are not selected, and users may select or refuse to select a certain check
box by clicking them mouse.
Angel selection in this window may also be completed by clicking and selecting at graphic area.
When the window has been enabled, click and select a new angle at a certain feature in graphic
area with the mouse. This new angle is calculated according to theoretic vector quantity of the
feature clicked and selected. It is the angle when probe direction and theoretical vector quantity
direction of feature are mostly like to be parallel.
Display the angle presently selected:
When a check box has been selected or otherwise selecting angle in graphic area, the angular
value selected will be displayed in these two windows.
Definition button:
<Definition> value will create all the probes of selected angles in angle selection window, and add
them to probe database.
- 504 -
Calibration gauge:
Calibration gauge adopts drag and drop of calibration gauge in probe database. The calibration
gauge dragged and dropped will be applied in subsequent calibration.
Calibration point:
Input the point in expectation to be calibrated
Calibration button:
<Calibration> button establishes calibration for all angle probes selected in angle selection
window. <Calibration> button will define a probe without definition preferentially.
<Calibration> button has different functions with auto-learning model opened or closed. If the
auto-learning model is opened, <Calibration> button will generate DMIS statements for
established probes. If the auto-learning model is closed, <Calibration> button will take actual
calibrations and the machine will move under on-line state.
- 505 -
Other Operation Applications of Test Head-Probe
How to select and enable a probe?
Open probe data area at window of dual data area:
In order to select and activate a probe,

click the probe you want to enable, then open it with right-hand button and select “Enable”; the
selected probe will be enabled by then, and probe of corresponding graphic window will be also
be updated immediately. As the example below: original probe is ROOTSN4, if
ROOTSN4_A45_B45 is selected and enabled, the current probe will be replaced as
ROOTSN4_A45_B45.
Apply drag and drop to create new probe angel: probe nodes of probe data area adopt drag and
drop from features of feature data area and graphic window as well as other root nodes.
Adoption of drag and drop from features of feature data area

As the figure below: select plane PLN1 with left mouse button, then drag and drop it at probe
node of probe data area.
The display of blue arrow in front of probe node indicates that drag and drop can be realized and a
new probe angle will also occur according to vector quantity direction of plane. A new probe angle
- 506 -
will be added as well as enabled by releasing left mouse button, and probe angle of corresponding
graphic window will also be updated to the probe angel newly added.
Adoption of drag and drop from features of graphic window
As the figure below: select proper test point selector [Yellow Wireframe], making the feature to be
dragged and dropped to become selectable in graphic window, then click with left mouse button to
select it, then drag features of graphic window.
When a feature is dragged and dropped under the probe node of probe data area, the display of
blue arrow indicates that drag and drop can be realized and a new probe angle will also occur
according to vector quantity direction of the feature dragged and dropped.
A new probe angle will be added as well as enabled by releasing left mouse button, and probe
angle of corresponding graphic window will also be updated to the probe angel newly added.
Drag and drop of other root nodes
As the figure below: click with left mouse button to select indexing probe node ROOTSN4. Drag
and drop ROOTSN4 root node at another root node ROOTSN3.
All angle settings under ROOTSN4 node will be copied under ROOTSN3 node by releasing the
mouse and finishing drag and drop. As shown in the figure below.
Verify test head appled in DMIS program only:
- 507 -
Select “verify the probe in DMIS program” with right-hand button in verification gauge, then
software will inquire the probe lables called in DMIS program and verify all these probes;
- 508 -
Installation Verification of Test Head-Test Base
Installation verification funcion of test base is used to adjust installation error of angle B of test
head;
Operation sequence:
Drag and drop the 2 angel degree lables of the same probe to probe 1 and probe 2 (the angle
difference of 180 degree shall be best);
Click “Start” icon, and measure 4 points at verification gauge in 2 angles

respectively, and click “Verification” icon afterwards to complete installation verification of test
base;
- 509 -
Tolerance
Tolerance operation area includes: Distance, angle, angularity, perpendicularity, parallelism,

position, cylindricity, coordinate tolerance, concentricity/ coaxiality, circular runout, total runout,
circularity, cone angle, diameter tolerance, radius tolerance, flatness, straightness, point profile,
curve profile, surface profile, symmetry and width.
(Note: the tolerance label picture is only used as a teaching example.)
Feature name: drag and drop “measured feature”;

Reference feature name: drag and drop “reference feature;
- 510 -
- 511 -
Tolerance-Distance Tolerance
Tolerance name: it consists of 1-64 characters. Legal characters includes letters (A-Z, a-z),
numbers (0-9), dash ‘-’, full stop ‘.’, and underline ‘_’
Feature name: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include point, edge point, line,
plane, circle, cylinder, sphere, arc, ellipse, curve, surface and slot.
Evaluation method: there are three evaluation methods including average evaluation method,
maximum evaluation method and minimum evaluation method.
Distance type：PT2PT，X axis, Y axis and Z axis
Nominal distance: when you select use evaluated nom dist, the software will evaluate nominal
distance automatically. If you do not select it, you can input a nominal distance.
ISO tolerance: you can select none, fine, medium, coarse, very coarse. It will write the
corresponding value in up tolerance and low tolerance when you select the appropriate grade.
Up tolerance and low tolerance: fill in according to requirements of the drawing.
Define type：nominal/limit, when you select “nominal” , nominal distance will be evaluated and
when you select “limit” , nominal will not be evaluated. “Deviation” shows the actual distance
between the two points.
Use evaluated nominal distance: when “use evaluated nom dist” is not selected, nominal
distance will become editable, you can input dimension designed and given by engineering
drawing and evaluate tolerance.
Actual: actual distance
Deviation: it reflects conditions that are out of tolerance. If the difference value between actual
distance and nominal distance is within the range of tolerance, then it shows In Tol. If the
difference value is out of the range, then it shows the specific value it exceeds.
Define tolerance: you can define a tolerance label in tolerance database.
Accept: it will evaluate distance tolerance of features and record it in tolerance database.
For example：
- 512 -
There are two distance label methods in the picture above:
Nominal method: 125 +-0.02, nominal distance is 125, up tolerance is +0.02 and low tolerance is
-0.02. Evaluation in the software is as follows:
Limit method: up limit is 125.02 and low limit is 124.98. Evaluation in the software is as follows:
- 513 -
Tolerance-Angle Tolerance
Feature name: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include line, plane, circle,
cylinder, arc, cone, ellipse and slot.
Nominal angle: when you select “use evaluated nom angle”, the software evaluates the nominal
angle of 2 features. If it is not selected, you can input nominal angle.
Actual: actual angle
Deviation: it reflects conditions that are out of tolerance. If the difference value between actual
angle and nominal angle is within the range of tolerance, then it shows In Tol. If the difference
value is out of the range, then it shows the specific value it exceeds.
Define tolerance: you can define a tolerance label in feature tolerance area.
Accept: it will evaluate angle tolerance of features and record it in tolerance database.
For example：
Labeling of angle tolerance between two planes is shown in the picture above. Nominal angle is
135°, up tolerance is +0.2, and low tolerance is -0.2. Evaluation in the software is as follows:
- 514 -
Tolerance- Angularity Tolerance
Feature name: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include line, plane, cone and
cylinder.
Nominal angle: it is required to input value of nominal angle manually.
Tolerance band: fill in according to the requirements of the drawing.
Length: for features to be evaluated which can be simplified into lines, value of length is used to
assign the length of evaluation.
Reference features: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include line, plane, cone,
and cylinder.
Actual: evaluation result of angularity
Deviation: it reflects conditions that are out of angularity tolerance. If the evaluation result of
angularity tolerance is within the range of tolerance, then it shows In Tol. If the result is out of the
range, then it shows the specific value it exceeds.
Accept: it will evaluate angularity tolerance of features and record it in tolerance database.
For example:
Labeling of angularity tolerance is shown in the picture above. Reference feature is base plane A.
Nominal angle is 45°, and tolerance band is 0.02. Evaluation method in the software is as follows:
- 515 -
Tolerance- Perpendicularity Tolerance
numbers (0-9), dash ‘-’, full stop ‘.’, and underline ‘_’,
cylinder.
Reference features: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include line, plane, cone,
and cylinder.
Actual: evaluation result of perpendicularity tolerance
Deviation: it reflects conditions that are out of perpendicularity tolerance. If the evaluation result
of perpendicularity tolerance is within the range of tolerance, then it shows In Tol. If the result is
out of the range, then it shows the specific value it exceeds.
Accept: it will evaluate perpendicularity tolerance of features and record it in tolerance database.
For example：
Perpendicularity of cylinder to base plane A is shown in the circle of the picture above. Tolerance
band is 0.1. Evaluation method in the software is as follows:
- 516 -
Tolerance-Parallelism tolerance
cylinder.
Reference features: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include line, plane, cone and
cylinder.
Actual: evaluation result of parallelism tolerance
Deviation: it reflects conditions that are out of parallelism tolerance. If the evaluation result of
parallelism tolerance is within the range of tolerance, then it shows In Tol. If the result is out of
the range, then it shows the specific value it exceeds.
Accept: it will evaluate parallelism tolerance of features and record it in tolerance database.
For example：
Evaluation of parallelism of plane to reference plane B is shown in the circle of the picture above.
Tolerance band is 0.02. Evaluation method in the software is shown as follows:
- 517 -
Tolerance-Position Tolerance
Feature name: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include point, edge point, circle,
sphere, slot, cylinder, plane and arc.
Tolerance band: fill in according to the requirements of the drawing
Reference feature: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include point, edge point,
circle, sphere, arc, ellipse, cylinder, cone, line, plane, slot and DATUM data.
Datum method: X axis, Y axis and Z axis
Actual: actual position
Deviation: position deviation
Accept: it will evaluate position tolerance of features and record it in tolerance database.
For example：
Position tolerance of cylinder is labeled in the circle of the picture above. Reference features are
three base planes of A, B and C. Tolerance is 0.1. Evaluation method in the software is shown as
follows:
- 518 -
Tolerance-Cylindricity Tolerance
Tolerance name: It consists of 1-64 characters. Legal characters includes letters (A-Z, a-z),
Feature name: feature type which can be dragged and dropped is cylinder
Actual: actual cylindricity
Deviation: deviation of cylindricity
Accept: it will evaluate cylindricity tolerance of features and record it in tolerance database.
For example：
Cylindricity tolerance is shown in the circle of the picture above. Evaluation method in the
software is as follows:
- 519 -
Tolerance-Coordinate Tolerance
Feature name: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include point, edge point, line,
plane, circle, sphere, arc, ellipse, cylinder and cone.
ISO tolerance: none, fine, mediate, coarse, very coarse
Actual: actual coordinate tolerance
Deviation: coordinate tolerance
Define tolerance: you can define a tolerance label in tolerance database
Accept: it will evaluate coordinate tolerance of features and record it in tolerance database
- 520 -
Tolerance- Concentricity Tolerance
Feature name: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include circle, cylinder, arc, line,
and cone.
Tolerance band: fill in according to requirements of the drawing
Reference features: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include circle, cylinder, arc,
line and cone.
Actual: evaluation result of concentricity/ coaxiality
Deviation: concentricity/coaxiality deviation
Define tolerance: you can define a tolerance label in tolerance database.
Accept: it will evaluate concentricity/ coaxiality tolerance of features and record it in tolerance
database
For example：
Evaluation of coaxiality of a cylinder is shown in the circle of the picture above. Reference feature
is base cylinder circle D. Tolerance band is 0.1. Evaluation method is shown as follows:
- 521 -
Tolerance-Circular Runout Tolerance
Feature name: feature type which can be dragged and dropped is circle.
Reference features: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include circle, cylinder, arc,
line and cone.
Actual: actual circular runout
Deviation: circular runout deviation
Define tolerance: you can define a tolerance label in feature tolerance area
Accept: it will evaluate circular runout tolerance of features and record it to feature database.
For example：
Circular runout tolerance is evaluated in the picture above. Reference feature is base cylinder D.
Evaluation method in the software is shown as follows:
- 522 -
Tolerance-Total Runout Tolerance
Feature name: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include cylinder and plane.
Reference feature: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include circle, cylinder, arc,
line and cone.
Actual: actual total runout
Deviation: total runout deviation
Deviation tolerance: you can define a tolerance label in feature tolerance area
Accept: it will evaluate total runout tolerance of features and record it in tolerance database
For example：
Total runout of cylinder is evaluated in the picture above. Reference feature is base cylinder D.
Evaluation method is shown as follows:
- 523 -
Tolerance-Circularity Tolerance
Feature name: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include circle, cone, sphere and
arc.
Actual: actual circularity tolerance
Deviation: circularity deviation
Accept: it will evaluate circularity tolerance of features and record it in feature database
For example：
Circularity tolerance of circle is evaluated in the picture above. Evaluation method is shown as
follows:
- 524 -
Tolerance-Cone Tolerance
Feature name: feature type which can be dragged and dropped is cone.
Actual: actual cone
Deviation: cone deviation
Accept: it will evaluate cone tolerance of features and record it in feature database
- 525 -
Tolerance-Diameter Tolerance
Feature name: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include circle, cylinder and
sphere
ISO tolerance: standard range of up tolerance and low tolerance defined by ISO is available for
diameters within 3MM-50MM
Actual: actual diameter
Deviation: diameter deviation
Accept: it will evaluate diameter tolerance of features and record it in feature database.
Evaluation in the software is as follows:
- 526 -
Tolerance-Radius Tolerance
Feature name: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include circle, cylinder, arc and
sphere
Actual: actual radius
Deviation: radius deviation
Accept: it will evaluate radius tolerance of features and record it in feature database
For example：
Radius tolerance of arc is evaluated in the picture above. Evaluation method is shown as follows:
- 527 -
Tolerance-Flatness Tolerance
Feature name: feature type which can be dragged and dropped is plane.
Feature band: fill in according to requirements of the drawing.
Actual: actual flatness
Deviation: flatness deviation
Accept: it will evaluate flatness tolerance of features and record it in feature database
For example：
Flatness of plane is evaluated in the picture above. Tolerance band is 0.02. Evaluation method is as
follows:
- 528 -
Tolerance-Straightness Tolerance
Feature name: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include line and cylinder.
Tolerance band: fill in according to requirements of the drawing.
MMC: entity requirements. Options are none, MMC, LMC and RFS.
Actual: actual flatness
Deviation: straightness deviation
Accept: it will evaluate flatness tolerance of features and record it in feature database
Evaluation method in the software is shown as follows:
- 529 -
Tolerance-Point Profile Tolerance
Feature name: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include points and edge points
Reference features: points and edge points
Actual: actual point profile
Deviation: point profile deviation
Accept: it will evaluate point profile tolerance of features and record it in feature database
- 530 -
Tolerance- Curve Profile Tolerance
Feature name: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include curve, line, circle, arc
and slot.
Reference features: feature type which can be dragged and dropped is line.
Maximum error: Maximum point error
Minimum error: Minimum point error
Deviation: it shows whether it is out of tolerance
Accept: it will evaluate curve profile tolerance of features and record it in feature database
For example：
Curve profile tolerance standard of ISO method is shown in the picture above. Tolerance band is
0.05. Evaluation method in the software is shown as follows:
- 531 -
RationalDMIS curve profile evalution supports ISO1101 Standard and Y14.5 Standard. For
standartds using different standards, evaluation needs to select different algorithm accordingly in
the software. Setting in the application setup is as follows:
ISO1101 uses tolerance band and Y14.5 uses up tolerance and low tolerace. Interface of Y14.5
method is as follows:
- 532 -
Tolerance- Surface Profile Tolerance
Feature name: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include surface, plane, cylinder,
sphere, and cone
Reference features: feature type which can be dragged and dropped is plane
Maximum error: Maximum point error
Minimum error: Minimum point error
Deviation: it shows whether it is out of tolerance
Accept: it will evaluate surface profile tolerance of features and record it in feature database
Surface profile tolerance of surface is evaluated in the picture above. Tolerance band is 0.1.
Evaluation in the software is shown as follows:
RationalDMIS surface profile evalution supports ISO1101 Standard and Y14.5 Standard. For
- 533 -
standartds using different standards, evaluation needs to select different algorithm accordingly in
the software. Setting in the application setup is as follows:
ISO1101 uses tolerance band and Y14.5 uses up tolerance and low tolerace. Interface of Y14.5
method is as follows:
- 534 -
Tolerance-Symmetry Tolerance
Feature name: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include points, edge points, line,
plane, circle, cylinder, cone, sphere, arc, ellipse and slot.
Reference features: feature types which can be dragged and dropped include plane, line, cylinder
and cone
Actual: actual symmetry
Deviation: symmetry deviation
Accept: it will evaluate symmetry tolerance of features and record it in feature database
For example：
Symmetry of plane 2 is evaluated in the picture above. Reference feature is plane. Tolerance band
is 0.1. Evaluation method software is shown as follows:
- 535 -
Tolerance-Width Tolerance
Feature name: feature type which can be dragged and dropped is slot.
Evaluation direction: long axis direction, short axis direction and vector direction
Evaluation method: none, maximum and minimum
Actual: actual width
Deviation: deviation of width
Accept: it will evaluate width tolerance of features and record it in feature database
For example：
Slot width tolerance of long axis and short axis is shown in the picture above. Up tolerance and
low tolerance are 0.02 and -0.02 respectively. Evaluation method in the software is shown as
follows:
- 536 -
Coordinate System
It is also important to establish a correct coordinate system in precise measurement. To obtain a

correct detection report, we should determine coordinate of the part to be detected in measuring
machine before defecting any part. It is necessary to create a coordinate system through
RationalDMIS.
Function of coordinate workarea is: mainly to align part and establish coordinate of the part to be
detected in the measuring machine, establish coordinate of digital analogy alignment workpiece
and establish a proper reference coordinate as per measuring requirement, etc.
Click “coordinate” in operation selection toolbar:
Operation workarea interface is then switched to coordinate workarea interface:
Coordinate toolbar: includes translation, rotation, 3-2-1 method, six point bestfit coordinate and
other ways of establish coordinate.
Coordinate operating window: different ways of establishing coordinate are corresponding to

different coordinate operating window, and details can be seen as follows.
- 537 -
Coordinate system - Coordinate Translation
A From CRD:
“From CRD” is the basic coordinate system ready for translation. The window will display name
of current coordinate system as default. A coordinate system can be dragged and dropped from a
coordinate system data window to this window. Coordinate system in “From CRD” can be current
coordinate system or other coordinate system. Coordinate system in “From CRD” is the basic
coordinate system for relative translation.
B New coordinate system:

New coordinate system is the name of new coordinate system after translation. In default,
RationalDMIS will provide an available name for the next coordinate system. Users can input
what they want to modify name of the coordinate system. Name of new coordinate system should
be a legal DMIS label name, or the button is grey and cannot be used.
DMIS label name:
Label length is composed of 1-64 characters. Legal character includes letter (A-Z, a-z), figure
(0-9), dash ‘-’, period ‘.’ and underline ‘_’.
C. Input window:
Input window allows the user to input specific value of translation; input window can accept
drag-and-drop of features that are simplified into points. These features can be dragged and
dropped into input window from data field of features or directly from graphical window. It can
also drag and drop real number variable from data variable data field to input window.
When translation quantity is a feature, translation is absolute translation. Result of absolute

translation is to move coordinate origin to where can be simplified into feature points. Absolute
translation is irrelevant to reference coordinate system.
When translation quantity is real number variable, translation is relative translation. Result of
relative translation is to translate the reference coordinate system along its coordinate axis
direction by a distance, the value of which is input in the input window. Relative translation is to
translate the reference coordinate system along its coordinate axis direction, and the
translation distance is equal to the value that input in the input window under current
distance unit.
D Indicator icon:
- 538 -
These icons indicate input type of input window on the right of such icons.
: No input or illegal input
: Legal value input or real variable input
: Feature input. This icon indicates the feature type input, and the icon color indicates
whether the feature is real feature or theoretical feature (for example, this icon shows real point
feature).
Red shows real feature while blue shows theoretical feature. When there is real feature, click
the icon to switch between theoretical feature and real feature.
E Operating button:
When translation is impossible, these operating buttons cannot be used, for example, when all
input windows are empty or any input window includes illegal input. Condition for operating
button being available is: at least one input window has legal input and all other input
windows are free of illegal input.
< Preview >： When the button is useable, click the button and users can view
new coordinate systems that will be generated from graphic area.
But the button will not generate any new coordinate systems.
Note: coordinate system can be previewed only when
“automatically display CRD” in “option icon and pull-down
menu” in toolbar of graphical window.
<Add coordinate The button can establish a new coordinate system from new
system >: coordinate system window. But do not activate the coordinate
system into current one.
<Add/activate The button carries out function of <add coordinate system> button
coordinate system >: and activate the new coordinate system into current coordinate
system at the same time.
DMIS:
D(New Crd Label) = TRANS/ …
Details of this statement can refer to DMIS 5.0 specification.
Update the theoretical value: when a new coordinate system is established, theoretical value of
the feature is transferred under the new coordinate system, so theoretical value of the feature
before transformation is the same as that under “theoretical coordinate system”.
- 539 -
Coordinate System – Coordinate Rotation
Select “rotation”:
“Rotation” interface is as follows:
“From CRD” is the basic coordinate system ready for rotation. "New coordinate system” is the
new coordinate system generated after rotation:
Rotation axis selection window: it is a pull-down select box with 3 options, including X Axis, Y
Axis and Z Axis.
Rotation axis selection window can also accept drag-and-drop of features that are simplified into
points. These features can be dragged and dropped into rotation axis selection window from data
field of features or directly from graphical window. In case of selecting a feature in the rotation
axis selection window that can be simplified into line, it shows that the “new coordinate system”
is from “reference coordinate system” due to rotation along this line feature. Such rotation is the
overall rotation that includes coordinate origin of “reference coordinate”.
Input proper rotation angle in the rotation angle input window:
When “using feature” is selected, the interface will switch to control window of using feature.
- 540 -
It can input linear element in the edit box under the align direction to align “align direction”
coordinate axis of coordinate system and linear element dragged and dropped in the edit box.
<Add coordinate > and <Add and activate coordinate > can be activated only when there is at least
one input window having legal input and all other input windows are free of illegal input. Click
<Add coordinate > or <Add/activate coordinate > to complete coordinate translation and generate
new coordinate.
- 541 -
Coordinate System – Create Coordinate
A Current coordinate system

“Create Coordinate” can establish a complete coordinate system. If it is under complete control,
the new coordinate is irrelevant to current coordinate system. If it is under partial control, the new
coordinate system is related to current coordinate system.
B New coordinate system

It shows the name of coordinate system established through ‘Create Coordinate’. In case of default,
the system will generate a legal coordinate system name in this window. If the use expects special
coordinate system name, he can input a name that he likes in the window. Name of the new
coordinate system should be a legal DMIS label name, or Action button will be forbidden to use.
DMIS label name:
C Coordinate axis control:

The method of establishing coordinate system through ‘Create Coordinate’ is to control directions
of primary axis and counter axis of the new coordinate system through inputting direction of
feature. The first pull-down list window is the primary axis control window, in which there is the
following options:
+Z Dir
-Z Dir
+Y Dir
-Y Dir
+X Dir
-X Dir
The method of establishing coordinate system through ‘Create Coordinate’ can ensure that axis
direction selected by the new coordinate system is in strict accordance with that of input feature.
The input feature here should be such type that can be simplified into linear element.
The second pull-down list window controls counter axis of the new coordinate system. Options in
the pull-down list window are dynamically changed according to direction of the primary axis.
Such dynamic change can ensure that options of counter axis are free of direction selected by the
primary axis. For example, if the primary axis selects +Z direction, options of the counter axis can
be
+Y Dir
-Y Dir
- 542 -
+X Dir
-X Dir
The method of establishing coordinate system through ‘Create Coordinate’ can ensure that
direction selected by the new coordinate system can be the same as that of feature which can be
simplified into linear element. When input feature is not vertical to direction of the primary axis,
vertical components of the line direction and primary axis direction will be used.
D Axis control feature input window:

Top input window can accept drag-and-drop of features that are simplified into lines. These
features can be dragged and dropped into input window from data field of features or directly from
graphical window. This input window is primary coordinate axis direction and position control.
The second above input window can accept drag-and-drop of features that are simplified into lines.
These features can be dragged and dropped into input window from data field of features or
directly from graphical window. This input window is counter coordinate axis direction and
position control.
The third input window above can accept drag-and-drop of features that are simplified into points.
These features can be dragged and dropped into input window from data field of features or
directly from graphical window. This input window is position control of the third coordinate axis.
E Indicator icon:
: No input or illegal input
feature)
F Origin control:
Origin input window controls origin of the new coordinate system. In case of default,
- 543 -
RationalDMIS uses 0. Origin input window accepts value input, drag-and-drop of real variable
from variable data field and drag-and-drop of features that are simplified into points from feature
data field. Empty position control: when origin input window is empty, 3-2-1 setup has no position
control, and coordinate origin of “current coordinate system” will be regarded as that of new
coordinate system.
Input value or variable: value in the input window shows that features will use this value in
coordinate axis selected by the new coordinate system.
Example of primary coordinate axis control is as follows:
In the new coordinate generated after setup of ‘Create Coordinate’, direction of the theoretical
feature “PLN1” is the same as that of Z Axis, and position of “PLN1” makes Z=0;
Input features that can be simplified into points: inputting features that can be simplified into
points shows that origin selected by the new coordinate system is on this feature.
Example of counter coordinate axis control is as follows:
Theoretical feature “LN1” is to align +X direction of the new coordinate, and Y origin of the new
coordinate is on theoretical feature “CIR1”.
G Operating button:
These buttons cannot be used when they are not input or are illegally input..
These buttons cannot be used when they are not input or are illegally input.
< Preview >: When the button is useable, click the button and users can view
(Note: coordinate system can be previewed only when
“automatically display CRD” in “option icon and pull-down menu”
in toolbar of graphical window)
H Full control:
- 544 -
Complete control means that the feature input can completely control action of the new coordinate
without any information about current coordinate system. The following example shows full
control:
I Partial control:
Partial control means that the feature input cannot completely action of the new coordinate system,
and partial parameters of “current coordinate system” are needed to establish new coordinate
system.
There is no origin control. Origin of new coordinate system is the same as that of current
coordinate system.
This shows only primary axis under control, and other two axes are not under control.
Rotate Z Axis of current coordinate system to make X Axis direction align with vertical
component of theoretical line “LN1”.
When learn mode is on, there will be DMIS statement of coordinate system transfer in addition to
new coordinate system, which can be seen as follows:
DMIS:
D(New Crd Label) = DATSET/ …
D(New Crd Label) = ROTATE/ …
- 545 -
Coordinate system – Offset Coordinate
A Purpose:
It is applied to establish a plane through respectively inputting the distances away from features
that can be implied into points, and to align the plane direction with direction of the new
coordinate selected. Translation of coordinate origin to this plane is optional.
B Current coordinate system:

Current coordinate is basic coordinate system ready for offset. The window will display name of
current coordinate system as default. A coordinate system can be dragged and dropped from
coordinate system data window to this window. Coordinate system in “reference coordinate” can
be current coordinate system or other coordinate systems. Offset coordinate system is absolute
coordinate system, so “current coordinate system” is important to create a new coordinate system.
C New coordinate system:

New coordinate is the name of new coordinate system after translation. In default, RationalDMIS
will provide an available name for the next coordinate system. Users can input what they want to
modify name of the coordinate system. Name of new coordinate system should be a legal DMIS
label name, or the button is grey and cannot be used.
DMIS label name:
D Coordinate axis control:

The method of offset coordinate system applies the offset plane evaluated to align coordinate axis
in the new coordinate system selected by coordinate axis control, in which there are the following
options:
+Z Dir / -Z Dir / +Y Dir / -Y Dir/ +X Dir/ -X Dir
Coordinate axis and direction selected by the new coordinate system are parallel to the offset plane
evaluated.
E Feature input window:

Input window can accept drag-and-drop of features that are simplified into points. These features
can be dragged and dropped into input window from data field of features or directly from
graphical window. Feature input window can be used together with distance input window to
evaluate an offset plane. The points input cannot be in one line, or there will be no plane.
- 546 -
F Distance input window:
Distance input window accepts drag-and-drop of real variable from variable data field or value
directly input from keyboard. The value input is controlled by distance unit of RationalDMIS and
should be more than or equal to 0.
Offset plane evaluated

The offset plane evaluated means the plane which has a fixed distance from three different points.
Take the above window for example, offset plane evaluated is 2 away from “TP1”, “TP2” and
“TP3” respectively.
Note:
a. There will be two offset planes meeting evaluation condition. RationalDMIS will evaluate
and create offset plane according to the right-hand rule.
b. Offset plane may not be evaluated through inputting random distance value.
G Translation control:
Translation check box controls whether to move the coordinate axis origin selected to the offset
plane evaluated. When the check box is selected, coordinate axis origin selected in the new
coordinate system will move to the offset plane, or origin of the new coordinate system will be the
same as that of “current coordinate system”.
H Indicator icon:
: No imput or illegal input
feature).
I Operating button:
- 547 -
- 548 -
Coordinate – Create Coordinate System by Three Points
Bestfit
A Purpose:
It is applied to create a new coordinate system. Position value of features in the new coordinate
system that can be simplified into points is equal to or near the value that input into the window by
theoretical position.
B Theoretical coordinate system:

The window will display name of current coordinate system as default. A coordinate system can
be dragged and dropped from a coordinate system data window to this window. Coordinate system
in “theoretical coordinate system” can be seen as current coordinate system or other coordinate
systems. Initial value in “theoretical position input window” is based on “theoretical coordinate
system”.

DMIS label name:
D Feature input window:

graphical window. These features should be real features.
Note: whether theoretical features or real features are dragged and dropped into the input
window, RationalDMIS will try to use values of real features, and indicator icon is just to
show feature type.
E Theoretical position input window:

When a feature that can be simplified into point is dragged and dropped into the feature input
window, its theoretical position value will automatically be written into corresponding input
- 549 -
window. Theoretical position value is based on “theoretical coordinate system”. Theoretical
position value can also be modified by keyboard input.
F Mean error:
Mean error check box provides two optional evaluations. In general, it is not always successful to
evaluate precise new coordinate system through features whose real values in “theoretical
coordinate system” are nearly the same as theoretical values. In default, if mean error check box is
not selected, RationalDMIS will firstly choose Point1 value before Point2 and Point3, but when
mean error check box is selected, values of these points are equally important.
G Operating button:

DMIS:
D(New Crd Label) = LOCATE/FA(1), FA(2), FA(3)
Note: Three points bestfit coordinate system only updates theoretical feature value in feature list
window into the new coordinate system.
- 550 -
Coordinate System – Two Points Offset Alignment
Coordinate System
A Purpose:
It is applied to create a new coordinate system. Position value of the feature that is the first to be
simplified into point in the new coordinate system is the same as that in input window (green line
box) on the right, and offset value of the feature that is the second to be simplified into point in the
new coordinate system is also dependent on the input window on the right.

Current coordinate is basic coordinate system ready for offset. A coordinate system can be dragged
and dropped from a coordinate system data window to this window. Coordinate system in
“reference coordinate” can be current coordinate system or other coordinate systems. Initial value
of “theoretical position input window” is based on “theoretical coordinate system.”

DMIS label name:
D Work plane:
Two points offset is conducted in two-dimensional plane, and only one of planes in
three-dimensional “current coordinate system”. Planes can be selected include XY plane, YZ
plane and ZX plane. When a work plane is selected, corresponding input window will change their
coordinate types (such as changing from X, Y to Y, Z).
E Feature Input window:

graphical window.
F Theoretical position input window:
- 551 -
When a feature that can be simplified into point is dragged and dropped into the feature input
window, its theoretical position value will automatically be written into corresponding input
window. Theoretical position value is based on “theoretical coordinate system”. Theoretical
position value can also be modified by keyboard input.
G Offset position selection and input window:

When a feature that can be simplified into point is dragged and dropped into the lower feature
input window, its theoretical position value will automatically be written into corresponding
theoretical position and selection input window. The position value displayed is based on “current
coordinate system”. Position value can also be modified by keyboard input.
Error evaluation method:

There are two error evaluation methods in pull-down menu, including linear error average and
point error average.
Linear error average: the second feature is on the line from the first feature and the second feature
input value under the new coordinate system;
Point error average: error of the second feature is average in 2 directions under the new cooridnate
system.
If it is expected that error evaluation result is in single direction of the second feature, it can select
direction from pull-down box of the second feature. Parameters with designated directions will
include all errors, and another three coordinates of the first and second features are free of error.
Two input windows of the second feature control offset volume and offset direction
respectively.
+Dir means approaching to position of the first input point in forward direction.
-Dir means approaching to position of the first input point in reverse direction.
See the following example where direction is controlled by X and offset volume is controlled
by Y. The blue circle is the first input point while red circle is the second input point. It can
also controls direction with Y and controls offset volume with X, and the theory is similar.
- 552 -
H Operating button:

DMIS: (it occurs only when real feature value is applied for
offset alignment)
D(New Crd Label) = LOCATE/FA(1),FA(2)
- 553 -
Coordinate System – Six Points Bestfit Coordinate System
A Purpose:
It is mainly applied to align at workpiece, to establish a new coordinate system with 6 precise
features in the input list window that can be simplified into points and make position values of
these points in new coordinate system the same as or near that displayed in input list window.

Current coordinate system is the basic coordinate system ready for bestfit. The window will
display name of current coordinate system as default. A coordinate system can be dragged and
dropped from a coordinate system data window to this window.
It is important to choose a correct coordinate system. The function of six-point bestfit is to

create a corrected transfer to reflect the current coordinate system into new coordinate
system.

DMIS label name:
D Feature input list window:

graphical window. When there are just 6 point features in the list window, begin to evaluate the
bestfit coordinate system. All point features should be real features. When real point features are
dragged and dropped into the list window, position values of these features will displayed in
theoretical value input area on the right of feature label. Position value of feature is based on
“current coordinate system”.
Each theoretical value input area is editable, so users can define bestfit action by themselves.
E CAD model:
CAD model can be used to evaluate bestfit result through iteration. When CAD model is needed,
- 554 -
the model name can be dragged and dropped from feature data field into “CAD model” window.
When CAD model is not used, bestfit is evaluated only once.
When CAD model is used, RationalDMIS will re-define theoretical point feature through
projecting point feature to CAD model.
F Delete button:
Users are allowed to use two delete buttons to delete feature selected in input list window (the
upper button) or delete all features in input list window (the lower button).
G Iteration button :
This button is for iteration definition. When this button is pressed, the following iteration attribute
window will display.
Variable name: it should be a real variable and can be dragged and dropped from
variable data field into input window.
Iteration label: RationalDMIS uses this label to create an iteration start point.
Failure label: when expected result cannot be satisfied, RationalDMIS will use this
label to quit iteration.
The maximum iteration: is an integer or integer variable to control the maximum times
of iteration.
Convergency value: RationalDMIS uses this convergency value as condition of quitting
iteration.
Pull-down selection box for feature 1 to feature 6 is used for setting error inspection. In
the above example window, feature 1, feature 2 and feature 3 are used to set inspecting error only
along Z coordinate axis. Feature 4 and feature 5 are used to set inspecting along, and feature is
used to set inspecting along Y coordinate axis.
When there are two options “absolute” and “increase” in method pull-down selection box, it
controls error evaluation. “Absolute” means that error is the distance from real value to theoretical
value along evaluation coordinate axis selected. “Increase” means that error is the difference
between two adjacent iterations.
“Use iteration” in check box can generate iteration DMIS statement.
I Operating button:
< Preview >： When the button is useable, click the button and users can
- 555 -
view new coordinate systems that will be generated from
graphic area. But the button will not generate any new
coordinate systems.

“automatically display CRD” in “option icon and
pull-down menu” in toolbar of graphical window.
<Add/activate The button carries out function of <add coordinate system>

coordinate system >: button and activate the new coordinate system into current
coordinate system at the same time.
DMIS: (the following specific codes are generated by
RationalDMIS)
Note: six-point bestfit coordinate system updates feature theoretical value into new
coordinate system.
- 556 -
Coordinate System – Multi Points Bestfit Coordinate System
A Purpose:
It is mainly applied to align at workpiece, to establish a new coordinate system with all features in
the input list window that can be simplified into points and make position values of these points in
new coordinate system the same as or near that displayed in input list window.

be dragged and dropped from coordinate system data window to this window. Coordinate system
in “reference coordinate” can be current coordinate system or other coordinate systems.
It is important to choose a correct coordinate system. The function of multi-point bestfit is to

create a corrected transfer to reflect the current coordinate system into new coordinate
system.

DMIS label name:
D Feature input list window:

graphical window. All point features should be real features. Three check boxes X, Y and Z are
connected to each input point feature respectively. In default, the three check boxes X, Y and Z are
selected.
Selection of check box means this coordinate value is sued in bestfit, or this coordinate value will
not be used in bestfit.
E Freedom degree control:

There are 6 freedom degrees in bestfit, including 3 rotation degrees and 3 translation degrees. In
- 557 -
freedom degree control, each of these 6 check boxes controls a freedom degree. When they are
selected, it means this freedom degree can be used, vice versa.
F Delete button:
G Error
When “bestfit” is clicked, there will be evaluation of error status and result of error evaluation.
Click arrows to return:
Error indicator is only used for displaying information, including two types. “Initial LES” is the
sum of minimum mean square errors before bestfit. “New LES” is the sum of minimum mean
square errors after bestfit. “New LES” should be less than “Initial LES”.
H Iteration :
This button is for iteration definition. When this button is pressed, the following iteration attribute
window will display.
Variable name: it should be a real variable and can be dragged and dropped from
variable data field into input window.
Iteration label: RationalDMIS uses this label to create an iteration start point.
Failure label: when expected result cannot be satisfied, RationalDMIS will use this
label to quit iteration.
The maximum iteration: is an integer or integer variable to control the maximum times
- 558 -
of iteration.
Convergency value: RationalDMIS uses this convergency value as condition of quitting
iteration.
When there are two options “absolute” and “increase” in method pull-down selection box, it
controls error evaluation. “Absolute” means that error is the distance from real value to theoretical
value along evaluation coordinate axis selected. “Increase” means that error is the difference
between two adjacent iterations.
“Use iteration” in check box can generate iteration DMIS statement.
I Update the theoretical value:

When a new coordinate system is established, theoretical value of the feature is transferred under
the new coordinate system, so theoretical value of the feature before transformation is the same as
that under “theoretical coordinate system”.
Note: version before V5.5 makes updating theoretical value as default, so to make previous
old program compatible, it can set updating by program setting – feature setting – moving
coordinate system under theoretical feature.
J Operating button:

DMIS: (the following specific codes are generated by RationalDMIS)
- 559 -
- 560 -
Coordinate System – Merge Coordinate System
A Purpose:
It is mainly applied to align at workpiece, and to establish a new coordinate system through
transforming an existing one, which is similar to the other two coordinate systems.

be dragged and dropped from coordinate system data window to this window. Coordinate system
in “reference coordinate” can be current coordinate system or other coordinate systems. “Current
coordinate system” can generate a new coordinate system through transforming.
It is important to choose a correct coordinate system. The function of this coordinate system
window is to create a corrected transfer to reflect the current coordinate system into new
coordinate system.

label name, or the button is grey and cannot be used
DMIS label name:
E Coordinate system to be transferred:

This window accepts drag-and-drop of coordinate system from coordinate system data field.
F Transferred coordinate system:

This window accepts drag-and-drop of coordinate system from coordinate system data field.
Assuming that there is a transfer M which can connect these two coordinate systems, then there is
a relationship that:
“Coordinate system to be transferred” * M = “Transferred coordinate system”
And this relationship is similar to the following one.
“Current coordinate system” * M = “new coordinate system”
G Feature list window to be updated:
- 561 -
This window accepts drag-and-drop of all features except CAD model. There is a check box
beside each feature dragged and dropped. Using this window is to apply transformation between
two coordinate systems to these features. When “only theoretical value” check box is selected,
only theoretical feature is transformed.
H Delete button:
I Operating button:

< Add coordinate The button can establish a new coordinate system from new
DMIS statement recorded by learning.
- 562 -
Coordinate System-3-2-1 Coordinate System Creation
Method II
A Purpose:
Mainly applicable to digifax aligning workpiece. Create a coordinate system with all features
capable of reduction to a point, in which the 3 feature of the first group is the main data, the 2
feature of the second group is the subordinate data and the 1 feature of the third group is most
subordinate.

Current coordinate is basic coordinate system ready for offset. The window will display name of
current coordinate system as default. A coordinate system can be dragged and dropped from
coordinate system data window to this window. Coordinate system in “reference coordinate” can
be current coordinate system or other coordinate systems. “Current coordinate system” can
generate a new one trough transformation.

DMIS label name：
D Feature input window:

Input window is capable of capable of reduction to drag-and-stop of beacon-free feature, which
can be dragged to input window from feature data field or graphics window. The 3 feature input
windows from left to right can be subsequently filled with 3, 2, 1 feature.
E Use theory relation:

The check box designates the method of calculating new coordinate system.
a. As check box is pitched on, all features in the feature input window shall have actual feature
in existence. Rational DMIS will achieve the conversion between “current coordinate system”
- 563 -
and “new coordinate system” by shifting from theoretical feature to actual feature.
Note: Selecting the proper coordinate system is important. “Current coordinate system”
must be in CAD model, which under normal condition is “MCS”.
There are 3 balls on CAD model. Define the 3 balls in the CAD coordinate system, measure the
actual feature of the 3 balls in the actual part of CAD model meanwhile. There are 3 balls at
current whose theoretical feature is in CAD model and actual feature is in actual part of the CAD
model. Drag the 3 balls to feature list window at present, as follows:
After load of CAD model, the current coordinate system “MCS” is the coordinate system of CAD
model. The new coordinate system “CRD1” will act as the coordinate system of CAD model on
the machine.
b. When the check box is not pitched on, the window will turn into configuration window of
ordinary 3-2-1 coordinate system, however the number of employed feature capable of reduction
to point is 6 at most and 3 at least.
Special attention: with this method, feature is to distinguish theory and practice. If the icon
indication is the actual feature, the calculation will employ actual feature. If it is theoretical
feature, the theoretical feature will be employed. Meanwhile, the method doesn’t depend on
that which coordinate system is the current one.
- 564 -
Note that when check box is not pitched on, the selection of coordinate system control changes
into available mode. Primary axis control has following options:
+Z Dir；-Z Dir；+Y Dir；-Y Dir；+X Dir；-X Dir
Choose one of coordinate axis direction and 3elemnt capable of reduction to point to determine
the direction of the plane (the direction of the plane follows right hand code for the input order of
the 3 points). The original point of the selected coordinate system will move to the plane.
The window of the second pull-down list controls the direction of the layshaft. The option in the
pull-down list changes in line with the direction of the principal axis. The change in dynamic state
will guarantee that the options of the layshaft do not include the direction of the principal axis. For
example, if principal axis chooses +z direction, the choice of layshaft can be
+Y Dir；-Y Dir；+X Dir；-X Dir
The 3-2-1 coordinate system creation method II allows the axis direction of the new coordinate
system aligned to the direction of straight line which is determined by 2 input features and is
capable of reduction to line.
The direction of the straight line is from the first point to the second point. Aligning is achieved by
rotating the principal coordinate axis. When the direction of the input feature is not vertical with
the principal axis, the vertical component of line direction and principal axis direction will be
employed.
The original point of the third coordinate axis will move to the straight line.
The feature input window of the third coordinate axis controls the original point of the
second coordinate axis.
F Operating button:
<Preview>: When the button is useable, click the button and users can
view new coordinate systems that will be generated from
graphic area. But the button will not generate any new
- 565 -
coordinate systems.

“automatically display CRD” in “option icon and
pull-down menu” in toolbar of graphical window.
<Add coordinate The button can establish a new coordinate system from
system>: new coordinate system window. But do not activate the
coordinate system into current one.
<Add/activate The button carries out function of <add coordinate

coordinate system>: system> button and activate the new coordinate system
into current coordinate system at the same time.
Note: 3-2-1 coordinate system method II does not generate any DMIS statement, but refresh
theoretical value of all features to the new coordinate system.
- 566 -
Coordinate System-Quick 3-2-1 Coordinate System Creation
Creation step of typical 3-2-1 workpiece coordinate system is as follows:

1. Measure the geometrical characteristic used to create component alignment, usually a
plane of the component is measured.
2. Measure other necessary geometrical characteristic to lock the degree of freedom of the
component.
3. Set the original point, create a coordinate system, and lock the workpiece.
A Purpose:
Create a new coordinate system via direct measurement. Unlike creation window of other
coordinate system, this window is the creation window as well as the measurement window. It can
click and select the measurement point.
B Basic coordinate system:

In this method of coordinate system creation, “reference coordinate system” is not important and
can be ignored.
C New Coordinate system:

DMIS label name:
D Measuring and creating indication window of coordinate system:

There are two configurations, one is six-point-measurement configuration, and another is
three-point-measurement configuration. Red dot refers to the next measurement point. When one
point is being measured, the red dot will move to the next point, until all points are measured; the
operating button (brown wireframe) changes into available mode.
Pink wireframe part in the green wireframe is hot spot the coordinate system positioning shows
and there are 4 combinations. Every click of mouse left button on the hot spot will change the
- 567 -
coordinate system positioning.
The supporting picture show how RationalDMIS constitutes new coordinate system. The 3 points
of the first group determines the primary axis Z. The 2 points of the second group determines the
second coordinate axis which is determined by configuration. The last point determines the
original point.
Special attention: the online creation method of the coordinate system depends little on the
direction of the probe, probe compensation, working, etc which mathematical point needs by
default. The centre of sphere of probe and the original point of the later compensation coordinate
creates the coordinate system. You can compare this method with actual radius of the sphere
whose virtual sum has been calculated. Those who are interested can refer to the DMIS statement
generated after check box “creating feature” is pitched on and these DMIS statement will simulate
the course.
E Employing the 3 points:

The 3 points can be employed to determine the coordinate system. As the check box is pitched on,
the supporting picture will change into:
It is obvious that the first point becomes the original point of the new coordinate system. The 3
points determines the primary axis Z. The 2 points of the first group determines the second
coordinate axis which is determined by configuration
F Creating feature:
Measurement points used for creating new coordinate system do not need to be stored in the
database. By default, they will be lost after new coordinate system is created. But the option
“Creating feature” can be used to store these points. As this check box is pitched on, DMIS
statement which is generated when self-learning mode is on will be created. The generated DMIS
statement is capable of rerunning.
G Original point excursion:

The excursion of the original point of X, Y and Z axis allows user to move the original point of the
new coordinate system for a given distance when creating new coordinate system.
H Delete button:
- 568 -
right button) or delete all features in input list window (the left button).
I Prompt box for feature measurement type:

There are 4 types of methods:
Quick 3-2-1 coordinate system: (default)
Quick 3-3-2 coordinate system:
Quick 3-3-3 coordinate system:
Quick equant coordinate system:
J Operating button:
These buttons cannot be used when they are not input or are illegally input:
<Preview>: when the button is useable, click the button and users can view new coordinate
systems that will be generated from graphic area. But the button will
not generate any new coordinate systems.
- 569 -
<Add coordinate system>: the button can establish a new coordinate system from new
coordinate system window. But do not activate the coordinate
<Add/activate coordinate system>: the button carries out function of <add coordinate
system> button and activate the new coordinate system into current
DMIS procedure: in Quick 3-2-1 coordinate system and Quick equant coordinate system,
self-learning recording DMIS procedure will work when creating feature is checked.
Updating the theoretical value: updating the theoretical value of all features in the new
coordinate system.
- 570 -
Coordinate System-CAD Aligned Coordinate System
A Purpose:
Applied to digifax workpiece aligning. Take 3 theoretical feature from the CAD, drag to the “3
feature on CAD” box, then use operation box to control the machine, measure the corresponding
actual feature of the 3 theoretical features to achieve the quick aligning between digifax and
workpiece.
Note: the feature in the list window must be 3.
B New coordinate system:

Aligning coordinate system
C CAD model:
Employ the CAD data label name; when dragged, the edit window of CAD model will be filled
with CAD model label name automatically.
D 3 theoretical features on CAD:

Drag 3 theoretical features from the CAD to this window.
Combination supported at present: plane—plane—plane/plane—line—point/plane—point—point
（Attention: point is excluded）
The plane could be flat plane
The line could be straight line, cylinder, cone and keyway
The point could be dot, sphere, circle, arc and ellipse
E Judging mechanism for feature measurement:

In the judging mechanism for feature measurement, the software will judge if the
measurement is finished automatically according to the approaching direction of
machine measuring point. Red means the measurement is finished while blue means the
measurement is on-going.
F Count Window:
Displays the number of measure point in measurement
J Operating button:
- 571 -

DMIS procedure: this method does not generate DMIS procedure
- 572 -
Coordinate System- Iterative Alignment-Fitted Coordinate
System
A. Purpose:
It is applied to align at workpiece. It is used to control measure point of degree of freedom and
make CAD digital analogy participate in operation and establish a new coordinate system.
B. Current coordinate system:

The window will display name of current active coordinate system as default.
C. New coordinate system:

New coordinate system is the name of new coordinate system after iterative computations. Users
can input names of coordinate system they want. Name of new coordinate system should be a
legal DMIS label name.
D. Feature input window:

graphical window.
E. Parameter input window:

CAD model: drag and drop CAD label from CAD node to edit window.
The maximum iteration: is an integer or integer variable to control the maximum times of
iteration.
Transformed value: RationalDMIS uses the convergency value as condition of quitting iteration.
F. Error indication
Error condition calculation should be carried out after clicking on “iteration” and error calculation
result will be displayed.
Error indication is just used to display information and there are two varieties in total. “Original
- 573 -
Les” is to fit the former minimum mean squared error. “New LES” is to fit the latter minimum
mean squared error and “new LES” should be smaller than “original LES”.
G. Operating button
<Iteration >: the software will carry out iterative operation automatically according to CAD
model and measure point and it will calculate aligned coordinate
system that controls CAD automatically according to aligned
conditions input by users.
DMIS program:
- 574 -
Coordinate System- Coordinate System Mapping
A. Purpose
Unlike other operating window of coordinate system, the window will not generate a new
coordinate system. The window is used to show relationship of two existed coordinate systems
including translation and rotation.
B. Transfer coordinate system from:

The window accepts the original coordinate system dragged and dropped from data field of
coordinate system.
C. Transfer coordinate system to:

The window accepts the transferred coordinate system dragged and dropped form data field of
coordinate system.
D. Conversion parameter window

The relationships among 3 rotations, 3 original coordinate systems of translation mapping and
transferred coordinate system. Displayed result is based on the original system to show conditions
of rotation of coordinate system and translation of origin of coordinate.
E. Output buttons:
The button outputs conversion parameter to output window and output file.
- 575 -
Status Region
The status panel of Rational DMIS machine is located on the lower right of the software interface,
which indicates the various status of the software.
Every status can be solely dragged to expected location of the interface by pressing the header
with the left button of the mouse.
Press the small arrow icon on the upper right corner of the “machine location” to restore the
window to status interface.
- 576 -
The use of the “machine position” interface
is to move coordinate measuring machine
with various method.
Refer to the coordinate system used
presently, move to the expected location by
drag-and-drop and input.
Even though the machine is in offline
mode, the move of machine on the
sofyware graph via dummy operational box
Keyboard input widow can be dragged and
stopped by theory element and actual
element.
The “Setting” can set the parameter of

automatic measurement.
Incluede: approach distance, backspacing
distance, depth, identity distance,
detection range.
”Number display window” will show the

present central location of the point
gauge.
The software has 2 “number display
window” in total.
The two windows accept the
drag-and-drop of the coordinate system,
indicating as the present amchine
positional value
”Feature watch” will display the

deviation of designated size or location
designated by the present mmeasued
element.
Amend immediately.
- 577 -
”System information” will display and
store error message hinted by the
software.
The information can also be solely stored
as a text file.
The window content will be emptied by
the software restart.
”Measure” provides 2 measurement

modes: straight line and arc.
- 578 -
Status Region-Position Control
Position Control-Absolute Position Move
Move the machine to the position of a designated absolute value. After the click of the app
and the movement of the machine, the coordinate value displayed by the “data display
window” is the window input value.
the refresh icon refreshes the point gauge and it will appear in the input box;
The dialog box can output numerical value, element or variable.
X-axis:drag the element CIRI to the dialog box.
Y-axis: drag the variable in the variable data area to the dialog box.
Z-axis:inout numerical value,sentivity to present unit, dafault to

millimater.
In offline movement, the lager the speed value of the dummy movement of
the machine model, the faster the offline model moves.
- 579 -
After pressing
“preview”, graphical
interface of the software will
flash and display the
location of the measuring
head after movement.
After pressing”apply”,
measuring head will
actually move to the
preview location in the
graph.
- 580 -
Position Control-Relative Position Movement
The machine makes a movement versus present actual location, and the amount of
movement is the input value in the box below.
The dialog box can accept the drag-and-stop of the variable or direct numerical input.
After pressing the “apply”, the variable value and numerical value in the dialog box is the location
deviation in the direction of X, Y, Z axis between pro-movement and post-movement.
- 581 -
Position Control-Move in the Designated Direction
Move the machine in the designated direction in accordance with the input in the following
box.
Drop-down list corresponding to vector, 3 options:
”Manual input”
The machine will move in direction
corresponding to I, J, K input in the dialog
box
The numberical value in the dialog box is the
move distance, and the example is 50
Xentivity to present unit
”Measuring head direction”

The machine will move in the direction
corresponding to stylus.
”Measurement point direction”

Press the visuals in the software plot area
with the left button of the mouse, and the
machine will move in the direction clicked
by the mouse
The numberical value in the dialog box is the
move distance, and the example is 50
- 582 -
3 options in the method:
Direction:
This options means that the selected direction and location are applied to the calculation of the
machine move location. The new machine move location is move in the selected direction. The
move distance is the distance input in the box.
Direction + location:
machine move location.
1. The present location of the projection machine moves to the location determined by the
selected direction and location.
2. The subpoint from the step 1 will move in the selected direction, and the move distance is
the distance input in the box. The post-move location is the new machine location.
Location:
machine move location. The new machine move location is move in the selected direction (the
distance input in the distance window).
- 583 -
Position Control-Dummy Joystick
: Dummy joystick is a stick simulated with software.
Press the graph of the operational box with the mouse; simulate the machine movement like using
the actual operational box.
Default status of Press the left button of Press the left button of Press the right button of
the operational the mouse, traverse the mouse, tranverse the mouse, tranverse
box graph from right to left and from from front to back from front to back and
the other way around and the other way around the other way around
Lock the check box, allow the lock machine to move in the direction
of coordinate axis, i.e. the shift of the joystick will not make the
machine move in the direction of coordinate axis.
Press the left button of the mouse and move joystick graph to the right, the machine
will move in the direction of the +X-axis; Press the left button of the mouse and move
the joystick graph to the front, the machine move in the direction of the +Y-axis
Press the left button of the mouse and move joystick graph to the right, the machine will
move in the direction of the -Y-axis; Press the left button of the mouse and move joystick
graph to the front,, the machine will move in the direction of the -X-axis
Press the left button of the mouse and move joystick graph to the right, the machine will
move in the direction of the +X-axis; Press the left button of the mouse and move the
joystick graph to the front, the machine move in the direction of the -Y-axis
- 584 -
Press the left button of the mouse and move the joystick graph to the right, the
machine move in the direction of the +Y-axis; Press the left button of the mouse and
move the joystick graph to the front, the machine move in the direction of the -X-axis
The shift of the joystick will make the machine move along X,
Y, Z in the coordinate system.
The shift of the joystick will make the machine move along X, Y, Z
in the coordinate system.
It means the the move of the joystick is virtual image, the machine
doesn’t move; after the move is confirmed, the machine will move to
the place of the virtual image; the yellow image in the following graph
is the image of the dummy sensor.
It means when the graph of operational box is controlled with

the mouse, the machine will move accordingly in real time.
The graph can make the graph of the dummy measuring head return to the
present location of the actual machine.
The graph can make the graph of the dummy measuring head return to the present
location of the actual machine.
The above 2 icons will flash only when is chosen.
Press the graph, a GOTO statement will be recorded in the

DMIS program area.
- 585 -
Position Control-Dragger
： Activate the dragger, a drag window whose center is point gauge will
appear in the plot area; drag the central point freely with the mouse,
point at the location of the point gauge move.
Activate the dragger; the following graph will appear in the software plot area:
Press the left button of the mouse in the white plane, the dummy position can be dragged freely at
the height of the plane.
The green cylinder is perpendicular to the white plane; pressing the cylinder with the left button
allows dragging dummy location along the cylinder.
- 586 -
Choose , the dragger graph will appear in line with machine coordinate. Choose ，the
dragger graph will appear in line with component coordinate.
The options is the coordinate system plane determined by white plane when dragger graph is gene
rated, and green cylinder is vertical with the plane
The green cylinder of the dragger graph will keep in line with the
measuring head, as shown below:
Reset button, which can bring the dummy machine back to the location of the actual
machine.
Move the machine to the location of the dummy machine.
Record the location of the present location of measuring head as the first GOTO statement in
the program area.
- 587 -
Position Control-Soft Reset
Set a dummy reset point to allow the machine to move to the recorded location after the
press of the reset button.
The numerical value in the input field is the coordinate value set.
After pressing and setting the reset, press the reset, the machine will move to the coordinate set;
when measuring for parts replacement, the sensor shall move to a safe location.
- 588 -
Status Region-Data Display Window
There are 2 data display windows functions of which are basically the same as displaying the
present location of the machine, but each has its display property.
Unlocked, the coordinate value in the display frame will refresh with the currently activated
coordinate system.
Locked, the coordinate value of the data display frame will always indicate the coordinate
value of the measuring head in the relatively-designated coordinate system (indicated as MCS in
the above figure)
XYZ Indicates the coordinate value center of the machine point gauge.
XYZAB Indicates the coordinate value center of the machine point gauge and
AB angle of present measuring head.
AB Indicates the AB angle of present measuring head.
Set the digit of the decimals which indicate the coordinate value of the
present location of the machine.
- 589 -
Status Region-Measurement Setup
Measuring head configuration window is applied to DCC machine and offline programming, and
it controls certain machine move behaviors in the course of measurement.
Set a distance to allow the measuring head to get into

measuring condition when is is, such as 10 millimaters,
from the measurement point.
Set the distance value of the backspacing after the

measuring head triggers the measurement point.
- 590 -
Set a distance so that there is a decrease of 10 millimeter in
measurement point of the linear elements, compared with plane of
theory elements.
Set many elements in measurement to prevent collision

with the safety height set.
Set a distance so that the measuring head can be elevated,such as 20

millimeters prior to measurement of each element when many
elements are measured in drag-and-stop manner or DMIS program is
generated.
Accept the drag-and-stop of the planar element; in measurement of
many features, every element can be elevated, such as 20 from the
plane PLN1 prior to measurement.
Close the identity interface set; when many measurement

sare conducted, the distance won’t rise automatically.
When the measuring head reached the theoretical

measurement point, if there is no trigger, continue towards
the trigger direction.
Press “apply” to accept the input value set by

measurement; if the “self-learning” of the software is
opened, DMIS program will be recorded automatically.
- 591 -
Status Region-Feature Observation
Display the designated information of the last measured element in real time to facilitate
adjustment. The number will show different color in line with the set of the element tolerance; red
means out of tolerance and yellow means qualified.
The name field doesn’t need designating for it refreshes to be the

currently measured element. Pitch on the element in the element
data field, entry into the window will be automatic; element grag is
acceptanble as well.
Control the digit of decimals in the information of

designated element.
Move the mouse to the name of

parameter, hover, the mouse wilk change
into the shape of hand and a small arrow
will appear on the lower right.
Click the parameter name with the left

button of the mouse, the item necessary
for choice in the menu will pop up.
- 592 -
Element observation format II:
Drag out the element observation window, turn it up, the window will change into other model, as
follows:
The second format of the floating window can adjust the font size automatically; the selected
element will appear automatically in the element data field; if automatic switch of the element is
not wanted, press the lock icon
If lock icon is pressed, display mode won’t change automatically.

Icon A can be used to increase or decrease the font size.
- 593 -
Status Region-Error Message
Error message window will record operational issue or information of various issues to facilitate
the troubleshooting. After restart, the window will be cleared.
Clear the error message window.
Click and the dialog box will pop up; store all
information in error message window in a text
file.
- 594 -
Status Region-Measurement
Measuring interface provides 2 methods: straight line, arc.
Straight Line: the purpose is create step-by-step mobile measurement, the move axis sets the
direction of step-by-step move, the move gross sets the step-by-step distance, gauging spindle
determines the approaching direction.
Attention: this measurement mode should be employed with cartogram of operational area of
measurement, here establishes the measuring path, the window of the cartogram accepts the
measurement point.
Arc: the initial position of the measurement is the present location of measuring head; select the
working plane and the radius of the measured circle to define a circle, specify the number of
measuring points, create the measurement of a circle rapidly and automatically.
Measurement type of the arc can be set as scan type; first of all, trigger designated counts of
measurement to determine a circle, then scan automatically; only when present measuring head is
activated as scan measuring head can scanning mode be employed.
- 595 -
Status Bar
The lower right corner of the software UI is status bar:
Determine the length unit of the software.
Determine the angular unit of the software
Determine the csys type of the software.
Cart: Descartes rectangular coordinate system
Pol-XY: cylindrical polar coordinates system, and the plane of

the polar coordinate is XY plane
Pol-YZ: cylindrical polar coordinates system, and the plane of

the polar coordinate is YZ plane
Pol-ZX: cylindrical polar coordinates system, and the plane of

the polar coordinate is YZ plane
Path switch autogeneration: open the options and self-learning; as the joystick changes its
direction, the coordinate of the spatial point will be automatically recorded as DMIS locating point
to facilitate accretion of GOTO statement safely.
Compensation switch of measuring head: used to switch on the radius compensation of point
gauge when switching measurement.
FLY mode switch: machine will travel in arc path in operation when FLY mode is on.
The machine will travel in straight line when FLY mode is off.
- 596 -
Temperature compensation switch: control the temperature compensation of real time or
fixed value; the parameter set by thermal compensation window will work if this button is open.
- 597 -

Rational PCDMIS V5.5

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Rational PCDMIS V5.5

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

RationalDMIS User Manual

SOFTWARE AUTHORIZATION DESCRIPTION ............................................................................ 2

RATIONALDMIS HELP INFORMATION......................................................................................... 4

HELP-KEYBOARD OPERATION ......................................................... 4

INSTALL RATIONALDMIS ................................................................................................................ 9

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ............................................................. 9

QUICK USE GUIDE TO SOFTWARE .............................................................................................. 12

QUICK USE OF RATIONALDMIS ...................................................... 13

INTRODUCTION TO MAIN MENU AREA .................................................................................... 77

MAIN MENU-NEW ................................................................ 78

GRAPHIC AREA ............................................................................................................................... 168

GRAPH VIEWER F3.............................................................. 169

DOUBLE DATABASE ....................................................................................................................... 283

FEATURE DATABASE ............................................................. 285

FUNCTION OPERATION AREA .................................................................................................... 400

MEASUREMENT ................................................................. 401

STATUS REGION .............................................................................................................................. 576

STATUS REGION-POSITION CONTROL .................................................. 579

STATUS BAR...................................................................................................................................... 596

EXTERNAL-ARRAY SOFTWARE .INC

The authorization will be provided for cooperation manufacturer of EXTERNAL-ARRAY

It indicates that the software is authorized to “Delta Air lines, Inc.”

Name of key position:

Enter: return key.

Delete：Delete delete key to delete selected selection options.

Common mouse has left and right buttons;

Many operations in RationalDMIS can be completed through mouse operation.

Right click menu:

Mininum hardware requirement:

Prompt 1: found new hardware

Prompt 2: determine new hardware type

Prompt 3: your new hardware is installed and ready to use.

Note: Please don’t close computer power supply during installation.

Subjects covered mainly include the following:

Add new user

Create machine model

Create sensor calibration gage

Use construct-best-fit function

Use distance tolerance

Create simple output report

Create a simple DMIS program

Status window can display current status information of the machine.

User archives will save the following properties:

If you want to comprehensively use graphical function provided by RationalDMIS software, we

Left click Create Machine Model in Options:

At this time, you enter model creation interface

Left click to select appropriate machine model:

The system automatically selects “Set current machine model” in default:

Click “make model” to create new machine model:

Click sensor icon in operation toolbar

Select calibration sensor icon to enter sensor calibration panel

Click “calibration gage definition” Tab icon:

Fill in a name of calibration gage to be created in the drop-down menu

select updating calibration gage in calibration panel at the first manual

Input parameters of installation direction I, J and K of calibration gage:

Input specified offset distance:

Input diameter size of lower end pole of standard sphere:

Click button “definition” to complete definition for standard sphere:

Select “construct sensor” to enter construct sensor interface:

Label: stylus name

Diameter: shank diameter of stylus

After constructing, click “accept” to complete customing stylus.

Constructed stylus will be saved under corresponding directory:

Click “OK” to quit custom interface: